Script | Spoken-Tutorial - User contributions [en]

Digital-Divide/D0/Registration-of-an-account-for-online-train-ticket-booking/English-timed

2013-09-18T10:54:50Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|00.01
|Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on Registration of an account for online train booking.
|-
|00.07
|My name is Kannan . Moudgalya.
|-
|00.11
|In this tutorial,We will learn how to register a new account in irctc.co.in

|-
|00.19
|We will learn about
Entering user information,
Activating the account and
Changing the password.
|-
|00.27
|Some tips on user information
The name should be less than 10 characters long,
It can have letters, numbers and underscore
The security question is useful if we forget the password
The account activation information is sent to email and mobile
|-
|00.46
|We will see how to do this in the browser

|-
|00.49
|I have already open this web side - irctc.co.in

|-
|00.55
|Let me make the font bigger

|-
|00.57
|The first thing we have to do before by buying any ticket is to signup

|-
|01.00
|Let me press this – Signup and we get to this page

|-
|01.08
|It wants username

|-
|01.14
|Let me make this font size bigger – kannan.mou

|-
|01.22
|It doesn't accepted be on 10 characters

|-
|01.23
|It also says that maximum 10 characters

|-
|01.24
|Let me check the availability

|-
|01.30
|It says that the login name accepts letters, numbers & underscore but we have put a full stop

|-
|01.34
|So what I will do is

|-
|01.35
|I will come hear and put a underscore(_) mou and than I will check weather this name is available

|-
|01.45
|I get the message that the user Name is Available.. Please go head with the Registration process..

|-
|01.55
|I will make the font the bigger so that it is little easier to see

|-
|02.06
|Let as now enter other information

|-
|02.12
|Let as enter Security question

|-
|02.15
|This is useful to retrieve the password in case u forget it

|-
|02.20
|Let as choose “ What is your pets name? ”

|-
|02.23
|Let me enter snowy

|-
|02.25
|My first name is Kannan

|-
|02.31
|My last name is Moudgalya

|-
|02.35
|Leave gender as Male

|-
|02.40
|Marital status is Married

|-
|02.42
|Let me choose the date of birth as 20th December 1960

|-
|02.55
|Occupation as Government

|-
|02.58
|Email id I will choose as joker@iitb.ac.in it says as ''your password will be sent to this email id''

|-
|03.11
|Let me enter the mobile number – 8876543210 it says as '' Mobile verification code will be sent to this mobile number''

|-
|03.32
|Nationality we choose as India

|-
|03.36
|Residential address – 1, Main Road

|-
|03.43
|City a choose as Agra

|-
|03.49
|State I will choose as Uttra Pradesh

|-
|03.55
|Pin/Zip write it as 123456

|-
|04.03
|Country I will choose India

|-
|04.11
|You have to enter this properly

|-
|04.13
|You may use this address to receive ''I'' ticket

|-
|04.16
|Let me write the phone number as 01112345678

|-
|04.28
|If I want to give office address

|-
|04.34
|I can do so by processing ''No''

|-
|04.38
|In this case I will have to fill the details

|-
|04.42
|I don't want enter this details

|-
|04.44
|I press 'Yes' and close office address

|-
|04.48
|Let as go down

|-
|04.50
|Its want to now weather I receive your email

|-
|04.51
|your make this slightly smaller

|-
|05.00
|So I will say 'No' I don't want to receive any email's

|-
|05.05
|I have to enter verification code now – T37861W

|-
|05.18
|Let me submit

|-
|05.25
|It says that email id: joker@iitb.ac.in
|-
|05.32
|and mobile number: 8876543210
|-
|05.35
|will be validated. Press OK continue or Cancel to update

|-
|05.41
|Let me say OK

|-
|05.43
|Than it say Please indicate your acceptance or the Terms and Conditions button at the bottom of the page.

|-
|05.57
|Let me scroll down

|-
|06.00
|Let me just make this smaller so you get what it looks like
|-
|06.05
|So you can actually see by clicking each of these.
|-
|06.13
|Let us accept this

|-
|06.16
|Let me accept it.
Ok
|-
|06.20
|I have resume the recording.
|-
|06.22
|I actually paused it because sometimes irctc is little slow
|-
|06.27
|It took sometime
|-
|06.30
|Than I get a message thank you you have been successfully registered.
|-
|06.34
|Let me make this bigger
|-
|06.35
|Says that your user-id password and activation link has been send to your registered Email id
|-
|06.41
|and mobile verification code has been send to registered mobile number.
|-
|06.46
|Please use the activation link and mobile verification code to activate your account.

|-
|06.54
|I just returned to the slide let us learn about activating the account
|-
|07.01
|An email will be received from IRCTC
|-
|07.05
|Click the link given in the email
|-
|07.08
|Or, copy paste the link in the browser
|-
|07.11
|This will open a web page
|-
|07.15
|Enter the code send to the mobile
|-
|07.17
|This activates the account.
|-
|07.21
|Let us do this on the web browser
|-
|07.25
|Let me do as it says
|-
|07.28
|First I will go to my email address

|-
|07.33
|I get the following mail
|-
|07.35
|My user-id is given her
|-
|07.37
|Kannan_mou
|-
|07.38
|My password is given here
|-
|07.40
|and then its as I have to click here to activate the account
|-
|07.45
|Let me click here
|-
|07.46
|It takes me back to the website
|-
|07.50
|I get this message
|-
|07.54
|So let me enter the id that I receive my mobile number
|-
|08.05
|6character string
|-
|08.13
|Let me submit this
|-
|08.16
|It says that for security reasons I should change my password after login

|-
|08.26
||Now I am ready to book my ticket
|-
|08.28
|The 1st thing I will do is to sign out
|-
|08.36
|I am little slow in typing that it says that the session is expired
|-
|08.42
|This message keeps coming when you use irctc especially when your slow in filling the information
|-
|08.54
|Doesn't matter
|-
|08.55
|You just have to login again
|-
|08.57
|let me login to my account again
|-
|08.59
|Let us now learn how to change the password
|-
|09.03
|Go to http://www.irctc.co.in
|-
|09.08
|Log into the activated account
|-
|09.10
|For this, use the password sent through email
|-
|09.14
|Go to user profile and to change password link
|-
|09.17
|Enter old password
|-
|09.21
|Type the new password twice
|-
|09.25
|Let us do this in the web browser now
|-
|09.28
|Username I will type
|-
|09.35
|password
|-
|09.36
|that was send to my email address _mou
|-
|09.41
|I am doing this for this 1st time
|-
|09.42
|kgm838
|-
|09.45
|Login here
|-
|09.49
|I will have to change the password recall the password sent to the email has to be changed
|-
|09.57
|The way I will do is to go through user profile
|-
|10.00
|Change password
|-
|10.05
|Old password
|-
|10.12
|Ok i submitted
|-
|10.23
|I now get the message
|-
|10.25
|Password has been changed
|-
|10.27
|Thats fine
|-
|10.28
|I have now returned to the slide
|-
|10.35
|Tips in using your account

|-
|10.37
|Do not share your password with others
|-
|10.39
|When you buy a ticket, your email will receive the details
|-
|10.43
|Do not share your password of your email account also with others
|-
|10.51
|Change your password frequently

|-
|10.54
|In the next tutorial, we will discuss how to buy a ticket.
|-
|11.01
|We now have some information on spoken-tutorial project
|-
|11.04
|Watch the video available at http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial
|-
|11.11
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
|-
|11.15
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
|11.20
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
|-
|11.22
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials
|-
|11.25
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test
|-
|11.28
|For more details, contact, sptut@gmail.com

|-
|11.34
|Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project
|-
|11.39
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India
|-
|11.45
|More information on this Mission is available at: http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro

|-
|11.53
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial
|-
|11.57
|This is kannan moudgalya signing off thanks for joining. Goodbye

What-is-Spoken-Tutorial/D0/What-is-Spoken-Tutorial-2min/English-timed

2013-09-18T06:20:54Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| border = 1 |'''Time''' |'''Narration''' |- | 00:00 | Welcome to this two minutes overview of the spoken tutorial project |- | 00:04 | My name is Kannan Moudgalya. …'

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''

|-
| 00:00
| Welcome to this two minutes overview of the spoken tutorial project

|-
| 00:04
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya.

|-
| 00:06
| Spoken tutorial is a screen cast with running commentary

|-
| 00:10
| A recording of a session created for self learning

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:13
| We promote foss also useful to bridge digital divide, can be freely downloaded.

|-
| 00:19
| Let us go to our website. HEre is spoken tutorial that are.

|-
| 00:26
| Here is a sample spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:29
| “ Recording File”

|-
| 00:34
| We now explain the process involved in creating spoken tutorials

|-
| 00:38
| We start an outline for as shown for

|-
| 00:41
| We write the script for each tutorial as shown for

|-
| 00:45
| Then we record the script

|-
| 00:47
| We have already seen the recording, Then we translate the script as shown for

|-
| 00:51
| Then we dub it as shown for

|-
| 00:53
| ''Recording files''

|-
| 00:59
| This was a tutorial in Hindi.

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:03
| We will come back to this

|-
| 01:06
| HEre is the architecture of a spoken tutorial

|-
| 01:10
| We conduct workshop using spoken tutorial, Domain experts are not required

|-
| 01:15
| Workshop are of 2 hour duration

|-
| 01:18
| The students learn at their own speed

|-
| 01:21
| They can use a language of their choice.

|-
| 01:23
| All of them can reach the same level.

|-
| 01:26
| We have found the workshop to be very effective

|-
| 01:30
| These workshops are becoming very popular.
|-
| 01:33
| We currenly conduct 200 workshop a month

|-
| 01:36
| Number of confirmed workshop in North, West , East and South

|-
| 01:42
| Here is a graph of Quarter-wise visit to our website

|-
| 01:48
| Lets go back here.

|-
| 01:49
| We are starting our digital divide tutorials

|-
| 01:53
| Here is an example

|-
| 01:54
| “ Recording file”

|-
| 02:00
|Here is a sample tutorial on First Aid.

|-
| 02:04
| “ Recording file”

|-
| 02:18
| These tutorials will be extremely useful to the majority of Indian
|-
| 02:25
|We have some publication. Who funded as?

|-
| 02:29
| Thanks for joining.

Spoken-Tutorial-Technology/C2/What-is-a-Spoken-Tutorial/English-timed

2013-09-18T05:18:12Z

Sneha:

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT literate.

|-
| 00:09
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya. I am from IIT Bombay. I lead this project.

|-
| 00:15
| What is a Spoken Tutorial?

|-
| 00:17
| It is a recording of a computer session

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:24
| The resulting movie is the spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:27
| Typically of 10 minute duration

|-
| 00:30
| Steps in Creating Spoken Tutorials are

|-
| 00:33
| Outline

|-
| 00:34
| Script

|-
| 00:35
| Recording

|-
| 00:36
| Translating the script into other languages and

|-
| 00:38
| Dubbing

|-
| 00:39
| Let me explain each of these steps

|-
| 00:42
| We will show the outline of two software systems:

|-
| 00:47
| Xfig and PHP/MySQL

|-
| 00:52
| I have already downloaded all the required links for this tutorial from http://spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:09
| Let us see the outline for PHP

|-
| 01:15
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 01:19
| The 2nd step in creating spoken tutorials is the'' Script''

|-
| 01:24
| As a movie needs a good script

|-
| 01:26
| A spoken tutorial also needs a good script

|-
| 01:29
| The script of the current tutorial is here

|-
| 01:38
| The guidelines to write a script are here

|-
| 01:45
| A tutorial that explains the guidelines will also be available soon

|-
| 01:52
| I will now create a short spoken tutorial that explains how to send an email from a gmail account

|-
| 02:00
| Let me invoke iShowU, a screen recording software

|-
| 02:06
| Observe a rectangle on the screen

|-
| 02:09
| whatever comes within this rectangle will get recorded

|-
| 02:15
| I have opened Netscape

|-
| 02:17
| I have placed it exactly within this rectangle

|-
| 02:22
| It is pointing to gmail

|-
| 02:25
| I will speak in Tamil

|-
| 02:27
| Let me start recording

|-
| 02:30
| Guest.spoken aaga login seygiren gmail ai thirandagi vittadu

|-
| 02:40
| compose button moolam aarambikap pogiren [mailto:kannan@iitb.ac.in kannan@iitb.ac.in]

|-
| 02:56
| Subject :Test

|-
| 03:03
| ingu varuvom

|-
| 03:06
| This is a test mail

|-
| 03:11
| Send button moolam email ai anuppugiren

|-
| 03:16
| ippodu sign out seygiren nanri, vanakkam

|-
| 03:26
| I just ended the recording

|-
| 03:28
| Immediately, the recording software creates a movie

|-
| 03:32
| Let me first close Netscape and iShowU.

|-
| 03:43
| Let me now play the recorded movie .

|-
| 03:47
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 03:53
| Let us advance it

|-
| 03:57
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:04
| Let me close this

|-
| 04:09
| Let us now go to the next slide

|-
| 04:11
| This is what I call as the spoken tutorial

|-
| 04:14
| School going children can also create spoken tutorials – it is very easy

|-
| 04:20
| Let me now explain the Tools we have for Recording

|-
| 04:24
| On Linux, recordMyDesktop

|-
| 04:27
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:37
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:43
| On Windows we have Camstudio

|-
| 04:47
| This spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:52
| Both are FOSS

|-
| 04:59
| A tutorial gives guidelines for narration

|-
| 05:03
| Let me play that

|-
| 05:08
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 05:16
| Let me come back to slides

|-
| 05:19
| The 4th Step in creating spoken tutorials is translating the script into Local Languages

|-
| 05:26
| To make it accessible for people weak in English

|-
| 05:31
| I will show translated scripts for getting started on Scilab in

|-
| 05:35
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:40
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:46
| Let us go back to the browser.

|-
| 05:49
| Using the script, we change the spoken part only.

|-
| 05:53
| Video remains the same.

|-
| 05:56
| On Linux, we can use Audacity and ffmpeg

|-
| 06:00
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:06
| Let me minimise this browser

|-
| 06:09
| Underneath this, I have another browser with several tabs

|-
| 06:13
| Let me play this: “Recording plays”

|-
| 06:31
| On Windows, we can use Movie Maker

|-
| 06:38
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:42
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 06:50
| We will now see Scilab spoken tutorials in Hindi, Malayalam and Bengali.

|-
|07 06
| “Recording plays” let me play Malayalam “Recording plays” let me play bengali “Recording plays”

|-
| 07:46
| Let us go to back here slides

|-
| 07:50
| Let us discuss how to present complex topics through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 07:54
| After all, a spoken tutorial is only ten minutes long.

|-
| 07:59
| By combining spoken tutorials, advanced topics can also be taught.

|-
| 08:03
| If sufficient small steps are available,

|-
| 08:06
| Himalayas can also be climbed.

|-
| 08:09
| Let us now view the study plans for LaTeX and Scilab

|-
| 08:20
| LaTeX study plans

|-
| 08:26
| Scilab study plans

|-
| 08:29
| Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 08:32
| One can bridge digital divide through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 08:36
| For example, one can explain how to buy train tickets through irctc

|-
| 08:41
| How to locate low cost agricultural loans.

|-
| 08:44
| How to locate information on primary health care.

|-
| 08:47
| How to obtain information on first aid.

|-
| 08:51
| How to do web search to locate the shop that sells Tvs at the lowest price.

|-
| 08:56
| Indeed, this list is endless.

|-
|08:58
| As a matter of fact, this approach can be used to bridge digital divide.

|-
| 09:04
| Spoken tutorials are released under creative commons license.

|-
| 09:08
| These are available for free download from the spoken tutorial website.

|-
| 09:13
| Let us discuss the honorarium available for creating a ten minute spoken tutorial

|-
| 09:19
| Rs. 3,500 to create script and slides

|-
| 09:23
| Rs. 500 for review by novice or beginner

|-
| 09:28
| Rs. 1,000 for recording the spoken tutorial - this can be done by the beginner as well

|-
| 09:34
| Rs. 1,000 for translation into a local language

|-
| 09:37
| Rs. 500 for dubbing into a local language.

|-
| 09:40
| To be paid after review and acceptance.

|-
| 09:43
| The above amounts are for a ten minute spoken tutorial. Actual honorarium will be proportional to the number of minutes.

|-
| 09:50
| There is a one time bonus of Rs. 5,000 also

|-
| 09:54
| Our target audience is a remote child,

|-
| 09:57
| working alone at midnight,

|-
| 09:58
| without anyone to help her.

|-
| 10:00
| In other words, spoken tutorials need to be created for self learning.

|-
| 10:05
| We actively promote Open Source Software

|-
| 10:08
| Conduct workshops through student clubs, using spoken tutorials and financial support

|-
| 10:13
| We also look for Campus Ambassadors

|-
| 10:16
| We have a spoken tutorial on Campus Ambassador programme

|-
| 10:21
| Let us play it “Recording plays”

|-
| 10:35
| Let us show the web site of our project, [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 10:45
| The current tutorial is available here

|-
| 10:48
| Where to contact us is here

|-
| 10:50
| A list of FOSS systems is available through the wiki – let us click this

|-
| 10:59
| You may join the effort on any of these

|-
| 11:03
| You may also propose work on new systems

|-
| 11:06
| Please feel free to contact us.

|-
| 11:10
| Let us go to the next slide. We welcome your participation.

|-
| 11:14
| To create, review and use spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:17
| We also need technology support

|-
| 10:20
| We have lots of jobs as well.

|-
| 11:22
| Work with us, full time or part time.

|-
| 11:25
| Why should you work with us?

|-
| 11:27
| To remove digital divide

|-
| 11:29
| To make our children IT literate

|-
| 11:31
| To promote FOSS

|-
| 11:33
| To make our children employable

|-
| 11:35
| To make our country a developed one

|-
| 11:37
| To realise the dream of Dr. Abdul Kalam

|-
| 11:40
| Let us go to the next slide. We have a small assignment for you.

|-
| 11:44
| Please see if you can locate all the web pages shown in this tutorial.

|-
| 11:49
| I would like to acknowledge the funding support now

|-
| 11:52
| Spoken tutorial is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:56
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
|12:01
|More information on this mission is available at''' '''spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

|-
|12:11
|We have come to the end of this tutorial

|-
|12:14
|Thanks for joining us

|-
|12:15
|This is Kannan Moudgalya signing off

Goodbye and Jai Hind

What-is-Spoken-Tutorial/D0/What-is-Spoken-Tutorial-12min/English-timed

2013-09-18T05:15:52Z

Sneha:

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT literate.

|-
| 00:09
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya. I am from IIT Bombay. I lead this project.

|-
| 00:15
| What is a Spoken Tutorial?

|-
| 00:17
| It is a recording of a computer session

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:24
| The resulting movie is the spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:27
| Typically of 10 minute duration

|-
| 00:30
| Steps in Creating Spoken Tutorials are

|-
| 00:33
| Outline

|-
| 00:34
| Script

|-
| 00:35
| Recording

|-
| 00:36
| Translating the script into other languages and

|-
| 00:38
| Dubbing

|-
| 00:39
| Let me explain each of these steps

|-
| 00:42
| We will show the outline of two software systems:

|-
| 00:47
| Xfig and PHP/MySQL

|-
| 00:52
| I have already downloaded all the required links for this tutorial from http://spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:09
| Let us see the outline for PHP

|-
| 01:15
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 01:19
| The 2nd step in creating spoken tutorials is the'' Script''

|-
| 01:24
| As a movie needs a good script

|-
| 01:26
| A spoken tutorial also needs a good script

|-
| 01:29
| The script of the current tutorial is here

|-
| 01:38
| The guidelines to write a script are here

|-
| 01:45
| A tutorial that explains the guidelines will also be available soon

|-
| 01:52
| I will now create a short spoken tutorial that explains how to send an email from a gmail account

|-
| 02:00
| Let me invoke iShowU, a screen recording software

|-
| 02:06
| Observe a rectangle on the screen

|-
| 02:09
| whatever comes within this rectangle will get recorded

|-
| 02:15
| I have opened Netscape

|-
| 02:17
| I have placed it exactly within this rectangle

|-
| 02:22
| It is pointing to gmail

|-
| 02:25
| I will speak in Tamil

|-
| 02:27
| Let me start recording

|-
| 02:30
| Guest.spoken aaga login seygiren gmail ai thirandagi vittadu

|-
| 02:40
| compose button moolam aarambikap pogiren [mailto:kannan@iitb.ac.in kannan@iitb.ac.in]

|-
| 02:56
| Subject :Test

|-
| 03:03
| ingu varuvom

|-
| 03:06
| This is a test mail

|-
| 03:11
| Send button moolam email ai anuppugiren

|-
| 03:16
| ippodu sign out seygiren nanri, vanakkam

|-
| 03:26
| I just ended the recording

|-
| 03:28
| Immediately, the recording software creates a movie

|-
| 03:32
| Let me first close Netscape and iShowU.

|-
| 03:43
| Let me now play the recorded movie .

|-
| 03:47
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 03:53
| Let us advance it

|-
| 03:57
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:04
| Let me close this

|-
| 04:09
| Let us now go to the next slide

|-
| 04:11
| This is what I call as the spoken tutorial

|-
| 04:14
| School going children can also create spoken tutorials – it is very easy

|-
| 04:20
| Let me now explain the Tools we have for Recording

|-
| 04:24
| On Linux, recordMyDesktop

|-
| 04:27
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:37
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:43
| On Windows we have Camstudio

|-
| 04:47
| This spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:52
| Both are FOSS

|-
| 04:59
| A tutorial gives guidelines for narration

|-
| 05:03
| Let me play that

|-
| 05:08
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 05:16
| Let me come back to slides

|-
| 05:19
| The 4th Step in creating spoken tutorials is translating the script into Local Languages

|-
| 05:26
| To make it accessible for people weak in English

|-
| 05:31
| I will show translated scripts for getting started on Scilab in

|-
| 05:35
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:40
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:46
| Let us go back to the browser.

|-
| 05:49
| Using the script, we change the spoken part only.

|-
| 05:53
| Video remains the same.

|-
| 05:56
| On Linux, we can use Audacity and ffmpeg

|-
| 06:00
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:06
| Let me minimise this browser

|-
| 06:09
| Underneath this, I have another browser with several tabs

|-
| 06:13
| Let me play this: “Recording plays”

|-
| 06:31
| On Windows, we can use Movie Maker

|-
| 06:38
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:42
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 06:50
| We will now see Scilab spoken tutorials in Hindi, Malayalam and Bengali.

|-
|07 06
| “Recording plays” let me play Malayalam “Recording plays” let me play bengali “Recording plays”

|-
| 07:46
| Let us go to back here slides

|-
| 07:50
| Let us discuss how to present complex topics through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 07:54
| After all, a spoken tutorial is only ten minutes long.

|-
| 07:59
| By combining spoken tutorials, advanced topics can also be taught.

|-
| 08:03
| If sufficient small steps are available,

|-
| 08:06
| Himalayas can also be climbed.

|-
| 08:09
| Let us now view the study plans for LaTeX and Scilab

|-
| 08:20
| LaTeX study plans

|-
| 08:26
| Scilab study plans

|-
| 08:29
| Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 08:32
| One can bridge digital divide through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 08:36
| For example, one can explain how to buy train tickets through irctc

|-
| 08:41
| How to locate low cost agricultural loans.

|-
| 08:44
| How to locate information on primary health care.

|-
| 08:47
| How to obtain information on first aid.

|-
| 08:51
| How to do web search to locate the shop that sells Tvs at the lowest price.

|-
| 08:56
| Indeed, this list is endless.

|-
|08:58
| As a matter of fact, this approach can be used to bridge digital divide.

|-
| 09:04
| Spoken tutorials are released under creative commons license.

|-
| 09:08
| These are available for free download from the spoken tutorial website.

|-
| 09:13
| Let us discuss the honorarium available for creating a ten minute spoken tutorial

|-
| 09:19
| Rs. 3,500 to create script and slides

|-
| 09:23
| Rs. 500 for review by novice or beginner

|-
| 09:28
| Rs. 1,000 for recording the spoken tutorial - this can be done by the beginner as well

|-
| 09:34
| Rs. 1,000 for translation into a local language

|-
| 09:37
| Rs. 500 for dubbing into a local language.

|-
| 09:40
| To be paid after review and acceptance.

|-
| 09:43
| The above amounts are for a ten minute spoken tutorial. Actual honorarium will be proportional to the number of minutes.

|-
| 09:50
| There is a one time bonus of Rs. 5,000 also

|-
| 09:54
| Our target audience is a remote child,

|-
| 09:57
| working alone at midnight,

|-
| 09:58
| without anyone to help her.

|-
| 10:00
| In other words, spoken tutorials need to be created for self learning.

|-
| 10:05
| We actively promote Open Source Software

|-
| 10:08
| Conduct workshops through student clubs, using spoken tutorials and financial support

|-
| 10:13
| We also look for Campus Ambassadors

|-
| 10:16
| We have a spoken tutorial on Campus Ambassador programme

|-
| 10:21
| Let us play it “Recording plays”

|-
| 10:35
| Let us show the web site of our project, [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 10:45
| The current tutorial is available here

|-
| 10:48
| Where to contact us is here

|-
| 10:50
| A list of FOSS systems is available through the wiki – let us click this

|-
| 10:59
| You may join the effort on any of these

|-
| 11:03
| You may also propose work on new systems

|-
| 11:06
| Please feel free to contact us.

|-
| 11:10
| Let us go to the next slide. We welcome your participation.

|-
| 11:14
| To create, review and use spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:17
| We also need technology support

|-
| 10:20
| We have lots of jobs as well.

|-
| 11:22
| Work with us, full time or part time.

|-
| 11:25
| Why should you work with us?

|-
| 11:27
| To remove digital divide

|-
| 11:29
| To make our children IT literate

|-
| 11:31
| To promote FOSS

|-
| 11:33
| To make our children employable

|-
| 11:35
| To make our country a developed one

|-
| 11:37
| To realise the dream of Dr. Abdul Kalam

|-
| 11:40
| Let us go to the next slide. We have a small assignment for you.

|-
| 11:44
| Please see if you can locate all the web pages shown in this tutorial.

|-
| 11:49
| I would like to acknowledge the funding support now

|-
| 11:52
| Spoken tutorial is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:56
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
|12:01
| More information on this mission is available at''' '''spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

|-
|12:11
| We have come to the end of this tutorial

|-
|12:14
| Thanks for joining us

|-
|12:15
| This is Kannan Moudgalya signing off

Goodbye and Jai Hind

What-is-Spoken-Tutorial/D0/What-is-Spoken-Tutorial-12min/English-timed

2013-09-18T05:15:06Z

Sneha:

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT literate.

|-
| 00:09
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya. I am from IIT Bombay. I lead this project.

|-
| 00:15
| What is a Spoken Tutorial?

|-
| 00:17
| It is a recording of a computer session

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:24
| The resulting movie is the spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:27
| Typically of 10 minute duration

|-
| 00:30
| Steps in Creating Spoken Tutorials are

|-
| 00:33
| Outline

|-
| 00:34
| Script

|-
| 00:35
| Recording

|-
| 00:36
| Translating the script into other languages and

|-
| 00:38
| Dubbing

|-
| 00:39
| Let me explain each of these steps

|-
| 00:42
| We will show the outline of two software systems:

|-
| 00:47
| Xfig and PHP/MySQL

|-
| 00:52
| I have already downloaded all the required links for this tutorial from http://spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:09
| Let us see the outline for PHP

|-
| 01:15
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 01:19
| The 2nd step in creating spoken tutorials is the'' Script''

|-
| 01:24
| As a movie needs a good script

|-
| 01:26
| A spoken tutorial also needs a good script

|-
| 01:29
| The script of the current tutorial is here

|-
| 01:38
| The guidelines to write a script are here

|-
| 01:45
| A tutorial that explains the guidelines will also be available soon

|-
| 01:52
| I will now create a short spoken tutorial that explains how to send an email from a gmail account

|-
| 02:00
| Let me invoke iShowU, a screen recording software

|-
| 02:06
| Observe a rectangle on the screen

|-
| 02:09
| whatever comes within this rectangle will get recorded

|-
| 02:15
| I have opened Netscape

|-
| 02:17
| I have placed it exactly within this rectangle

|-
| 02:22
| It is pointing to gmail

|-
| 02:25
| I will speak in Tamil

|-
| 02:27
| Let me start recording

|-
| 02:30
| Guest.spoken aaga login seygiren gmail ai thirandagi vittadu

|-
| 02:40
| compose button moolam aarambikap pogiren [mailto:kannan@iitb.ac.in kannan@iitb.ac.in]

|-
| 02:56
| Subject :Test

|-
| 03:03
| ingu varuvom

|-
| 03:06
| This is a test mail

|-
| 03:11
| Send button moolam email ai anuppugiren

|-
| 03:16
| ippodu sign out seygiren nanri, vanakkam

|-
| 03:26
| I just ended the recording

|-
| 03:28
| Immediately, the recording software creates a movie

|-
| 03:32
| Let me first close Netscape and iShowU.

|-
| 03:43
| Let me now play the recorded movie .

|-
| 03:47
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 03:53
| Let us advance it

|-
| 03:57
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:04
| Let me close this

|-
| 04:09
| Let us now go to the next slide

|-
| 04:11
| This is what I call as the spoken tutorial

|-
| 04:14
| School going children can also create spoken tutorials – it is very easy

|-
| 04:20
| Let me now explain the Tools we have for Recording

|-
| 04:24
| On Linux, recordMyDesktop

|-
| 04:27
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:37
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:43
| On Windows we have Camstudio

|-
| 04:47
| This spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:52
| Both are FOSS

|-
| 04:59
| A tutorial gives guidelines for narration

|-
| 05:03
| Let me play that

|-
| 05:08
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 05:16
| Let me come back to slides

|-
| 05:19
| The 4th Step in creating spoken tutorials is translating the script into Local Languages

|-
| 05:26
| To make it accessible for people weak in English

|-
| 05:31
| I will show translated scripts for getting started on Scilab in

|-
| 05:35
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:40
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:46
| Let us go back to the browser.

|-
| 05:49
| Using the script, we change the spoken part only.

|-
| 05:53
| Video remains the same.

|-
| 05:56
| On Linux, we can use Audacity and ffmpeg

|-
| 06:00
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:06
| Let me minimise this browser

|-
| 06:09
| Underneath this, I have another browser with several tabs

|-
| 06:13
| Let me play this: “Recording plays”

|-
| 06:31
| On Windows, we can use Movie Maker

|-
| 06:38
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:42
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 06:50
| We will now see Scilab spoken tutorials in Hindi, Malayalam and Bengali.

|-
|07 06
| “Recording plays” let me play Malayalam “Recording plays” let me play bengali “Recording plays”

|-
| 07:46
| Let us go to back here slides

|-
| 07:50
| Let us discuss how to present complex topics through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 07:54
| After all, a spoken tutorial is only ten minutes long.

|-
| 07:59
| By combining spoken tutorials, advanced topics can also be taught.

|-
| 08:03
| If sufficient small steps are available,

|-
| 08:06
| Himalayas can also be climbed.

|-
| 08:09
| Let us now view the study plans for LaTeX and Scilab

|-
| 08:20
| LaTeX study plans

|-
| 08:26
| Scilab study plans

|-
| 08:29
| Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 08:32
| One can bridge digital divide through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 08:36
| For example, one can explain how to buy train tickets through irctc

|-
| 08:41
| How to locate low cost agricultural loans.

|-
| 08:44
| How to locate information on primary health care.

|-
| 08:47
| How to obtain information on first aid.

|-
| 08:51
| How to do web search to locate the shop that sells Tvs at the lowest price.

|-
| 08:56
| Indeed, this list is endless.

|-
|08:58
| As a matter of fact, this approach can be used to bridge digital divide.

|-
| 09:04
| Spoken tutorials are released under creative commons license.

|-
| 09:08
| These are available for free download from the spoken tutorial website.

|-
| 09:13
| Let us discuss the honorarium available for creating a ten minute spoken tutorial

|-
| 09:19
| Rs. 3,500 to create script and slides

|-
| 09:23
| Rs. 500 for review by novice or beginner

|-
| 09:28
| Rs. 1,000 for recording the spoken tutorial - this can be done by the beginner as well

|-
| 09:34
| Rs. 1,000 for translation into a local language

|-
| 09:37
| Rs. 500 for dubbing into a local language.

|-
| 09:40
| To be paid after review and acceptance.

|-
| 09:43
| The above amounts are for a ten minute spoken tutorial. Actual honorarium will be proportional to the number of minutes.

|-
| 09:50
| There is a one time bonus of Rs. 5,000 also

|-
| 09:54
| Our target audience is a remote child,

|-
| 09:57
| working alone at midnight,

|-
| 09:58
| without anyone to help her.

|-
| 10:00
| In other words, spoken tutorials need to be created for self learning.

|-
| 10:05
| We actively promote Open Source Software

|-
| 10:08
| Conduct workshops through student clubs, using spoken tutorials and financial support

|-
| 10:13
| We also look for Campus Ambassadors

|-
| 10:16
| We have a spoken tutorial on Campus Ambassador programme

|-
| 10:21
| Let us play it “Recording plays”

|-
| 10:35
| Let us show the web site of our project, [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 10:45
| The current tutorial is available here

|-
| 10:48
| Where to contact us is here

|-
| 10:50
| A list of FOSS systems is available through the wiki – let us click this

|-
| 10:59
| You may join the effort on any of these

|-
| 11:03
| You may also propose work on new systems

|-
| 11:06
| Please feel free to contact us.

|-
| 11:10
| Let us go to the next slide. We welcome your participation.

|-
| 11:14
| To create, review and use spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:17
| We also need technology support

|-
| 10:20
| We have lots of jobs as well.

|-
| 11:22
| Work with us, full time or part time.

|-
| 11:25
| Why should you work with us?

|-
| 11:27
| To remove digital divide

|-
| 11:29
| To make our children IT literate

|-
| 11:31
| To promote FOSS

|-
| 11:33
| To make our children employable

|-
| 11:35
| To make our country a developed one

|-
| 11:37
| To realise the dream of Dr. Abdul Kalam

|-
| 11:40
| Let us go to the next slide. We have a small assignment for you.

|-
| 11:44
| Please see if you can locate all the web pages shown in this tutorial.

|-
| 11:49
| I would like to acknowledge the funding support now

|-
| 11:52
| Spoken tutorial is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:56
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
|12:01
| More information on this mission is available at''' '''spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

|-
|12:11
| We have come to the end of this tutorial

|-
|12:14
| Thanks for joining us

| -
|12:15
| This is Kannan Moudgalya signing off

Goodbye and Jai Hind

What-is-Spoken-Tutorial/D0/What-is-Spoken-Tutorial-12min/English-timed

2013-09-18T05:13:04Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border = 1 |'''Time''' |'''Narration''' |- | 00:01 | Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT liter…'

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT literate.

|-
| 00:09
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya. I am from IIT Bombay. I lead this project.

|-
| 00:15
| What is a Spoken Tutorial?

|-
| 00:17
| It is a recording of a computer session

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:24
| The resulting movie is the spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:27
| Typically of 10 minute duration

|-
| 00:30
| Steps in Creating Spoken Tutorials are

|-
| 00:33
| Outline

|-
| 00:34
| Script

|-
| 00:35
| Recording

|-
| 00:36
| Translating the script into other languages and

|-
| 00:38
| Dubbing

|-
| 00:39
| Let me explain each of these steps

|-
| 00:42
| We will show the outline of two software systems:

|-
| 00:47
| Xfig and PHP/MySQL

|-
| 00:52
| I have already downloaded all the required links for this tutorial from http://spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:09
| Let us see the outline for PHP

|-
| 01:15
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 01:19
| The 2nd step in creating spoken tutorials is the'' Script''

|-
| 01:24
| As a movie needs a good script

|-
| 01:26
| A spoken tutorial also needs a good script

|-
| 01:29
| The script of the current tutorial is here

|-
| 01:38
| The guidelines to write a script are here

|-
| 01:45
| A tutorial that explains the guidelines will also be available soon

|-
| 01:52
| I will now create a short spoken tutorial that explains how to send an email from a gmail account

|-
| 02:00
| Let me invoke iShowU, a screen recording software

|-
| 02:06
| Observe a rectangle on the screen

|-
| 02:09
| whatever comes within this rectangle will get recorded

|-
| 02:15
| I have opened Netscape

|-
| 02:17
| I have placed it exactly within this rectangle

|-
| 02:22
| It is pointing to gmail

|-
| 02:25
| I will speak in Tamil

|-
| 02:27
| Let me start recording

|-
| 02:30
| Guest.spoken aaga login seygiren gmail ai thirandagi vittadu

|-
| 02:40
| compose button moolam aarambikap pogiren [mailto:kannan@iitb.ac.in kannan@iitb.ac.in]

|-
| 02:56
| Subject :Test

|-
| 03:03
| ingu varuvom

|-
| 03:06
| This is a test mail

|-
| 03:11
| Send button moolam email ai anuppugiren

|-
| 03:16
| ippodu sign out seygiren nanri, vanakkam

|-
| 03:26
| I just ended the recording

|-
| 03:28
| Immediately, the recording software creates a movie

|-
| 03:32
| Let me first close Netscape and iShowU.

|-
| 03:43
| Let me now play the recorded movie .

|-
| 03:47
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 03:53
| Let us advance it

|-
| 03:57
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:04
| Let me close this

|-
| 04:09
| Let us now go to the next slide

|-
| 04:11
| This is what I call as the spoken tutorial

|-
| 04:14
| School going children can also create spoken tutorials – it is very easy

|-
| 04:20
| Let me now explain the Tools we have for Recording

|-
| 04:24
| On Linux, recordMyDesktop

|-
| 04:27
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:37
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:43
| On Windows we have Camstudio

|-
| 04:47
| This spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:52
| Both are FOSS

|-
| 04:59
| A tutorial gives guidelines for narration

|-
| 05:03
| Let me play that

|-
| 05:08
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 05:16
| Let me come back to slides

|-
| 05:19
| The 4th Step in creating spoken tutorials is translating the script into Local Languages

|-
| 05:26
| To make it accessible for people weak in English

|-
| 05:31
| I will show translated scripts for getting started on Scilab in

|-
| 05:35
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:40
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:46
| Let us go back to the browser.

|-
| 05:49
| Using the script, we change the spoken part only.

|-
| 05:53
| Video remains the same.

|-
| 05:56
| On Linux, we can use Audacity and ffmpeg

|-
| 06:00
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:06
| Let me minimise this browser

|-
| 06:09
| Underneath this, I have another browser with several tabs

|-
| 06:13
| Let me play this: “Recording plays”

|-
| 06:31
| On Windows, we can use Movie Maker

|-
| 06:38
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:42
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 06:50
| We will now see Scilab spoken tutorials in Hindi, Malayalam and Bengali.

|-
|07 06
| “Recording plays” let me play Malayalam “Recording plays” let me play bengali “Recording plays”

|-
| 07:46
| Let us go to back here slides

|-
| 07:50
| Let us discuss how to present complex topics through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 07:54
| After all, a spoken tutorial is only ten minutes long.

|-
| 07:59
| By combining spoken tutorials, advanced topics can also be taught.

|-
| 08:03
| If sufficient small steps are available,

|-
| 08:06
| Himalayas can also be climbed.

|-
| 08:09
| Let us now view the study plans for LaTeX and Scilab

|-
| 08:20
| LaTeX study plans

|-
| 08:26
| Scilab study plans

|-
| 08:29
| Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 08:32
| One can bridge digital divide through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 08:36
| For example, one can explain how to buy train tickets through irctc

|-
| 08:41
| How to locate low cost agricultural loans.

|-
| 08:44
| How to locate information on primary health care.

|-
| 08:47
| How to obtain information on first aid.

|-
| 08:51
| How to do web search to locate the shop that sells Tvs at the lowest price.

|-
| 08:56
| Indeed, this list is endless.

|-
|08:58
| As a matter of fact, this approach can be used to bridge digital divide.

|-
| 09:04
| Spoken tutorials are released under creative commons license.

|-
| 09:08
| These are available for free download from the spoken tutorial website.

|-
| 09:13
| Let us discuss the honorarium available for creating a ten minute spoken tutorial

|-
| 09:19
| Rs. 3,500 to create script and slides

|-
| 09:23
| Rs. 500 for review by novice or beginner

|-
| 09:28
| Rs. 1,000 for recording the spoken tutorial - this can be done by the beginner as well

|-
| 09:34
| Rs. 1,000 for translation into a local language

|-
| 09:37
| Rs. 500 for dubbing into a local language.

|-
| 09:40
| To be paid after review and acceptance.

|-
| 09:43
| The above amounts are for a ten minute spoken tutorial. Actual honorarium will be proportional to the number of minutes.

|-
| 09:50
| There is a one time bonus of Rs. 5,000 also

|-
| 09:54
| Our target audience is a remote child,

|-
| 09:57
| working alone at midnight,

|-
| 09:58
| without anyone to help her.

|-
| 10:00
| In other words, spoken tutorials need to be created for self learning.

|-
| 10:05
| We actively promote Open Source Software

|-
| 10:08
| Conduct workshops through student clubs, using spoken tutorials and financial support

|-
| 10:13
| We also look for Campus Ambassadors

|-
| 10:16
| We have a spoken tutorial on Campus Ambassador programme

|-
| 10:21
| Let us play it “Recording plays”

|-
| 10:35
| Let us show the web site of our project, [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 10:45
| The current tutorial is available here

|-
| 10:48
| Where to contact us is here

|-
| 10:50
| A list of FOSS systems is available through the wiki – let us click this

|-
| 10:59
| You may join the effort on any of these

|-
| 11:03
| You may also propose work on new systems

|-
| 11:06
| Please feel free to contact us.

|-
| 11:10
| Let us go to the next slide. We welcome your participation.

|-
| 11:14
| To create, review and use spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:17
| We also need technology support

|-
| 10:20
| We have lots of jobs as well.

|-
| 11:22
| Work with us, full time or part time.

|-
| 11:25
| Why should you work with us?

|-
| 11:27
| To remove digital divide

|-
| 11:29
| To make our children IT literate

|-
| 11:31
| To promote FOSS

|-
| 11:33
| To make our children employable

|-
| 11:35
| To make our country a developed one

|-
| 11:37
| To realise the dream of Dr. Abdul Kalam

|-
| 11:40
| Let us go to the next slide. We have a small assignment for you.

|-
| 11:44
| Please see if you can locate all the web pages shown in this tutorial.

|-
| 11:49
| I would like to acknowledge the funding support now

|-
| 11:52
| Spoken tutorial is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:56
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

| -
|12:01
|More information on this mission is available at''' '''spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

| -
|12:11
|We have come to the end of this tutorial

| -
|12:14
|Thanks for joining us

| -
|12:15
|This is Kannan Moudgalya signing off

Goodbye and Jai Hind

Spoken-Tutorial-Technology/C2/What-is-a-Spoken-Tutorial/English-timed

2013-09-18T05:08:13Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| style="border-spacing:0;" ! <center>Visual Cue</center> ! <center>Narration</center> |- | 00:01 | Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology…'

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
! <center>Visual Cue</center>
! <center>Narration</center>

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to a presentation that introduces the spoken tutorial technology that has the potential to make India IT literate.

|-
| 00:09
| My name is Kannan Moudgalya. I am from IIT Bombay. I lead this project.

|-
| 00:15
| What is a Spoken Tutorial?

|-
| 00:17
| It is a recording of a computer session

|-
| 00:19
| explaining some software along with a running commentary

|-
| 00:24
| The resulting movie is the spoken tutorial

|-
| 00:27
| Typically of 10 minute duration

|-
| 00:30
| Steps in Creating Spoken Tutorials are

|-
| 00:33
| Outline

|-
| 00:34
| Script

|-
| 00:35
| Recording

|-
| 00:36
| Translating the script into other languages and

|-
| 00:38
| Dubbing

|-
| 00:39
| Let me explain each of these steps

|-
| 00:42
| We will show the outline of two software systems:

|-
| 00:47
| Xfig and PHP/MySQL

|-
| 00:52
| I have already downloaded all the required links for this tutorial from http://spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 01:03
| Let us see the outline for Xfig

|-
| 01:09
| Let us see the outline for PHP

|-
| 01:15
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 01:19
| The 2nd step in creating spoken tutorials is the'' Script''

|-
| 01:24
| As a movie needs a good script

|-
| 01:26
| A spoken tutorial also needs a good script

|-
| 01:29
| The script of the current tutorial is here

|-
| 01:38
| The guidelines to write a script are here

|-
| 01:45
| A tutorial that explains the guidelines will also be available soon

|-
| 01:52
| I will now create a short spoken tutorial that explains how to send an email from a gmail account

|-
| 02:00
| Let me invoke iShowU, a screen recording software

|-
| 02:06
| Observe a rectangle on the screen

|-
| 02:09
| whatever comes within this rectangle will get recorded

|-
| 02:15
| I have opened Netscape

|-
| 02:17
| I have placed it exactly within this rectangle

|-
| 02:22
| It is pointing to gmail

|-
| 02:25
| I will speak in Tamil

|-
| 02:27
| Let me start recording

|-
| 02:30
| Guest.spoken aaga login seygiren gmail ai thirandagi vittadu

|-
| 02:40
| compose button moolam aarambikap pogiren [mailto:kannan@iitb.ac.in kannan@iitb.ac.in]

|-
| 02:56
| Subject :Test

|-
| 03:03
| ingu varuvom

|-
| 03:06
| This is a test mail

|-
| 03:11
| Send button moolam email ai anuppugiren

|-
| 03:16
| ippodu sign out seygiren nanri, vanakkam

|-
| 03:26
| I just ended the recording

|-
| 03:28
| Immediately, the recording software creates a movie

|-
| 03:32
| Let me first close Netscape and iShowU.

|-
| 03:43
| Let me now play the recorded movie .

|-
| 03:47
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 03:53
| Let us advance it

|-
| 03:57
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:04
| Let me close this

|-
| 04:09
| Let us now go to the next slide

|-
| 04:11
| This is what I call as the spoken tutorial

|-
| 04:14
| School going children can also create spoken tutorials – it is very easy

|-
| 04:20
| Let me now explain the Tools we have for Recording

|-
| 04:24
| On Linux, recordMyDesktop

|-
| 04:27
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:37
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 04:43
| On Windows we have Camstudio

|-
| 04:47
| This spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 04:52
| Both are FOSS

|-
| 04:59
| A tutorial gives guidelines for narration

|-
| 05:03
| Let me play that

|-
| 05:08
| “Recording plays”

|-
| 05:16
| Let me come back to slides

|-
| 05:19
| The 4th Step in creating spoken tutorials is translating the script into Local Languages

|-
| 05:26
| To make it accessible for people weak in English

|-
| 05:31
| I will show translated scripts for getting started on Scilab in

|-
| 05:35
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:40
| Hindi, Marathi and Bengali

|-
| 05:46
| Let us go back to the browser.

|-
| 05:49
| Using the script, we change the spoken part only.

|-
| 05:53
| Video remains the same.

|-
| 05:56
| On Linux, we can use Audacity and ffmpeg

|-
| 06:00
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:06
| Let me minimise this browser

|-
| 06:09
| Underneath this, I have another browser with several tabs

|-
| 06:13
| Let me play this: “Recording plays”

|-
| 06:31
| On Windows, we can use Movie Maker

|-
| 06:38
| A spoken tutorial explains how to do this

|-
| 06:42
| Let us go to the next slide

|-
| 06:50
| We will now see Scilab spoken tutorials in Hindi, Malayalam and Bengali.

|-
|07 06
| “Recording plays” let me play Malayalam “Recording plays” let me play bengali “Recording plays”

|-
| 07:46
| Let us go to back here slides

|-
| 07:50
| Let us discuss how to present complex topics through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 07:54
| After all, a spoken tutorial is only ten minutes long.

|-
| 07:59
| By combining spoken tutorials, advanced topics can also be taught.

|-
| 08:03
| If sufficient small steps are available,

|-
| 08:06
| Himalayas can also be climbed.

|-
| 08:09
| Let us now view the study plans for LaTeX and Scilab

|-
| 08:20
| LaTeX study plans

|-
| 08:26
| Scilab study plans

|-
| 08:29
| Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 08:32
| One can bridge digital divide through spoken tutorials.

|-
| 08:36
| For example, one can explain how to buy train tickets through irctc

|-
| 08:41
| How to locate low cost agricultural loans.

|-
| 08:44
| How to locate information on primary health care.

|-
| 08:47
| How to obtain information on first aid.

|-
| 08:51
| How to do web search to locate the shop that sells Tvs at the lowest price.

|-
| 08:56
| Indeed, this list is endless.

|-
|08:58
| As a matter of fact, this approach can be used to bridge digital divide.

|-
| 09:04
| Spoken tutorials are released under creative commons license.

|-
| 09:08
| These are available for free download from the spoken tutorial website.

|-
| 09:13
| Let us discuss the honorarium available for creating a ten minute spoken tutorial

|-
| 09:19
| Rs. 3,500 to create script and slides

|-
| 09:23
| Rs. 500 for review by novice or beginner

|-
| 09:28
| Rs. 1,000 for recording the spoken tutorial - this can be done by the beginner as well

|-
| 09:34
| Rs. 1,000 for translation into a local language

|-
| 09:37
| Rs. 500 for dubbing into a local language.

|-
| 09:40
| To be paid after review and acceptance.

|-
| 09:43
| The above amounts are for a ten minute spoken tutorial. Actual honorarium will be proportional to the number of minutes.

|-
| 09:50
| There is a one time bonus of Rs. 5,000 also

|-
| 09:54
| Our target audience is a remote child,

|-
| 09:57
| working alone at midnight,

|-
| 09:58
| without anyone to help her.

|-
| 10:00
| In other words, spoken tutorials need to be created for self learning.

|-
| 10:05
| We actively promote Open Source Software

|-
| 10:08
| Conduct workshops through student clubs, using spoken tutorials and financial support

|-
| 10:13
| We also look for Campus Ambassadors

|-
| 10:16
| We have a spoken tutorial on Campus Ambassador programme

|-
| 10:21
| Let us play it “Recording plays”

|-
| 10:35
| Let us show the web site of our project, [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 10:45
| The current tutorial is available here

|-
| 10:48
| Where to contact us is here

|-
| 10:50
| A list of FOSS systems is available through the wiki – let us click this

|-
| 10:59
| You may join the effort on any of these

|-
| 11:03
| You may also propose work on new systems

|-
| 11:06
| Please feel free to contact us.

|-
| 11:10
| Let us go to the next slide. We welcome your participation.

|-
| 11:14
| To create, review and use spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:17
| We also need technology support

|-
| 10:20
| We have lots of jobs as well.

|-
| 11:22
| Work with us, full time or part time.

|-
| 11:25
| Why should you work with us?

|-
| 11:27
| To remove digital divide

|-
| 11:29
| To make our children IT literate

|-
| 11:31
| To promote FOSS

|-
| 11:33
| To make our children employable

|-
| 11:35
| To make our country a developed one

|-
| 11:37
| To realise the dream of Dr. Abdul Kalam

|-
| 11:40
| Let us go to the next slide. We have a small assignment for you.

|-
| 11:44
| Please see if you can locate all the web pages shown in this tutorial.

|-
| 11:49
| I would like to acknowledge the funding support now

|-
| 11:52
| Spoken tutorial is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:56
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

| -
|12:01
|More information on this mission is available at''' '''spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

| -
|12:11
|We have come to the end of this tutorial

| -
|12:14
|Thanks for joining us

| -
|12:15
|This is Kannan Moudgalya signing off

Goodbye and Jai Hind

Java/C2/Logical-Operations/English-timed

2013-09-17T06:18:20Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Logical Operators''' in Java.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial, you will learn about the''' logical operators

|-
| 00:11
| '''how to check for multiple expressions using logical operators''' and '''how to override precedence using parentheses'''

|-
| 00:20
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''

|-
| 00:30
| To follow this tutorial you should have knowledge on '''relational operators in Java'''

|-
| 00:35
| If not, for relevant tutorials, please visit our website as shown.

|-
| 00:40
| Logical operators are used to check '''multiple conditions'''.

|-
| 00:48
| Here is a list of the available logical operators in Java

|-
| 00:54
| and, or, not. We shall look into each of them in detail. Switch to Eclipse.

|-
| 01:04
| Here We have the Eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:10
| We have created a class '''LogicalOperators''' and added the main method

|-
|01:15
| Let us create some variables.

|-
| 01:20
| '''boolean b ; '''
|-
| 01:23
| We shall store the result of conditions in b;

|-
| 01:29
| '''''int age''' is equalto '''11 '''

|-
| 01:35
| '''''int weight '''isequalto '''42 '''

|-
| 01:42
| We have the age and weight of a person.

|-
| 01:46
| We shall check if the person '''is below 18yrs of age and is atleast 40kgs'''.

|-
| 01:52
| Let us see how to do so.

|-
| 01:57
| '''b''' is equal to'''age''' ''less than '''''18''' ''ampersand ampersand'' '''weight''' ''greater than equal to'' '''40'''

|-
| 02:19
| This statement has two expressions and a double ampersand symbol in between.

|-
| 02:24
| It checks if age is less than 18 and also if weight is greater than or equal to 40.

|-
| 02:31
| This operation is called the '''and''' operation.

|-
| 02:35
| Let us now print the value b.

|-
| 02:40
| '''''System '''dot '''out '''dot '''println(''b'');'''''

|-
| 02:48
|'''Save '''and '''Run '''

|-
| 02:56
| As we can see, the output is '''true''' because both the conditions are satisfied.

|-
| 03:02
| Now let us change the weight so that one condition is not satisfied and re run the code.

|-
| 03:08
| Change '''42''' to '''32.'''

|-
| 03:14
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''

|-
| 03:21
| the output now is false.

|-
| 03:24
| This is because the condition age less than 18 is satisfied

|-
| 03:29
| But the condition the weight greater than or equal to 40 is not satisfied

|-
| 03:34
| The '''and''' operation requires both the conditions to be '''true''' for the result to be true.

|-
| 03:39
| Therefore we get false as our output.

|-
| 03:43
| This way, using a double ampersand symbol we can perform '''and''' operation.

|-
| 03:53
| Lets say we have age and weight and it is enough if only one of the conditions is satisfied.

|-
| 03:59
| In other words, we need to see if the first condition '''or''' the second condition is '''true.'''

|-
| 04:05
| It is done using the '''or''' operation.

|-
| 04:09
| Let us first remove the earlier condition.

|-
| 04:15
| And Type

|-
| 04:17
| '''age''' ''less than equal to'' '''15''' ''pipe pipe'' '''weight''' ''less than equal to '''''30'''

|-
| 04:35
| There are two conditions and a double pipe symbol in between.

|-
| 04:40
| This statement checks if atleast one of the given two conditions is satisfied.

|-
| 04:46
| Let us run the code to see the output. Save and run

|-
| 04:54
| We see that the output is True.

|-
| 04:57
| This is because, an '''or''' operation, does not need both the conditions to be true like the and operation.

|-
| 05:03
| It needs atleast one condition to be true.

|-
| 05:06
| So although the condition for weight is not satisfied, since the condition for age is satisfied.

|-
| 05:13
| we get the output as true.

|-
| 05:18
| Now let us change the age in such a way that both the conditions are false and see the result.

|-
| 05:25
| change '''11''' to '''17'''

|-
| 05:30
| '''Save''' and '''Run '''

|-
| 05:36
| Now the output is false because both the conditions are not satisfied.

|-
| 05:41
| This way, we use a double PIPE symbol to do an '''or''' operation.

|-
| 05:50
| Now let us say we need to check for people who are older than 15 and with weight more than 30kilos.

|-
| 05:57
| In other words, we need to check the exact opposite of the condition we just did.

|-
| 06:03
| In such situations, we use the '''not''' operation

|-
| 06:07
| First enclose the condition in parentheses.

|-
| 06:17
| And Add an exclamation mark before the condition.

|-
| 06:25
| By using an exclamation mark, we check for the exact opposite of the condition inside the parentheses.

|-
| 06:32
| Since the earlier output was '''false''', now it must '''true'''. Let us see

|-
| 06:38
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''.

|-
| 06:44
| As we can see, the output is the opposite of earlier one.

|-
| 06:48
| This way by using the''' Exclamation mark''' we perform '''not''' operation. Now Let us say we want people '''younger than 15.'''

|-
| 06:58
| Or people '''younger than 18''' and '''lighter than 40kilos'''.

|-
| 07:04
| Let us see how would we go about this condition.

|-
| 07:07
| Remove the earlier condition and type

|-
| 07:12
| '''age '''''less than '''''15 '''

|-
| 07:15
| ''or''''' age '''''less than '''''18 '''

|-
| 07:24
| ''and''''' weight '''''less than '''''40'''

|-
| 07:33
| As we can see, the condition itself is confusing.

|-
| 07:36
| Moreover, we do not know if the '''or''' operation will be performed first or the '''and''' operation.

|-
| 07:42
| It depends on the precedence of operators.

|-
| 07:46
| In such situations, we use parentheses to overwrite the precedence and also make the condition clear.

|-
| 07:53
| So let us add the parentheses.

|-
| 08:06
| Let us run the code save run
|-
| 08:13
| Now Although the first condition which is age less than 15 is not satisfied,

|-
| 08:20
| the second condition, which is,

|-
| 08:22
| age less than 18 and weight less than 40 is satisfied.

|-
| 08:27
| Therefore, output is True.

|-
| 08:30
| As a rule, use parentheses to avoid ambiguity and make the expressions clear.

|-
| 08:36
| | And This how we use the logical operators to check for multiple conditions.

|-
| 08:44
| This bring us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 08:47
| we have learnt '''about logical operators''', how to '''check for multiple expressions''' using '''logical operators '''and

|-
| 08:54
| '''how to override the precedence using parentheses.'''

|-
|09:00
|As an assignment for this tutorial,

|-
| 09:02
| find out if the two expressions, shown are equivalent?

|-
| 09:10
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link, It summarises the '''Spoken Tutorial'''project.

|-
| 09:18
| if you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 09:23
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team. Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and gives certificates for those who pass an online test.

|-
| 09:30
| For more details, please write to '''contact AT spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 09:36
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project
|-
| 09:40
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
| 09:46
| '''More information on this Mission is available at the following link '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 09:52
|This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

Java/C2/Arithmetic-Operations/English-timed

2013-09-11T11:04:11Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| '''Time''''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the tutorial on '''Arithmetic Operations in Java'''.

|-
| 00:06
| In this tutorial, you will learn about the various '''Arithmetic Operations ''' namely
'''Addition'''

'''Subtraction'''

'''Multiplication'''

'''Division''' and

'''How to use them.'''

|-
| 00:16
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''.
|-
| 00:24
| To follow this tutorial you must have eclipse installed on your system

|-
| 00:28
| and you must '''know how to create, save and run a file in Eclipse'''.

|-
| 00:33
| If not, for relevant tutorial please visit our website as shown.

|-
| 00:43
| Here is a list of operators and the mathematical operations they perform

* plus symbol for addition
* minus for subtraction
* asterisk for multiplication
* front slash for division

|-
| 00:55
| We shall look at each of them in detail.

|-
| 01:05
| Here We have Eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:11
| We have created a class by name '''Arithmetic Operations''' and added the '''main '''method.

|-
| 01:17
| Let us add some variables.

|-
| 01:22
| '''int x = 5;'''

|-
| 01:27
| '''int y = 10;'' print result

|-
| 01:35
| '''x''' and '''y''' will be the operands and the '''result''' will store the output of operations.

|-
| 01:42
| Let us add them and print the result.''' Result= x+y;''' system. out. println ''''in parantesis '''result''

|-
| 02:10
| Save it with ''Control S'' and ''control F11'' to''' Run'''

|-
| 02:17
| We see, that the output of addition is stored and the value has been printed

|-
| 02:25
| Now Let us change the values . '''x=75''','''y = 15'''

|-
| 02:38
| '''Save''' it '''Run'''

|-
| 02:43
| we see that the output has changed accordingly

|-
| 02:48
| Now let us try negative values. '''y = -25.''

|-
| 02:57
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:02
| we see that the output of 75 plus -25 has been printed
|-
| 03:11
| Now let us try subtraction. '''y = 5'' and change x+y to x-y

|-
| 03:25
| '''Save it ''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:32
| we see that the output of 75-5 has been printed,

|-
| 03:39
| | Now Let us try multiplication. Change '''minus''' to ''' asterisk'''

|-
| 03:47
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:52
| we see that by using asterisk we could multiply 75*5. .
|-
| 03:59
| Now let us try '''division''' Remove asterisk and type slash

|-
| 04:08
| '''Save it''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 04:14
| As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 04:18
| Now let us see what happens when the expected result is a decimal point number.

|-
| 04:24
| Change '''5''' to '''10'''

|-
| 04:28
| The result must be 7.5.

|-
| 04:30
| So let us change the result to a float.

|-
| 04:43
| '''Save it''' '''Run'''.

|-
| 04:51
| Note that although the expected result is 7.5, we get output as 7.0

|-
| 04:57
| This is because both the operands involved in the division are integers.

|-
| 05:02
| | Let us change y to a float. y=10f

|-
|05:16
| '''Save ''' '''Run'''.

|-
|05:22
|Now we can see that the result is as expected.

|-
|05:25
|Keep in mind that when the expected result is a float, one of the operands must be a float to get the expected output.

|-
| 05:33
| Now let us see what happens when there is more than one operator.Remove all the operands

|-
| 05:48
| int result= 8+4-2. ''Save it ,run''

|-
|06:09
|As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 06:13
| |Now Change '''minus''' to a ''' s lash'''

|-
|06:20
|Now the output would be 6 if the addition is done before division.

|-
|06:25
|Or it would be 10 if division is done before addition.

|-
|06:30
|Let us '''Run''' and see the output.

|-
|06:38
|As we can see, the output is 10 and the division is done before addition. This is because the division operator has more precedence than the addition operator.

|-
|06:50
|In such situations, if we need to override the precedence, we use parentheses.

|-
| 07:04
| By adding parentheses, we instruct Java to do the addition before the division.

|-
| 07:10
| Let us run the file now.

|-
| 07:16
| As we can see, addition has been performed first and the output is 6 as expected.

|-
| 07:23
| As a rule, keep in mind to use parentheses when the order of operations is not clear.

|-
| 07:37
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 07:40
| we have learnt

|-
| 07:41
| '''How to''' '''perform basic mathematical operations in Java.'''

|-
| 07:44
| ''' operator precedence, and, '''

|-
| 07:46
| '''How to override it.'''

|-
| 07:49
| As an assignment for this tutorial Find out what is meant by the '''modulo''' operator and what it does.

|-
| 07:58
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link,
|-
| 08:03
| It summarizes the project.
|-
| 08:06
| If you do not have good bandwidth you can download and watch it
|-
| 08:11
| The Spoken Tutorial Team.
|-
| 08:12
| Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials'''
|-
|08:15
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.
|-
| 08:18
| For more details, please write to ''' spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 08:25
| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project .
|-
| 08:29
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
| 08:35
| '''More information on this Mission is available at the following link '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 08:39
| This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

Java/C2/Arithmetic-Operations/English-timed

2013-09-11T11:03:33Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| '''Time''''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the tutorial on '''Arithmetic Operations in Java'''.

|-
| 00:06
| In this tutorial, you will learn about the various '''Arithmetic Operations ''' namely
'''Addition'''

'''Subtraction'''

'''Multiplication'''

'''Division''' and

'''How to use them.'''

|-
| 00:16
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''.
|-
| 00:24
| To follow this tutorial you must have eclipse installed on your system

|-
| 00:28
| and you must '''know how to create, save and run a file in Eclipse'''.

|-
| 00:33
| If not, for relevant tutorial please visit our website as shown.

|-
| 00:43
| Here is a list of operators and the mathematical operations they perform

* plus symbol for addition
* minus for subtraction
* asterisk for multiplication
* front slash for division

|-
| 00:55
| We shall look at each of them in detail.

|-
| 01:05
| Here We have Eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:11
| We have created a class by name '''Arithmetic Operations''' and added the '''main '''method.

|-
| 01:17
| Let us add some variables.

|-
| 01:22
| '''int x = 5;'''

|-
| 01:27
| '''int y = 10;'' print result

|-
| 01:35
| '''x''' and '''y''' will be the operands and the '''result''' will store the output of operations.

|-
| 01:42
| Let us add them and print the result.''' Result= x+y;''' system. out. println ''''in parantesis '''result''

|-
| 02:10
| Save it with ''Control S'' and ''control F11'' to''' Run'''

|-
| 02:17
| We see, that the output of addition is stored and the value has been printed

|-
| 02:25
| Now Let us change the values . '''x=75''','''y = 15'''

|-
| 02:38
| '''Save''' it '''Run'''

|-
| 02:43
| we see that the output has changed accordingly

|-
| 02:48
| Now let us try negative values. '''y = -25.''

|-
| 02:57
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:02
| we see that the output of 75 plus -25 has been printed
|-
| 03:11
| Now let us try subtraction. '''y = 5'' and change x+y to x-y

|-
| 03:25
| '''Save it ''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:32
| we see that the output of 75-5 has been printed,

|-
| 03:39
| | Now Let us try multiplication. Change '''minus''' to ''' asterisk'''

|-
| 03:47
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:52
| we see that by using asterisk we could multiply 75*5. .
|-
| 03:59
| Now let us try '''division''' Remove asterisk and type slash

|-
| 04:08
| '''Save it''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 04:14
| As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 04:18
| Now let us see what happens when the expected result is a decimal point number.

|-
| 04:24
| Change '''5''' to '''10'''

|-
| 04:28
| The result must be 7.5.

|-
| 04:30
| So let us change the result to a float.

|-
| 04:43
| '''Save it''' '''Run'''.

|-
| 04:51
| Note that although the expected result is 7.5, we get output as 7.0

|-
| 04:57
| This is because both the operands involved in the division are integers.

|-
| 05:02
| | Let us change y to a float. y=10f

|-
|05:16
| '''Save ''' '''Run'''.

|-
|05:22
|Now we can see that the result is as expected.

|-
|05:25
|Keep in mind that when the expected result is a float, one of the operands must be a float to get the expected output.

|-
| 05:33
| Now let us see what happens when there is more than one operator.Remove all the operands

|-
| 05:48
| int result= 8+4-2. ''Save it ,run''

|-
|06:09
|As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 06:13
| |Now Change '''minus''' to a ''' s lash'''

|-
|06:20
|Now the output would be 6 if the addition is done before division.

|-
|06:25
|Or it would be 10 if division is done before addition.

|-
|06:30
|Let us '''Run''' and see the output.

|-
|06:38
|As we can see, the output is 10 and the division is done before addition. This is because the division operator has more precedence than the addition operator.

|-
|06:50
|In such situations, if we need to override the precedence, we use parentheses.

|-
| 07:04
| By adding parentheses, we instruct Java to do the addition before the division.

|-
| 07:10
| Let us run the file now.

|-
| 07:16
| As we can see, addition has been performed first and the output is 6 as expected.

|-
| 07:23
| As a rule, keep in mind to use parentheses when the order of operations is not clear.

|-
| 07:37
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 07:40
| we have learnt

|-
| 07:41
| '''How to''' '''perform basic mathematical operations in Java.'''

|-
| 07:44
| ''' operator precedence, and, '''

|-
| 07:46
| '''How to override it.'''

|-
| 07:49
| As an assignment for this tutorial Find out what is meant by the '''modulo''' operator and what it does.

|-
| 07:58
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link,
|-
| 08:03
| It summarizes the project.
|-
| 08:06
| If you do not have good bandwidth you can download and watch it
|-
| 08:11
| The Spoken Tutorial Team.
|-
| 08:12
| Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials'''
|-
|08:15
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.
|-
| 08:18
| For more details, please write to ''' spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 08:25
| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project .
|-
| 08:29
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India. |-
| 08:35
| '''More information on this Mission is available at the following link '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 08:39
| This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

Java/C2/Arithmetic-Operations/English-timed

2013-09-11T11:02:29Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| border=1 || '''Time'''' || '''Narration''' |- | 00:01 | Welcome to the tutorial on '''Arithmetic Operations in Java'''. |- | 00:06 | In this tutorial, you will learn …'

{| border=1
|| '''Time''''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the tutorial on '''Arithmetic Operations in Java'''.

|-
| 00:06
| In this tutorial, you will learn about the various '''Arithmetic Operations ''' namely
'''Addition'''

'''Subtraction'''

'''Multiplication'''

'''Division''' and

'''How to use them.'''

|-
| 00:16
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''.
|-
| 00:24
| To follow this tutorial you must have eclipse installed on your system

|-
| 00:28
| and you must '''know how to create, save and run a file in Eclipse'''.

|-
| 00:33
| If not, for relevant tutorial please visit our website as shown.

|-
| 00:43
| Here is a list of operators and the mathematical operations they perform

* plus symbol for addition
* minus for subtraction
* asterisk for multiplication
* front slash for division

|-
| 00:55
| We shall look at each of them in detail.

|-
| 01:05
| Here We have Eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:11
| We have created a class by name '''Arithmetic Operations''' and added the '''main '''method.

|-
| 01:17
| Let us add some variables.

|-
| 01:22
| '''int x = 5;'''

|-
| 01:27
| '''int y = 10;'' print result

|-
| 01:35
| '''x''' and '''y''' will be the operands and the '''result''' will store the output of operations.

|-
| 01:42
| Let us add them and print the result.''' Result= x+y;''' system. out. println ''''in parantesis '''result''

|-
| 02:10
| Save it with ''Control S'' and ''control F11'' to''' Run'''

|-
| 02:17
| We see, that the output of addition is stored and the value has been printed

|-
| 02:25
| Now Let us change the values . '''x=75''','''y = 15'''

|-
| 02:38
| '''Save''' it '''Run'''

|-
| 02:43
| we see that the output has changed accordingly

|-
| 02:48
| Now let us try negative values. '''y = -25.''

|-
| 02:57
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:02
| we see that the output of 75 plus -25 has been printed
|-
| 03:11
| Now let us try subtraction. '''y = 5'' and change x+y to x-y

|-
| 03:25
| '''Save it ''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:32
| we see that the output of 75-5 has been printed,

|-
| 03:39
| | Now Let us try multiplication. Change '''minus''' to ''' asterisk'''

|-
| 03:47
| '''Save''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 03:52
| we see that by using asterisk we could multiply 75*5. .
|-
| 03:59
| Now let us try '''division''' Remove asterisk and type slash

|-
| 04:08
| '''Save it''' '''Run.'''

|-
| 04:14
| As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 04:18
| Now let us see what happens when the expected result is a decimal point number.

|-
| 04:24
| Change '''5''' to '''10'''

|-
| 04:28
| The result must be 7.5.

|-
| 04:30
| So let us change the result to a float.

|-
| 04:43
| '''Save it''' '''Run'''.

|-
| 04:51
| Note that although the expected result is 7.5, we get output as 7.0

|-
| 04:57
| This is because both the operands involved in the division are integers.

|-
| 05:02
| | Let us change y to a float. y=10f

|-
|05:16
| '''Save ''' '''Run'''.

|-
|05:22
|Now we can see that the result is as expected.

|-
|05:25
Keep in mind that when the expected result is a float, one of the operands must be a float to get the expected output.

|-
| 05:33
| Now let us see what happens when there is more than one operator.Remove all the operands

|-
| 05:48
| int result= 8+4-2. ''Save it ,run''

|-
|06:09
|As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
| 06:13
| |Now Change '''minus''' to a ''' s lash'''

|-
|06:20
|Now the output would be 6 if the addition is done before division.

|-
|06:25
|Or it would be 10 if division is done before addition.

|-
|06:30
|Let us '''Run''' and see the output.

|-
|06:38
|As we can see, the output is 10 and the division is done before addition. This is because the division operator has more precedence than the addition operator.

|-
|06:50
|In such situations, if we need to override the precedence, we use parentheses.

|-
| 07:04
| By adding parentheses, we instruct Java to do the addition before the division.

|-
| 07:10
| Let us run the file now.

|-
| 07:16
| As we can see, addition has been performed first and the output is 6 as expected.

|-
| 07:23
| As a rule, keep in mind to use parentheses when the order of operations is not clear.

|-
| 07:37
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 07:40
| we have learnt

|-
| 07:41
| '''How to''' '''perform basic mathematical operations in Java.'''

|-
| 07:44
| ''' operator precedence, and, '''

|-
| 07:46
| '''How to override it.'''

|-
| 07:49
| As an assignment for this tutorial Find out what is meant by the '''modulo''' operator and what it does.

|-
| 07:58
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link,
|-
| 08:03
| It summarizes the project.
|-
| 08:06
| If you do not have good bandwidth you can download and watch it
|-
| 08:11
| The Spoken Tutorial Team.
|-
| 08:12
| Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials'''
|-
|08:15
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.
|-
| 08:18
| For more details, please write to ''' spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 08:25
| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project .
|-
| 08:29
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India. |-
| 08:35
| '''More information on this Mission is available at the following link '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 08:39
| This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

Geogebra/C2/Introduction-to-Geogebra/English-timed

2013-09-10T06:35:11Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
| 00:00
|Hello Everybody. Welcome to the tutorial Introduction to Geogebra. In this tutorial I will introduce you to the basics of getting started with Geogebra.
|-
| 00:09
|What is Geogebra ? It is a free mathematics software and is available at www.geogebra.org to download.
|-
|00:17
|It is useful for computer aided learning as it is interactive, and you can see the algebraic expressions of geometric figures and vice versa.
|-
| 00:25
|It combines Geometry , Algebra and Calculus. So you can construct geometric figures, enter equations, deal with variables, vectors etc..
|-
| 00:35
|To get started with Geogebra, I am using the Linux operating system Ubuntu Version 10.04 LTS and Geogebra Version 3.2.40.0
|-
| 00:47
| If you have already installed Geogebra, go to the Ubuntu Menu Item '''Applications''', education or science and click on the Geogebra Application.
|-
| 00:58
|If you have not installed Geogebra, please go to system , administration, synaptic package Manager to install Geogebra.
|-
| 01:08
| Now let us explore the Geogebra window . In this tutorial I will briefly explain the menu bar, the tool bar and tool view, the graphics view and algebra view. The input bar and commands.
|-
| 01:20
|A typical Geogebra window looks like this.
It has a standard menu bar like any window based application.

|-
| 01:28
|The tool bar is like the compass box of Geogebra.

|-
| 01:32
|The tool view tells you which tool is selected and ready for use.
|-
| 01:36
|The graphic view is the drawing pad of Geogebra. You can construct geometric figures on this pad.

|-
| 01:42
|This is the '''algebra view'''. In this window you can see the algebraic expressions of all the geometric figures constructed on the drawing pad.
|-
| 01:50
| The '''Input Bar '''allows you to input algebra equations which will be made visible on the drawing pad as well as the algebra view.
|-
| 01:59
|The commands supported by Geogebra in the input bar are in this drop down menu.
|-
| 02:05
|The drawing pad is always visible in Geogebra and cannot be closed.
|-
| 02:10
|On the drawing pad you can use the grid by going to view and checking on the grid option.
|-
| 02:17
|Similarly you can un-check the axes if you don't want to see it. We will keep the axes and grid visible for this tutorial.
|-
| 02:25
|If you choose to close the algebra view or Input Bar you may do so by going to view and un checking the option. Let us remove the input bar from this tutorial.
|-
| 02:38
|Now the tool bar a compass box in more detail. To use a tool click on an item.
|-
| 02:47
|Notice when you click on it, a dark blue border appears around the item, indicating that it is selected and it's name and a hint on how to use it also appears in the tool view.
|-
| 02:59
|The move drawing pad is the right most tool item. Click on it and then click on the drawing pad. Keep the left click depressed and move the drawing pad to the desired position.
|-
| 03:13
| If we start with the pencil in the compass box, in geometry we can draw a point with a pencil.
|-
| 03:19
|The pencil tools are here. If you click on the small red triangle in the corner of the tool you will see all the pencil or the point tools.
|-
| 03:29
|Similarly the next set of tool items are for lines. Then these perpendicular lines and bisectors, polygons, circles etc.
|-
| 03:42
|In this tutorial I am going to take you through drawing points, line segments, parallel and perpendicular lines measuring objects , changing object properties and saving a file.
|-
| 04:01
|Now let us draw points. Select the new point option, click on anywhere on the drawing pad. You get new points.
|-
| 04:12
|Notice that the point appears on the drawing pad as well as in the algebra view.
|-
|04:19
|All tool items drawn on the drawing pad are called objects in Geogebra.
|-
| 04:24
|Points A and B are free objects, that is they are not dependent on any other object on the drawing pad.
|-
| 04:32
|You can draw a line segment by going to '''segment between two points''' using two existing points like A and B or click anywhere else on the drawing pad and you will get two new points and the segment between these two points.
|-
| 04:51
|Similarly you can draw a perpendicular line by checking a point and then the line you will get a perpendicular line through point D Perpendicular to segment CD.
|-
| 05:10
|A parallel line, I will click on a point anywhere here and select AB. I get a parallel line to AB through point E.
|-
| 05:25
| Now you can find the point of intersection of two objects if you go to this tool here and click on intersect two objects.
|-
| 05:32
| When you move your mouse over the intersection both the objects get highlighted at that time click you will get the intersection of the two objects
|-
| 05:44
|To measure the distance, click on the fourth from right tool bar and select '''Distance or length tool'''.
|-
| 05:52
|You may measure the distance between points by selecting the two points clicking DF here or you may select an entire line segment.
|-
| 06:02
|Notice that there are no unit on the grid. We will explore unit names in more advanced topics.

|-
| 06:12
|You can change the properties such as the label and colour of each of the items Before that
|-
| 06:19
|If you don't want to draw any object, please use the arrow key here. So if when you use that it will not draw any object on the drawing pad.
|-
| 06:30
| Now to change the object properties move your mouse over the object, when it get highlighted right click and click on object properties.
|-
| 06:41
|Here I will take you through some of the basic properties, more details in another advanced topic.
|-
| 06:48
|To change the name, type a new name. You can also type a caption. You can choose to show the object or not show it.
|-
| 07:02
|You can choose to not show the label or you can show one of these options. Lets keep the caption on
|-
| 07:11
| In the colour tab you can change the colour of the line.
|-
| 07:14
| In the style tab you can change the thickness and you can change the style.
|-
| 07:19
|When you close this you have the new appearance of the line.
|-
| 07:25
|The left most tool item the move tool item is a very useful tool for teaching as it makes the lesson dynamic and interactive.
|-
| 07:34
|All free objects may be moved.
|-
| 07:38
|All the dependent objects of the free objects will move preserving their property, when the free object is moved.
|-
| 07:45
|For example if we move points A or B , you will notice that the parallel line also moves along maintaining its parallel property.
|-
| 07:57
|To save a file, select the item '''file''' select '''Save As '''select the folder I will go to Documents Geogebra. Enter the file name and click save.
|-
| 08:20
|Notice that the name appears in the top panel and it is saved as a .ggb file like all geogebra files.
|-
| 08:28
|Now to open a file you have to click on file, open and select any file to open.
|-
| 08:38
|Finally the ASSIGNMENT.
|-
| 08:44
|In the assignment I would like you to draw a rectangle by using the segment between two points tool, start with that.
|-
| 08:53
|Then use the parallel line and perpendicular line. The Intersect two objects and the distance or length tools.

|-
| 09:00
|Finally test the rectangle you have constructed by using the move tool and move the free objects.
|-
| 09:07
| I have already constructed this assignment here. I have started with Line segment AB and I have constructed the rectangle ABED.
|-
| 09:20
|Now if I click on the move tool item and move the free objects notice that any position my rectangle ABED remains a rectangle if constructed properly.
|-
| 9:37
|I would like to acknowledge the spoken tutorial project which is part of the talk to a teacher project.
|-
| 09:43
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD government of India.
|-
| 09:48
|And you can see more information about this at this website.
|-
| 09:53
|Thank you this is Bindu signing off. Enjoy exploring Geogebra.

|}

Spoken-Tutorial-Technology/C2/Creation-of-a-spoken-tutorial-using-recordMyDesktop/English-timed

2013-09-10T06:09:42Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 !Time !Narration |- | 0:00 |Hello and welcome to this tutorial on '''“How to use recordMyDesktop”'''. |- | 0:05 |recordMyDesktop is a free and open source scree…'

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
| 0:00
|Hello and welcome to this tutorial on '''“How to use recordMyDesktop”'''.
|-
| 0:05
|recordMyDesktop is a free and open source screencasting software that works on the Ubuntu Linux operating system.
|-
| 0:13
|For more information on Screencasting software, please watch the spoken tutorial on '''"How To Use Camstudio"''' available on this website.
|-
| 0:21
|I have already downloaded gtk-recordMyDesktop version 0.3.8 and installed it on my PC through the Synaptic Package Manager.
|-
| 0:33
|For more information on how to install software in Ubuntu Linux, please refer to the spoken tutorials on Ubuntu Linux available on this website.
|-
|0:43
|Once you have successfully installed recordMyDesktop, go to the Ubuntu main menu on the top of the monitor or screen.
|-
| 0:51
|Click on '''Applications''' and choose '''Sound&Video'''.
|-
| 0:55
|This will open the context menu in which you will find the application gtk-recordMyDesktop. Click on it.
|-
| 01:02
|This will open the gtk-recordMyDesktop application window.
|-
| 01:07
|The main application window serves the purpose of defining some basic parameters of the recording, while the tray icon is primarily used for runtime control of your recordings.
|-
|01:19
|Notice a new entry in your system tray icon - '''the red circle''', representing the record button.
|-
|01:27
| The system tray icon has 3 states:
* Recording
* Stop
* Pause
|-
| 01:34
|When recordMyDesktop is launched, the icon will be a record sign, i.e. the red circle.
|-
| 01:41
|When one starts recording, the icon will change into a square which is the Stop sign.
|-
| 01:46
|Observe there are 2 squares here.
|-
| 01:48
|This is because I am using recordMyDesktop to record this tutorial.
|-
| 01:51
| To pause the recording, one has to right-click on the square and the icon will change into a pause sign - two thin parallel and vertical rectangles.
|-
| 02:03
| To resume the recording, one has to click on the pause sign again.
|-
| 02:07
|Inorder to stop the recording, one has to click on the square.
|-
|02:12
|Before setting any parameters, let me give you an '''important information'''.
|-
| 02:18
|Right-click on the red circle system tray icon. Here you have the options to show or hide the main application window.
|-
| 02:26
|When you start a recording session the main window will hide itself by default.
|-
| 02:32
|One can also choose to show the main application window by selecting this option.
|-
|02:37
| '''“Select Area on Screen”''' is a way of defining the area that you wish to record.
|-
| 02:43
|Choosing this option will change the cursor into a crosspen with which one can draw the capture on the screen.

|-
|02:51
|'''“Quit”''' option exits recordMyDesktop, exactly like the button on the main window.

|-
| 02:57

|Coming back to the application window, you will find the display panel to the left with a small preview window.
|-
| 03:06
| It depicts a scaled version of your desktop, which can be used for defining an area of recording.

|-
| 03:13
| To the right of this panel you will find the options to increase or decrease the Video Quality and the Sound Quality.
|-
| 03:22
| By default, both Video and Sound quality are set at 100. This setting gives very good playback video quality as well as audio quality.
|-
|03:32
| The trade-off, however, is a larger file size. For creating Spoken Tutorials, one does not need to have 100% Video quality as it increases the file size.
|-
| 03:44
|Experimenting a bit with these parameters will allow you to get an optimum file size with reasonably good video and sound quality.

|-
|03:53
|I will set the video quality to 50 and sound quality to 100.
|-
|4:00
|This is because the size of the audio stream will occupy only a small part of your resulting file.
|-
|4:08
| By default, recordMyDesktop does not record audio. To enable audio capture,one has to check the box to the left of Sound Quality.

|-
|4:20
|Notice the button '''ADVANCED'''. Lets click on it. This will open another dialog box as seen here.
|-
| 4:28
|Visit the ADVANCED window at least once, in order to better customize the behavior of recordMyDesktop.
|-
| 04:35
|All options in this window are saved and applied when you close it. There are '''4 options''' in the Main Menu of this window.

|-
| 04:43
|The first tab is '''Files'''. There are two options here.
|-
|04:48
| There is an option to overwrite existing files, bearing the same filename in the same location, with the one you chose for your recording.
|-
|04:57
| By default this option is turned off. Hence the existing files are not touched at all. Instead the new one is saved with a number postfixed at it's filename.
|-
|05:10
|So, if you choose to save your recording as recording.ogv, in your home directory and there is already a file named like that,
|-
|05:18
| the new one will instead get saved as recording-1.ogv. If recording-1.ogv exists ,then the new file will be named as recording-2.ogv and so on.

|-
|05:31
|Let me open the Advanced tab again . If the '''“Overwrite Existing Files”''' option is turned on, existing files are deleted without any prompt.
|-
| 05:41
|So, one has to be careful with it. The '''“Working Directory”''' option is the location in which the temporary files are stored during the recording.
|-
| 05:50
|This applies only when you are not performing encoding on the fly.

|-
| 05:55
|The next tab is Performance. There are 5 options here. Be sure to set the “Frames per second”.
|-
|06:02
|2 frames per second is a good setting for this parameter. However, for high animation videos, set any number between 15-20 frames per second.
|-
|06:12
| The '''“Encoding on the Fly”''' option causes recordMyDesktop to encode during the capture.
|-
|06:19
|By default, it is off. This is useful when you don't need a high fps, or you are capturing a small area.
|-
|06:28
| But if you need a smooth recording of a not-so-small area, you should turn this option off.
|-
|06:34
|As mentioned earlier, when using this option, both audio and video quality must be set to 100%.

|-
|06:42
| '''“Zero Compression”''' tab controls the compression of the cache. '''“Quick Subsampling”''' deals with the quality of the colorspace transformation. We will leave them as they are.

|-
|06:55
|'''“Full shots At Every Frame”''' enables full captures. By default, it is turned off.

|-
|07:02
|The third tab is '''Sound'''. The '''“Channels”''' option sets the number of channels in the resulting audio stream.
|-
|07:10
|It can be 1 (mono) or 2(stereo). When recording from a microphone, selecting more than one channels is completely unnecessary and will only increase the size of your output file.

|-
|07:24
|The '''“Frequency”''' setting, is probably the most defining factor for the audio quality of a recording.
|-
|07:30
|The default is 22050, which is more than enough for speech, but if you are recording music, you might need to use 44100.

|-
|07:40
|The '''“Device”''' should be set to “plughw:0,0” this is so that you have precise control of the channels and frequency values.
|-
|07:54
| Only then will the audio play smoothly, without any hitches or jumps. Typing “default” in lowercase alphabets also works.

|-
|08:05
|If you are using an external jack for recording, then check this box.
|-
|08:11
| The channels, frequency and device fields will be disabled. These settings are now provided by the Jack server.
|-
|08:19
| Before enabling Jack capture, you should make sure that a Jack server is running.

|-
| 08:25
|The last tab is '''Miscellaneous'''. There are various options here which are meant to be used less frequently.
|-
|08:34
|An important option here is the '''Follow Mouse''' option. When checked the capture area will follow the cursor wherever it moves on the screen.
|-
|08:43
| When unchecked, the capture area remains stationary inspite of cursor movement. I will give you a demo of this soon.

|-
| 08:53
|Let me also check outline capture area on screen.
|-
|08:58
|We will close this window now. Remember, all the settings will be saved as soon as we close this window.

|-
| 09:06
|In the preview window of the display panel lets draw a capture area for our sample recording.
|-
|09:14
| Click on the left-mouse button drag. Release the button.
|-
|09:20
|You will find a small rectangle in the preview window and a larger rectangle on your screen. This is the actual capture area.
|-
|09:30
| All activities within this rectangle will be captured in the demo recording. Now, lets do a demo recording.

|-
| 09:39
|I will click on the record icon. Hello and welcome to the demo recording using recordMyDesktop.
|-
|09:48
|This is a demo recording to demonstrate how easy it is to create a spoken tutorial.
|-
|09:54
| Click on Applications – Choose office - wordprocessor. Let me type DEMO here and click on the square icon to stop the recording.
|-
|10:16
|recordMyDesktop is now encoding and producing a movie in 'ogv' format.
|-
|10:24
|let me close the open office writer. The encoding is complete and the movie is now ready. Lets check it out.
|-
|10:31
|We will find the output 'ogv' file in the Home Folder. Click on home folder, here it is,This is our demo recording. Let's play this.
|-
|11:14
|So, I hope the information given in this tutorial will help you to use recordMyDesktop on your computer.
|-
|11:21
|Install this free and open source software and use it to create audio-video tutorials and online visual learning modules of your own.

|-
|11:30
|Spoken tutorial activity is the initiative of the ‘'''Talk to a Teacher’''' project coordinated by http://spoken-tutorial.org, developed at IIT Bombay.
|-
|11:42
|Funding for this work has come from the ''National Mission on Education through ICT'', launched by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
|11:51
|For more information, please visit http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro.

|-
|12:01
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial. This is Nancy from IIT Bombay saying Goodbye and Thank you for watching.

|}

Digital-Divide/D0/First-Aid-on-Snake-Bite/English-timed

2013-08-19T06:59:51Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Many of you are familiar with this scene in your village- a group of children playing in an open area.

|-
| 00:11
| Watch this boy, who is chasing the ball.

|-
| 00:13
| He enters the nearby bushy area.

|-
| 00:16
| He spots a snake.

|-
| 00:18
| In no time, it crawls out of its hide out.

|-
| 00:22
| The scared boy tries to shoo away the snake by throwing a stone.

|-
| 00:27
| The snake does not crawl away.

|-
| 00:30
| Instead it turns towards the boy and bites him on the foot.

|-
| 00:34
| The boy screams for help.

|-
| 00:36
| His friends runs to his side to help.

|-
| 00:40
| They see two red spots on the foot.

|-
| 00:43
| They carry the boy out of the bush.

|-
| 00:46
| There is a commotion.

|-
| 00:48
| All the children give different opinions about first aid.

|-
| 00:53
| Here comes the importance of knowing the first aid in case of a snake bite.

|-
| 00:58
| Welcome to spoken tutorial on '''First Aid on Snake Bites.'''

|-
| 01:03
| In this tutorial we will see

|-
| 01:05
| * How important is first aid. And
|-
| 01:08
| * How to give the correct first aid in case of a snake bite.

|-
| 01:12
| Before moving on to the first aid instructions,

|-
| 01:16
| we will review what the group of boys did to save their friend.

|-
|01:20
| They made the boy lie down.

|-
| 01:23
| And then they sought the help of elders to shift him to the hospital.

|-
| 01:29
| Then they tied a cloth around the wound.

|-
| 01:33
| Was it the right first aid?

|-
| 01:36
| Yes! In a way it is correct.

|-
| 01:40
| In this case, the hospital was not far away.

|-
| 01:43
| So the boy got the medical aid in time.

|-
| 01:47
| The correct way to give first aid in case of a snake bite is -

|-
| 01:52
| Make the person lie down on a flat surface.
|-
| 01:56
| Roll a cloth on the affected area.

|-
| 02:00
| The primary purpose of this first aid is to stop the poison from circulating throughout the body.

|-
| 02:08
| And how should we roll the cloth around the wound?

|-
|02:11
| Start rolling from the upper portion of the leg and move downwards.

|-
| 02:16
| Shift the person quickly to the nearest hospital for further treatment.

|-
| 02:21
| In this way, first aid given in time prevents many damages.

|-
| 02:27
| Remember, wrong first aid can make one’s condition worse.

|-
| 02:32
| Do’s in case of a snake bite.

|-
| 02:35
| - First lay the victim down

|-
| 02:38
| - When you roll the cloth apply some pressure

|-
| 02:42
| And the Don’ts in case of a snake bite

|-
| 02:45
| - Do Not Cut the skin or the flesh around the bite.

|-
| 02:50
| - Do Not Put ice on or around the bite

|-
| 02:53
| - Do Not Shock the person with electricity

|-
| 02:57
| - Do Not Try to suck the blood or the venom out of the bite and

|-
| 03:03
| - Do Not Tie the cloth too tight. This could lead to gangrene.

|-
| 03:07
| This video is part of the bridge the digital divide initiative of the spoken tutorial project

|-
| 03:13
| To know more about the spoken tutorial project

|-
| 03:16
| Watch the video available at http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial

|-
| 03:22
| It summaries the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 03:25
| If you do not have a good bandwidth you can download and watch it

|-
| 03:29
| The Spoken Tutorial project team conducts workshops using spoken tutorials.

|-
| 03:34
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.

|-
| 03:38
| For more details, please write to: contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 03:44
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 03:48
| It is Supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 03:55
| More information on this mission is available at http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 04:02
| This is Prathamesh Salunke, thanks for joining

|}

C-and-C++/C2/If-And-Else-If-statement/English-timed

2013-08-16T06:45:35Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration''

|-
| 00.02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Conditional statements in C and C++'''

|-
| 00.09
| In this tutorial we will learn,

|-
| 00.11
| how to execute a single '''statement'''.

|-
| 00.14
| How to execute group of '''statements'''.

|-
| 00.17
| We will do this through examples.

|-
| 00.20
| We will also see some common errors and their solutions.

|-
| 00.25
| To record this tutorial, I am using, '''Ubuntu Operating system''' version 11.10.

|-
| 00.32
| '''gcc''' and '''g++ Compiler''' version 4.6.1

|-
| 00.38
| Let us start with the Introduction to condition '''statements'''.

|-
| 00.43
| A '''statement''' in a program controls the flow of program execution.

|-
| 00.50
| It helps to make decision on, what code is to be executed.

|-
| 00.56
|We can check the conditions, whether true or false.

|-
| 01.01
| We can execute a single statement or a group of statements.

|-
| 01.08
| Let us understand the flow of if statements.

|-
| 01.13
| Here, if the condition is true then , '''statement1''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.20
| If the condition is false then '''statement2''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.29
| Now we will see the flow of else if '''statement''',

|-
| 01.32
| Here, if '''condition1''' is true then '''statement1''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.41
| If '''condition1''' is false then it will check for another condition that is '''condition2'''.

|-
| 01.50
| If '''condition2''' is true, then '''statement3''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.55
| And If '''condition2''' is false, then '''statement2''' will be executed

|-
| 02.03
| Now Let us move on to our program.

|-
| 02.06
| I have already typed the code on the editor.

|-
| 02.09
| So let me open it.

|-
| 02.13
| Note that our filename is '''ifstmt.c'''

|-
| 02.19
| In this program we will calculate the sum of two numbers and will check a few conditions.

|-
| 02.27
| Let me explain the code now.

|-
| 02.31
| This is our '''header file.'''

|-
| 02.34
| This is our '''main function.'''

|-
| 02.38
| Here we have declared three integer '''variables''' '''a, b and sum.'''

|-
| 02.47
| Here we are asking for user input.

|-
| 02.49
| User will enter the values of a and b.

|-
| 02.52
| The values will be stored in '''variable a''' and '''variable b.'''

|-
| 02.58
|The 'scanf()''' reads data from the '''console.'''

|-
| 03.02
| It then stores the result in the given '''variable.'''

|-
| 03.06
| The''' format specifier '''in the''' scanf() '''helps to know the type of data.

|-
| 03.11
| Like here we have %d it denotes that we are dealing with integer data type.

|-
| 03.19
| Here we add the values of''' a''' and '''b.'''

|-
| 03.22
| We will store the result in '''sum.'''

|-
| 03.26
| Then we print the result.

|-
| 03.29
| This is our '''if statement.'''

|-
| 03.31
|Here, we check the condition whether '''sum''' is greater than 20.

|-
| 03.36
|If the condition is true, then we print '''Sum''' is greater than 20.

|-
| 03.43
| Now let me comment out these lines.

|-
|03.48
|This is our return statement.

|-
| 03.51
| Now click on '''Save'''

|-
| 03.53
|First we will see the execution of if statement.

|-
| 03.58
| Please open the terminal window by pressing,'''Ctrl, Alt and T''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
|04.09
| To compile type, '''gcc ifstmt.c -o if'''and press enter

|-
| 04.20
| To execute type, '''./if''' press enter

|-
| 04.26
| it is displayed as,

|-
| 04.27
|Enter the value of a and b.

|-
| 04.32
|I will give the values as 10 and 12.

|-
| 04.38
|The output is displayed as Sum of a and b is 22. Sum is greater than 20.

|-
| 04.45
| Now come back to our program.

|-
| 04.49
| We will check another condition.

|-
| 04.53
|Let me remove the comment from here.

|-
| 04.57
|I will give the comment here.

|-
| 05.00
|Now click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 05.03
| This is our else-if statement.

|-
| 05.05
|Here, we check another condition whether '''Sum''' is greater than 10

|-
| 05.11
|If the condition is true. Then we print '''Sum''' is greater than 10 and less than 20.

|-
| 05.18
| Now come back to our terminal.

|-
| 05.20
|Let us compile as before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 05.27
| It is displayed as,

|-
| 05.28
|Enter the value of a and b.
|-
| 05.30
| I will give the values as 10 and 2.

|-
| 05.35
|The output is displayed as: Sum of a and b is 12.

|-
| 05.39
|Sum is greater than 10 and less than 20.

|-
| 05.43
|Let me clear the prompt. Now come back to our program.

|-
| 05.48
| I will remove the comment from here and here.Now click on save,

|-
| 05.56
| If both the conditions are false, then we print Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 06.04
|This is our else statement.

|-
| 06.08
| Now let us execute and see. come back to our terminal.

|-
| 06.12
|Let us compile as before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 06.18
| | Here it is displayed as,

|-
| 06.19
|Enter the value of a and b.

|-
| 06.22
|I will give the values as 3 and 5.

|-
| 06.27
| the output is as, sum of a and b is 8.

|-
| 06.31
|Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 06.34
| Now we will see some common errors which we can come across.

|-
| 06.38
|Come back to our program.

|-
| 06.41
| Suppose, here at the end of if statement I will type a semicolon.

|-
| 06.47
|Let see what will happen.Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 06.50
| Let us execute. Come back to our terminal.

|-
| 06.53
|Let us compile as before.

|-
| 06.56
| We see an error: else without a previous if

|-
| 07.02
| Come back to our program.It is an syntax error.

|-
| 07.07
|If statement will never terminate with a semicolon.

|-
| 07.10
|And the else if statement will never work without an if.

|-
| 07.16
| Let us fix the error. Delete the semicolon ; here

|-
| 07.22
| Now Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 07.25
| Let us execute. Come back to the terminal.

|-
| 07.29
| Let us compile as before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 07.35
|Enter the value of a and b

|-
| 07.37
|I will give the values as 3 and 6.

|-
| 07.44
|The output is displayed as

|-
| 07.46
|Sum of a and b is 9. Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 07.52
| | NOW WE WILL SEE HOW TO EXECUTE THE SAME PROGRAM IN C++.

|-
| 07.57
|Come back to our program.

|-
| 08.00
| I will change a few things here.

|-
| 08.03
| Press '''Shift, Ctrl and S''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.'''

|-
| 08.11
|Now save the file with an extension .'''cpp''' and''' '''click''' '''on''' Save'''

|-
| 08.20
| We will change the header file as, '''iostream'''

|-
| 08.26
| Let us include the '''using '''statement here.

|-
| 08.30
| Now click on the search for and replace text option .
|-
| 08.36
|let us replace '''printf '''statement with '''cout''' '''statement.'''

|-
| 08.40
|Click on '''Replace all''' and click on '''Close'''

|-
| 08.46
| Now delete the closing brackets here.

|-
| 08.50
|Replace the '''scanf''' statement with the '''cin''' statement.

|-
| 08.54
|Type '''cin and two closing angle brackets >>'''

|-
| 09.00
|As we use '''cin >> function''' to read a line in C++.

|-
| 09.06
| Now delete the '''format specifiers'''.

|-
| 09.09
|Delete the '''comma''' and '''ampersand''' &'''

|-
| 09.12
|Delete the comma here and type two closing angle brackets.

|-
| 09.17
|Again delete the '''ampersand'''and the closing brackets. Now Click on '''Save'''.

|-
| 09.25
| Here delete the closing bracket and the comma.

|-
| 09.32
|Now delete the ''''backslash n'''' and ''''format specifier'''
'
|-
| 09.37
| Now Type two opening brackets

|-
| 09.42
|Again type two opening angle brackets and''' within the double quotes type backslash n “\n”.'''

|-
| 09.49
|Here also we will delete the closing bracket.

|-
| 09.54
|Now again delete the closing bracket here and here.

|-
| 09.59
|Now Click on '''Save'''

|-
| 10.03
| Let us execute.

|-
| 10.04
|| Come back to the terminal.let me clear the prompt.

|-
| 10.10
|To compile type '''g++ space ifstmt.cpp space -o space if1'''

|-
| 10.21
|Here we have '''if1''' because we don't want to overwrite the output parameter '''if '''for the file ifstmt.c

|-
| 10.31
|Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 10.33
|To execute type ./if1 and Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 10.39
|Enter the value of''' a''' and '''b'''. I will give the values as 20 and 10.

|-
| 10.48
|The output is displayed as, Sum of a and b is '''30'''.

|-
| 10.53
|Sum is greater than 20.

|-
| 10.56
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 10.59
| Now come back to our slides.
|-
| 11.03
| Let us summarize.

|-
| 11.04
|In this tutorial we learned, if statement eg. if(condition)

{…........

}

|-
| 11.12
| And else if statement eg. else if(condition)

{….........

}

|-
| 11.18
| As an assignment,

|-
| 11.19
|Write a program to check '''a''' is greater than '''b''' or less than '''b.'''

|-
| 11.24
|'''Hint: ''' use if statement.

|-
| 11.28
|Write another program to check which value is greater '''a,''' '''b''' or '''c.'''

|-
| 11.34
|'''Hint:''' use else-if statement.

|-
| 11.39
| Watch the video available at the link shown below. http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 11.41
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

|-
| 11.44
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
|11.49
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team,

|-
| 11.51
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials.

|-
| 11.54
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.

|-
| 11.58
|For more details, please write to, contact [at] spoken hyphen tutorial dot org.

|-
| 12.05
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project.

|-
| 12.09
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.

|-
| 12.16
|More information on this Mission is available at the link shown below. (http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro)

|-
| 12.21
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay

Thank You for watching.
|}

Java/C2/Nested-if/English-timed

2013-08-13T07:16:55Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
| '''Time'''
|'''Narration'''
|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Nested-If and Ternary Operator '''in java'''.'''
|-
| 00:07
| By the end of this tutorial you should be able to:

* Explain Nested-If Statements and Ternary operators.
* Use them in a Java program.
|-
| 00:17
| | For this tutorial we are using:

'''Ubuntu v 11.10,'''

'''JDK 1.6,'''and

'''EclipseIDE 3.7.0'''
|-
| 00:27
| To follow this tutorial, you should know,

|-
| 00:29
|about the usage of '''relational and logical operators'''.

|-
| 00:33
|And '''if...else''' control flow statements.

|-
| 00:36
|If not, for relevant tutorial please visit our website which is as shown.

|-
| 00:41
| Nested '''if''' statements an '''If''' statement within another '''if '''statement is called a '''nested-if '''statement.

|-
| 00:49
||Now let us locate the syntax for writing the '''Nested-If statement'''.

|-
| 00:53
|In this case, if condition 1 is true, then the program checks for condition 2.

|-
| 00:59
|Condition 2 is given using another If statement.

|-
| 01:03
| If condition 2 is true, then the program executes Statement or block 1.

|-
| 01:09
|Else, it executes Statement or block 2.

|-
| 01:13
|If condition 1 is false, then the program will not check condition2.

|-
| 01:18
|Instead it will directly jump to its else statement i.e. block 3.

|-
| 01:24
| nOw Let us try and example to understand that better

|-
| 01:28
| We have the eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:32
|We have created a class '''NesedIfDemo''' and added the main method to it.

|-
| 01:37
| We shall check if the given number is a even number or an odd number.

|-
| 01:42
| we will also handle negative numbers using a nested-if.

|-
|01:46
|So inside the main method type

|-
| 01:49
|'''int n = minus 5;'''

|-
| 01:54
|We have created a variable n to store the negative number.

|-
| 01:58
|Now we shall write the if conditions.

|-
| 02:01
| Next line Type

|-
| 02:02
|'''if (n < 0) '''

|-
| 02:07
|'''''open curly bracket'''''. Press enter

|-
| 02:10
|'''System.out.println Within brackets and double quotes (“Negative number”);'''

|-
| 02:22
|We first see if the number is a negative number.

|-
| 02:25
|If yes then we will not check for even and odd.

|-
| 02:29
| if the number is not a negative, we check for even and odd.

|-
| 02:34
| Next line Type

'''else {'''

'''}''' Press enter

|-
| 02:42
|Now if the execution has come to the else part.

|-
| 02:45
|It means that the number is non negative.

|-
| 02:48
|So we check for odd or even inside this else part.

|-
| 02:52
| Type

|-
| 02:53
|'''if (n ''modules'' 2 double equal to 0) {''' Press enter

|-
| 03:03
|'''System.out.println(“Even number”);'''

'''}'''

'''else {''' press enter

Type

'''System.out.println(“Odd number”);'''

'''}'''
|-
| 03:29
|So we make sure that negative numbers are not considered for odd or even check.

|-
| 03:34
|Now let us see the code in action.

|-
| 03:37
| Save and run the file.As we can see, we get the output as“negative number”.

|-
| 03:43
|now Let us try a positive number

|-
| 03:46
| Change n = -5 to n = 5

|-
| 03:53
|Now'''Save''' and''' Run''' the file

|-
| 03:57
| As we can see, the output is odd number as expected. Let us try an even number

|-
| 04:04
| Change n = 5 to n = 10.

|-
| 04:09
|Now Save and run the file

|-
| 04:12
| As we can see, the output is “even” number as expected.

|-
| 04:17
| This process of including an if statement inside another, is called nested-if.

|-
| 04:22
|There is no limit to the amount of nesting.

|-
| 04:25
|But it is a good practice to not go beyond 3 levels of nesting.

|-
| 04:31
| | Now we shall look at the ternary operator.

|-
| 04:33
|First let me clean up the '''Main''' method.

|-
| 04:37
| We shall write a program that divides a number by 2.

|-
| 04:40
|It is a very trivial program but the issue comes in dividing odd numbers.

|-
| 04:45
|When 7 is divided by 2, we get 3.

|-
| 04:48
|But what if we want the result to be rounded off.

|-
| 04:50
|Which means, when 7 is divided by 2, we get 4 and not 3

|-
| 04:56
|In simple terms, we need the next number.

|-
| 04:59
| Let us see how to write such a program.

|-
| 05:01
| See inside the main method Type '''int n, nHalf ; '''

|-
| 05:08
|We will store the number in n and the half number in nHalf

|-
| 05:13
| NExt line Type '''n = 5;'''

|-
| 05:18
|NExt line Type '''if (n % 2 == 0) {''' Press enter

|-
| 05:28
|Type '''nHalf = n / 2;'''

'''}'''

'''else {'''

'''nHalf = (n + 1) / 2;'''

'''}'''

|-
| 05:50
|We check if the number is even or odd and do the division accordingly.

|-
| 05:55
| Now Let us add a print statement to see the program in action.

|-
| 05:59
| So Type '''System.out.println(nHalf);'''
|-
| 06:11
|Now '''Save''' and '''Run''' the file

|-
| 06:14
|As we can see, our objective is met. We get the output as 3 and not 2

|-
| 06:21
| But if we notice, all we are doing is, setting the value of a variable depending on a condition.

|-
| 06:27
|There is more syntax than logic in our program.

|-
| 06:31
|This is when ternary operator makes code simpler.

|-
| 06:35
| Ternary Operator conditional operator providing results similar to nested-if.

|-
| 06:40
|It Provides a short syntax and is denoted by a question mark.

|-
| 06:45
| It Takes three operands at a time.

|-
| 06:48
| Let us learn about the syntax of Ternary Operator.

|-
| 06:53
|The expression is the condition that has to be checked.

|-
|06:56
|Operand 1 is the value of the variable Result if the condition is true.

|-
|07:03
|Operand 2 is the value if the condition is false.

|-
|07:09
| Now Let us use it in our program.

|-
|07:12
|First let us remove the if-else statement.

|-
| 07:17
|Type '''nHalf = n % 2 == 0 ? n / 2 : (n + 1) / 2''' semi-colon

|-
|07:41
|This statement reads,

|-
|07:43
|if n is even, nHalf is n by 2 ,Otherwise, it is n plus 1 by 2.

|-
|07:50
|Let us now see it in action.

|-
| 07:52
|'''Save''' and '''Run'''the file. Press Ctrl S and Ctrl F11 keys

|-
|07:59
| As we can see, the output is as expected.

|-
|08:02
|This way, ternary operator reduces clutter in the code and improves readability.

|-
|08:09
| We have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 08:11
|In this tutorial we have learnt:

|-
| 08:13
|* About Nested-If Statements and Ternary Operator
|-
| 08:15
|* Usage of Nested-If Statements and Ternary Operator in a Java program

|-
|08:22
|Now take an assignment on

|-
|08 :23
|Nested-If and Ternary operator. Write java program for the following.

|-
| 08:28
|* Check whether a number is even and also a multiple of 11 using nested-if.
|-
| 08:34
|* Identify the largest number among the two given numbers using Ternary operator.

|-
| 08:40
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link.
|-
| 08:45
| It summarizes the spoken-tutorial project.If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
| 08:52
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team.
|-
| 08:54
||Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and
|-
| 08:57
||gives certificates for those who pass an online test. For more details, please write to '''contact AT spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 09:07
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project and
|-
| 09:11
|It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
| 09:17
||'''More information on this Mission is available at '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 09:26
| This script has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. This is '''Arya Ratish from IIT Bombay signing off. Thanks for joining.

|}

Java/C2/while-loop/English-timed

2013-08-13T07:14:14Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' While Loop '''in java'''.'''

|-
| 00:06
| In this tutorial, you will learn '''About the while loop.'''

'''How To use it.'''

|-
| 00:12
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''

|-
| 00:21
| To follow this tutorial, you must have knowledge of '''relational operators in Java'''

|-
| 00:26
| If not, for relevant tutorials please visit our website as shown. [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ ://][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ spoken][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ -][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ tutorial][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ .][http://spoken-tutorial.org/ org]

|-
| 00:36
| Here is the structure of a while loop.

|-
| 00:39
| It has two parts.

|-
| 00:41
| One is the '''loop running condition''' and the second is the '''loop variable.'''

|-
| 00:48
| Let us now look at an example. Switch to Eclipse

|-
| 00:55
| Here We have the eclipse IDE and the skeleton required for rest of the code

|-
| 01:00
| I have created a class WhileDemo and added the main method to it.

|-
| 01:05
| | We shall print numbers from 1 to 10 using a while loop. Type '''''int n = 1'' '''''

|-
| 01:15
| This variable n is going to be our loop variable

|-
| 01:21
| type '''''while ''''in ''parenthesis '''n''' less than or equal to'' '''''10''''' open and close braces

|-
| 01:33
| This condition is called looping running condition.

|-
| 01:37
| It means the loop will run as long as this condition is true.

|-
| 01:42
| In our case, it will run as long as the value of '''n''' is less than or equal to 10.

|-
| 01:47
| And it will stop only when the value of '''n''' become greater than 10.

|-
| 01:53
| Inside the loop, we shall print the value of '''n'''

|-
| 01:58
| '''System.out.println(n);''' and then increment '''n = n + 1;'''

|-
| 02:12
| This way, first 1 is printed and then the value of n becomes 2.

|-
| 02:18
| Then the loop condition is checked.

|-
| 02:21
| Since it is true. 2 is printed and n becomes 3.

|-
| 02:25
| And so on loop progresses untill 10 is printed after that n becomes 11 and the condition is not true and the loop will stop

|-
| 02:37
| So Let us see the code in action.

|-
| 02:39
| Save and run.

|-
| 02:47
| As we can see, the numbers from 1 to 10 are printed.

|-
| 02:52
| Now we shall print numbers from '''50''' to '''40'''

|-
| 02:58
| So We start with 50. ''' Change n = 1 to n = 50'''

|-
| 03:03
| And We go till 40.

|-
| 03:05
| In other words as long as n ''is greater than or equal to ''40. So change the condition to n '' greater than or equal to ''40.

|-
| 03:16
| And since we are looping from a bigger number to a smaller number, we have decrement the loop variable.

|-
| 03:22
| So Change '''n=n + 1''' to '''n=n - 1'''

|-
| 03:27
| Save and run. As we can see, the the numbers 50 to 40 have been printed

|-
| 03:42
| Now we shall print the first 10 multiples of 7.

|-
| 03:48
| To do that, we start with 7

|-
| 03:50
| So change '''n = 50''' to '''n = 7'''and then end with 70.

|-
| 03:57
| Change the condition to n''' ''less than equal to '''''70'''

|-
| 04:03
| This way, we make sure the loop stops at 70.

|-
| 04:07
| To get the multiples, we shall increment the loop variable by 7.

|-
| 04:12
| So, change ''' n=n - 1''' to '''n=n + 7'''

|-
| 04:18
| This way first 7 is printed and then n becomes 14, 14 is printed and so on untill 70. Save and run

|-
| 04:33
| | As we can see, the first 10 multiples of 7 are printed.

|-
| 04:43
| We can also use a while loop to get the sum of digits of a number.

|-
| 04:47
| Let us see how to do so.

|-
| 04:49
| First clear the main method.

|-
| 04:54
| int '''n''' ''equal to'' '''13876'''. This is the number

|-
| 05:02
| Then '''int dSum '''''equal to'' '''0'''The variable dsum with symbolic for digit sum will contain the sum of digits

|-
| 05:18
| Type while, n greater than 0 open close parenthesis

|-
| 05:27
| The reason for using this condition will be evident in a while.

|-
| 05:32
| To get the sum of digits, we must first get the digits.
|-
| 05:36
| To do that we use modulo operator.

|-
| 05:40
| Type '''dSum = dSum + (n % 10)''' So we get the unit digit and add it to dsum

|-
| 05:52
|After that we remove the digit by dividing by 10. n = n / 10

|-
| 06:08
| So when the loop is run for the first time, '''dSum '''will be 6 and n will be 1387.

|-
| 06:15
| And when the loop is run for the the second time, '''dSum''' will be sum of 7 and 6 which is 13, and '''n''' will become 138.

|-
| 06:22
| So on, as the loop progresses, the digits will be removed from '''n''' and finally

|-
| 06:28
| '''n''' become zero.After that the condition n greater than 0 will be false and the loop will stop

|-
| 06:36
| So let us now add a print statement
|-
| 06:42
| '''System.out.println(dSum)'''

|-
| 06:51
| Let us see the code and action. Save and run
|-
| 06:59
| As we can see the sum of digit which is 25 has been printed

|-
| 07:06
| This way, a while loop, which is one of the most fundamental constructs in programming, can be used.

|-
| 07:16
| This brings us to the end of the tutorial.

|-
| 07:20
| In this tutorial we have learnt

* About while loop
* how to use it

|-
|07:26
| As an assignment for this tutorial solve the following problem.

|-
| 07:29
| Given a number, compute its reverse by using a while loop. Example: 19435 => 53491

|-
|07:37
|To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project, watch the video available at the following link, that summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 07:45
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
| 07:50
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team, Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials, Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 07:57
| For more details, please write to '''contact AT spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 08:03
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project.
|-
| 08:07
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
| 08:12
| '''More information on this Mission is available at the following link

|-
| 08:17
| This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

C-and-C++/C2/First-C++-Program/English-timed

2013-08-08T09:55:25Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00.02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on First C++ program.

|-
| 00.07
| In this tutorial I am going to explain,

|-
| 00.10
| How to write a C++ program

|-
| 00.13
| How to compile it

|-
| 00.14
| How to execute it

|-
| 00.17
| We will also explain some common errors and their solution.

|-
| 00.22
| To record this tutorial, I am using Ubuntu operating system version 11.10 and G++ Compiler version 4.5.2 on Ubuntu.

|-
| 00.35
| To practice this tutorial,

|-
| 00.38
| You should be familiar with Ubuntu Operating System and an Editor

|-
| 00.44
|Some editors are vim and gedit

|-
| 00.48
| I am using gedit in this tutorial

|-
| 00.51
| For relevant tutorial Please visit our website: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 00.56
| Let me tell you how to write a C++ program through an example

|-
| 01.01
| Open the terminal Window using '''Ctrl, Alt and T keys''' simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 01.09
| To open the text editor, type under terminal.

|-
| 01.13
| '''“gedit”''' space '''“talk”''' dot '''“.cpp”''' space ampersand '''“&”.'''

|-
| 01.21
| We use the '''“&”''' to free up the prompt.

|-
| 01.25
| Please note that all the C++ files will have the extension '''“.cpp”'''

|-
| 01.31
| Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 01.33
|the text editor has opened.

|-
| 01.36
| Let us start to write a program.

|-
| 01.38
| Type double slash '''“//”''' space

|-
| 01.41
| '''“My first C++ program”.'''

|-
| 01.44
| Here, double slash is used to comment the line

|-
| 01.49
| Comments are used to understand the flow of program

|-
| 01.52
| It is useful for documentation

|-
| 01.55
| It gives us information about the program

|-
| 01.59
| The double slash is called as single line comment.Now press Enter.

|-
| 02.05
| Type hash '''“#include”''' space opening angle bracket ''' ''closing angle bracket ''' .

|-
| 02.13
|It is a good practice to complete the brackets first, and then start writing inside it

|-
| 02.20
| Now Inside the bracket, type '''“iostream”''' .

|-
| 02.23
| Here '''iostream''' is a '''header file'''

|-
| 02.26
| This file includes the declaration of standard input output functions in C++.Now press Enter

|-
| 02.35
| Type '''“using”''' space '''“namespace”''' space '''“std”''' and a semicolon '''“;”''' .

|-
|02.45
| The '''using''' statement informs the compiler that you want to use the '''std namespace'''

|-
| 02.52
| The purpose of '''namespace''' is to avoid name collisions

|-
| 02.56
| It is done by localizing the names of identifiers

|-
|03.01
| It creates a declarative region and defines a scope

|-
| 03.05
| Anything defined within a '''namespace''' is in the SCOPE of that namespace

|-
| 03.11
|Here '''std''' is the '''namespace''' in which entire standard C++ library is declared. Now press '''Enter'''.

|-
| 03.20
| Type '''“int”''' space '''“main”''' opening bracket '''“(”''' closing bracket '''“)”''' .

|-
| 03.27
| '''main''' is a special '''function'''

|-
| 03.30
| It denotes that the execution of the program begins from this line.

|-
| 03.35
|The opening and the closing bracket is called as'' Parenthesis''.
|-
| 03.39
| Parenthesis followed by '''main''' tells the user that '''main''' is a '''function.'''

|-
| 03.45
| Here the '''int''' '''main''' '''function''' takes no '''arguments''' and returns a value of type integer.

|-
| 03.52
| We will learn about data types in another tutorial.

|-
| 03.56
|Now Let us switch to the slides to know more about main function.

|-
| 04.02
| Every '''program'''should have one main function

|-
| 04.05
| There should NOT be more than one “main” function

|-
| 04.09
| Otherwise the compiler cannot locate the beginning of the program

|-
| 04.13
| The empty pair of parentheses indicates that main has no '''arguments'''

|-
| 04.19
| The concept of '''arguments''' will be discussed in the upcoming tutorials. Now come back to our program. press enter.

|-
| 04.29
| Type opening curly bracket '''“{”'''

|-
| 04.32
| The opening curly bracket marks the beginning of the '''function main. '''

|-
| 04.37
|Then Type closing curly bracket '''“}”'''

|-
| 04.40
| The closing bracket indicates the end of the '''function main '''

|-
| 04.45
|Now Inside the bracket press enter twice

|-
| 04.49
| Move the cursor one line up.

|-
|04.51
| Indentation makes the code easier to read

|-
| 04.55
| It also helps to locate errors faster

|-
| 04.58
|So let us give a space here.

|-
| 05.01
|And type '''“cout”''' space two opening angle bracket ''''

|-
| 05.08
| Here '''cout '''is a standard '''C++ function''' to print the output on the terminal.

|-
| 05.14
|Now after the brackets, type within double quotes '''

|-
| 05.18
|Anything within the double quotes in the '''cout ''' functions will be printed. Now inside a quote type“Talk to a teacher backslash \n”'''.

|-
| 05.31
| Here '''\n''' signifies newline

|-
| 05.35
| As a result, after execution of the '''cout function''', the cursor moves to the new line.

|-
| 05.41
| Every C++ statement must end with a '''semicolon'''

|-
| 05.45
| Hence type it at the end of this line.

|-
| 05.48
| Semicolon acts as a statement terminator. Now press Enter.

|-
| 05.53
| Give a space here and Type '''“return”''' space '''“0”''' and a semicolon '''“;”.'''

|-
| 06.00
| This statement returns the integer zero

|-
| 06.03
| An integer has to be returned for this '''function'''

|-
| 06.06
| Because the '''function''' type is '''int'''

|-
| 06.10
| The '''return''' statement marks the end of executable statements

|-
| 06.15
| We will learn more about the returned values in another tutorial.

|-
| 06.20
| Now click on '''“Save”''' button to save the file

|-
| 06.23
| It is a good habit to save files frequently

|-
| 06.26
| This will protect you from sudden power failures

|-
| 06.30
| It will also be useful in case the applications were to crash.

|-
| 06.34
| Let us now compile the program.

|-
| 06.37
| Come back to a terminal

|-
| 06.39
| Type '''“g++”''' space '''“talk.cpp”''' space hyphen '''“-o”''' space '''“output”.'''

|-
| 06.49
|Here '''g++''' is the compiler used to compile '''C++ '''programs

|-
| 06.55
| '''talk.cpp''' is our filename

|-
| 06.59
| '''-o output''' says that the executable should go to the file output. Now press enter

|-
| 07.07
| We see that the program is compiled.

|-
| 07.10
| By typing '''ls -lrt''', we can see that '''output''' is the last file to be created.

|-
| 07.19
| Let us execute a program, type dot slash '''“./output” '''

|-
| 07.24
|And Press '''Enter.'''

|-
| 07.27
| Here the output is displayed as '''“Talk to a teacher”.'''

|-
| 07.31
| Now let us see the common errors which we can come across

|-
| 07.35
| switch back to a editor.

|-
| 07.38
| Suppose here we miss the '''{'''.
|-
| 07.42
|Now save the file.

|-
| 07.44
| Let us execute.Come back to a terminal

|-
| 07.48
| Now compile and run the program using the command we used before.We see an error

|-
| 07.55
| we see that there is an error at line no.7 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 08.02
| That Expected curly bracket at the end of input.

|-
| 08.07
|Now Come back to our text editor .

|-
| 08.09
| As i said before the closing curly bracket marks the end of the function main

|-
| 08.14
| Hence re-insert the bracket here. now Save the file.

|-
| 08.19
| Let us execute it again

|-
| 08.21
| You can recall the previously entered commands by using up arrow key

|-
| 08.26
| That is what I did now. Yes it is working.

|-
|08.32
| I will show you another common error

|-
| 08.35
| Let us switch back to our text editor.

|-
| 08.38
| Now, suppose here we missed '''std.'''Let us save the file

|-
| 08.44
| Come back to our terminal . Let us compile .

|-
| 08.48
| We see that there is an errors at line no 3 and line no 6 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 08.56
| That expected identifier before '''semicolon''' and '''cout''' was not declared in this scope.

|-
|09.05
| As '''cout''' is the standard '''C++ library function'''

|-
| 09.09
| and the entire '''C++ library function''' is defined under '''std namespace '''

|-
| 09.15
| Hence it is giving an error.

|-
| 09.18
| Let us now fix the error

|-
| 09.19
| Come back to our Text editor type '''std''' here
|-
| 09.23
| Let us Save it.

|-
| 09.25
| Let us compile it again.Yes it is working.
|-
| 09.32
| As an assignment,

|-
| 09.33
| Write a program to print your name and city

|-
| 09.37
| We used '''single line comment''' in this tutorial

|-
|09.40
| Now just try to give a '''multiline comment'''

|-
| 09.44
| Watch the video available at the link shown http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 09.47
| It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 09.49
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
|09.53
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 09.55
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
|09.58
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 10.01
| For more details, please write to contact @spoken-tutorial.org

|-
|10.10
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 10.14
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 10.20
| More information on this Mission is available at: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 10.25
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay signing off

|-
| 10.28
| Thank you for watching

|}

C-and-C++/C2/First-C++-Program/English-timed

2013-08-08T09:53:51Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00.02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on First C++ program.

|-
| 00.07
| In this tutorial I am going to explain,

|-
| 00.10
| How to write a C++ program

|-
| 00.13
| How to compile it

|-
| 00.14
| How to execute it

|-
| 00.17
| We will also explain some common errors and their solution.

|-
| 00.22
| To record this tutorial, I am using Ubuntu operating system version 11.10 and G++ Compiler version 4.5.2 on Ubuntu.

|-
| 00.35
| To practice this tutorial,

|-
| 00.38
| You should be familiar with Ubuntu Operating System and an Editor

|-
| 00.44
|Some editors are vim and gedit

|-
| 00.48
| I am using gedit in this tutorial

|-
| 00.51
| For relevant tutorial Please visit our website: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 00.56
| Let me tell you how to write a C++ program through an example

|-
| 01.01
| Open the terminal Window using '''Ctrl, Alt and T keys''' simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 01.09
| To open the text editor, type under terminal.

|-
| 01.13
| '''“gedit”''' space '''“talk”''' dot '''“.cpp”''' space ampersand '''“&”.'''

|-
| 01.21
| We use the '''“&”''' to free up the prompt.

|-
| 01.25
| Please note that all the C++ files will have the extension '''“.cpp”'''

|-
| 01.31
| Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 01.33
|the text editor has opened.

|-
| 01.36
| Let us start to write a program.

|-
| 01.38
| Type double slash '''“//”''' space

|-
| 01.41
| '''“My first C++ program”.'''

|-
| 01.44
| Here, double slash is used to comment the line

|-
| 01.49
| Comments are used to understand the flow of program

|-
| 01.52
| It is useful for documentation

|-
| 01.55
| It gives us information about the program

|-
| 01.59
| The double slash is called as single line comment.Now press Enter.

|-
| 02.05
| Type hash '''“#include”''' space opening angle bracket ''' ''closing angle bracket ''' .

|-
| 02.13
|It is a good practice to complete the brackets first, and then start writing inside it

|-
| 02.20
| Now Inside the bracket, type '''“iostream”''' .

|-
| 02.23
| Here '''iostream''' is a '''header file'''

|-
| 02.26
| This file includes the declaration of standard input output functions in C++.Now press Enter

|-
| 02.35
| Type '''“using”''' space '''“namespace”''' space '''“std”''' and a semicolon '''“;”''' .

|-
|02.45
| The '''using''' statement informs the compiler that you want to use the '''std namespace'''

|-
| 02.52
| The purpose of '''namespace''' is to avoid name collisions

|-
| 02.56
| It is done by localizing the names of identifiers

|-
|03.01
| It creates a declarative region and defines a scope

|-
| 03.05
| Anything defined within a '''namespace''' is in the SCOPE of that namespace

|-
| 03.11
|Here '''std''' is the '''namespace''' in which entire standard C++ library is declared. Now press '''Enter'''.

|-
| 03.20
| Type '''“int”''' space '''“main”''' opening bracket '''“(”''' closing bracket '''“)”''' .

|-
| 03.27
| '''main''' is a special '''function'''

|-
| 03.30
| It denotes that the execution of the program begins from this line.

|-
| 03.35
|The opening and the closing bracket is called as'' Parenthesis''.
|-
| 03.39
| Parenthesis followed by '''main''' tells the user that '''main''' is a '''function.'''

|-
| 03.45
| Here the '''int''' '''main''' '''function''' takes no '''arguments''' and returns a value of type integer.

|-
| 03.52
| We will learn about data types in another tutorial.

|-
| 03.56
|Now Let us switch to the slides to know more about main function.

|-
| 04.02
| Every '''program'''should have one main function

|-
| 04.05
| There should NOT be more than one “main” function

|-
| 04.09
| Otherwise the compiler cannot locate the beginning of the program

|-
| 04.13
| The empty pair of parentheses indicates that main has no '''arguments'''

|-
| 04.19
| The concept of '''arguments''' will be discussed in the upcoming tutorials. Now come back to our program. press enter.

|-
| 04.296
| Type opening curly bracket '''“{”'''

|-
| 04.32
| The opening curly bracket marks the beginning of the '''function main. '''

|-
| 04.37
|Then Type closing curly bracket '''“}”'''

|-
| 04.40
| The closing bracket indicates the end of the '''function main '''

|-
| 04.45
|Now Inside the bracket press enter twice

|-
| 04.49
| Move the cursor one line up.

|-
|04.51
| Indentation makes the code easier to read

|-
| 04.55
| It also helps to locate errors faster

|-
| 04.58
|So let us give a space here.

|-
| 05.01
|And type '''“cout”''' space two opening angle bracket ''''

|-
| 05.08
| Here '''cout '''is a standard '''C++ function''' to print the output on the terminal.

|-
| 05.14
|Now after the brackets, type within double quotes '''

|-
| 05.18
|Anything within the double quotes in the '''cout ''' functions will be printed. Now inside a quote type“Talk to a teacher backslash \n”'''.

|-
| 05.31
| Here '''\n''' signifies newline

|-
| 05.35
| As a result, after execution of the '''cout function''', the cursor moves to the new line.

|-
| 05.41
| Every C++ statement must end with a '''semicolon'''

|-
| 05.45
| Hence type it at the end of this line.

|-
| 05.48
| Semicolon acts as a statement terminator. Now press Enter.

|-
| 05.53
| Give a space here and Type '''“return”''' space '''“0”''' and a semicolon '''“;”.'''

|-
| 06.00
| This statement returns the integer zero

|-
| 06.03
| An integer has to be returned for this '''function'''

|-
| 06.06
| Because the '''function''' type is '''int'''

|-
| 06.10
| The '''return''' statement marks the end of executable statements

|-
| 06.15
| We will learn more about the returned values in another tutorial.

|-
| 06.20
| Now click on '''“Save”''' button to save the file

|-
| 06.23
| It is a good habit to save files frequently

|-
| 06.26
| This will protect you from sudden power failures

|-
| 06.30
| It will also be useful in case the applications were to crash.

|-
| 06.34
| Let us now compile the program.

|-
| 06.37
| Come back to a terminal

|-
| 06.39
| Type '''“g++”''' space '''“talk.cpp”''' space hyphen '''“-o”''' space '''“output”.'''

|-
| 06.49
|Here '''g++''' is the compiler used to compile '''C++ '''programs

|-
| 06.55
| '''talk.cpp''' is our filename

|-
| 06.59
| '''-o output''' says that the executable should go to the file output. Now press enter

|-
| 07.07
| We see that the program is compiled.

|-
| 07.10
| By typing '''ls -lrt''', we can see that '''output''' is the last file to be created.

|-
| 07.19
| Let us execute a program, type dot slash '''“./output” '''

|-
| 07.24
|And Press '''Enter.'''

|-
| 07.27
| Here the output is displayed as '''“Talk to a teacher”.'''

|-
| 07.31
| Now let us see the common errors which we can come across

|-
| 07.35
| switch back to a editor.

|-
| 07.38
| Suppose here we miss the '''{'''.
|-
| 07.42
|Now save the file.

|-
| 07.44
| Let us execute.Come back to a terminal

|-
| 07.48
| Now compile and run the program using the command we used before.We see an error

|-
| 07.55
| we see that there is an error at line no.7 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 08.02
| That Expected curly bracket at the end of input.

|-
| 08.07
|Now Come back to our text editor .

|-
| 08.09
| As i said before the closing curly bracket marks the end of the function main

|-
| 08.14
| Hence re-insert the bracket here. now Save the file.

|-
| 08.19
| Let us execute it again

|-
| 08.21
| You can recall the previously entered commands by using up arrow key

|-
| 08.26
| That is what I did now. Yes it is working.

|-
|08.32
| I will show you another common error

|-
| 08.35
| Let us switch back to our text editor.

|-
| 08.38
| Now, suppose here we missed '''std.'''Let us save the file

|-
| 08.44
| Come back to our terminal . Let us compile .

|-
| 08.48
| We see that there is an errors at line no 3 and line no 6 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 08.56
| That expected identifier before '''semicolon''' and '''cout''' was not declared in this scope.

|-
|09.05
| As '''cout''' is the standard '''C++ library function'''

|-
| 09.09
| and the entire '''C++ library function''' is defined under '''std namespace '''

|-
| 09.15
| Hence it is giving an error.

|-
| 09.18
| Let us now fix the error

|-
| 09.19
| Come back to our Text editor type '''std''' here
|-
| 09.23
| Let us Save it.

|-
| 09.25
| Let us compile it again.Yes it is working.
|-
| 09.32
| As an assignment,

|-
| 09.33
| Write a program to print your name and city

|-
| 09.37
| We used '''single line comment''' in this tutorial

|-
|09.40
| Now just try to give a '''multiline comment'''

|-
| 09.44
| Watch the video available at the link shown http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 09.47
| It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 09.49
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
|09.53
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 09.55
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
|09.58
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 10.01
| For more details, please write to contact @spoken-tutorial.org

|-
|10.10
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 10.14
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 10.20
| More information on this Mission is available at: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 10.25
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay signing off

|-
| 10.28
| Thank you for watching

|}

C-and-C++/C2/First-C++-Program/English-timed

2013-08-08T07:26:10Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00.01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on First C++ program.

|-
| 00.06
| In this tutorial I am going to explain,

|-
| 00.10
| How to write a C++ program

|-
| 00.12
| How to compile it

|-
| 00.14
| How to execute it

|-
| 00.16
| We will also explain some common errors and their solution.

|-
| 00.21
| To record this tutorial, I am using Ubuntu operating system version 11.10 and G++ Compiler version 4.5.2 on Ubuntu.

|-
| 00.34
| To practice this tutorial,

|-
| 00.36
| You should be familiar with Ubuntu Operating System and an Editor

|-
| 00.42
|Some editors are vim and gedit

|-
| 00.46
| I am using gedit in this tutorial

|-
| 00.49
| For relevant tutorial Please visit our website: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
| 00.54
| Let me tell you how to write a C++ program through an example

|-
| 00.59
| Open the terminal Window using '''Ctrl, Alt and T keys''' simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 01.08
| To open the text editor, type under terminal.

|-
| 01.11
| '''“gedit”''' space '''“talk”''' dot '''“.cpp”''' space ampersand '''“&”.'''

|-
| 01.20
| We use the '''“&”''' to free up the prompt.

|-
| 01.24
| Please note that all the C++ files will have the extension '''“.cpp”'''

|-
| 01.30
| Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 01.32
|the text editor has opened.

|-
| 01.35
| Let us start to write a program.

|-
| 01.38
| Type double slash '''“//”''' space

|-
| 01.41
| '''“My first C++ program”.'''

|-
| 01.44
| Here, double slash is used to comment the line

|-
| 01.49
| Comments are used to understand the flow of program

|-
| 01.52
| It is useful for documentation

|-
| 01.55
| It gives us information about the program

|-
| 01.58
| The double slash is called as single line comment.Now press Enter.

|-
| 02.04
| Type hash '''“#include”''' space opening angle bracket ''' ''closing angle bracket ''' .

|-
| 02.13
|It is a good practice to complete the brackets first, and then start writing inside it

|-
| 02.20
| Now Inside the bracket, type '''“iostream”''' .

|-
| 02.24
| Here '''iostream''' is a '''header file'''

|-
| 02.28
| This file includes the declaration of standard input output functions in C++.Now press Enter

|-
| 02.36
| Type '''“using”''' space '''“namespace”''' space '''“std”''' and a semicolon '''“;”''' .

|-
|02.48
| The '''using''' statement informs the compiler that you want to use the '''std namespace'''

|-
| 02.54
| The purpose of '''namespace''' is to avoid name collisions

|-
| 02.58
| It is done by localizing the names of identifiers

|-
|03.02
| It creates a declarative region and defines a scope

|-
| 03.05
| Anything defined within a '''namespace''' is in the SCOPE of that namespace

|-
| 03.11
|Here '''std''' is the '''namespace''' in which entire standard C++ library is declared. Now press '''Enter'''.

|-
| 03.20
| Type '''“int”''' space '''“main”''' opening bracket '''“(”''' closing bracket '''“)”''' .

|-
| 03.28
| '''main''' is a special '''function'''

|-
| 03.31
| It denotes that the execution of the program begins from this line.

|-
| 03.36
|The opening and the closing bracket is called as'' Parenthesis''.
|-
| 03.41
| Parenthesis followed by '''main''' tells the user that '''main''' is a '''function.'''

|-
| 03.48
| Here the '''int''' '''main''' '''function''' takes no '''arguments''' and returns a value of type integer.

|-
| 03.55
| We will learn about data types in another tutorial.

|-
| 04.00
|Now Let us switch to the slides to know more about main function.

|-
| 04.06
| Every '''program'''should have one main function

|-
| 04.09
| There should NOT be more than one “main” function

|-
| 04.12
| Otherwise the compiler cannot locate the beginning of the program

|-
| 04.17
| The empty pair of parentheses indicates that main has no '''arguments'''

|-
| 04.23
| The concept of '''arguments''' will be discussed in the upcoming tutorials. Now come back to our program. press enter.

|-
| 04.34
| Type opening curly bracket '''“{”'''

|-
| 04.37
| The opening curly bracket marks the beginning of the '''function main. '''

|-
| 04.42
|Then Type closing curly bracket '''“}”'''

|-
| 04.45
| The closing bracket indicates the end of the '''function main '''

|-
| 04.50
|Now Inside the bracket press enter twice

|-
| 04.53
| Move the cursor one line up.

|-
|04.57
| Indentation makes the code easier to read

|-
| 05.00
| It also helps to locate errors faster

|-
| 05.03
|So let us give a space here.

|-
| 05.06
|And type '''“cout”''' space two opening angle bracket ''''

|-
| 05.13
| Here '''cout '''is a standard '''C++ function''' to print the output on the terminal.

|-
| 05.20
|Now after the brackets, type within double quotes '''

|-
| 05.26
|Anything within the double quotes in the '''cout ''' functions will be printed. Now inside a quote type“Talk to a teacher backslash \n”'''.

|-
| 05.39
| Here '''\n''' signifies newline

|-
| 05.43
| As a result, after execution of the '''cout function''', the cursor moves to the new line.

|-
| 05.50
| Every C++ statement must end with a '''semicolon'''

|-
| 05.54
| Hence type it at the end of this line.

|-
| 05.57
| Semicolon acts as a statement terminator. Now press Enter.

|-
| 06.03
| Give a space here and Type '''“return”''' space '''“0”''' and a semicolon '''“;”.'''

|-
| 06.10
| This statement returns the integer zero

|-
| 06.14
| An integer has to be returned for this '''function'''

|-
| 06.17
| Because the '''function''' type is '''int'''

|-
| 06.21
| The '''return''' statement marks the end of executable statements

|-
| 06.26
| We will learn more about the returned values in another tutorial.

|-
| 06.31
| Now click on '''“Save”''' button to save the file

|-
| 06.36
| It is a good habit to save files frequently

|-
| 06.39
| This will protect you from sudden power failures

|-
| 06.42
| It will also be useful in case the applications were to crash.

|-
| 06.47
| Let us now compile the program.

|-
| 06.50
| Come back to a terminal

|-
| 06.53
| Type '''“g++”''' space '''“talk.cpp”''' space hyphen '''“-o”''' space '''“output”.'''

|-
| 07.05
|Here '''g++''' is the compiler used to compile '''C++ '''programs

|-
| 07.12
| '''talk.cpp''' is our filename

|-
| 07.16
| '''-o output''' says that the executable should go to the file output. Now press enter

|-
| 07.25
| We see that the program is compiled.

|-
| 07.27
| By typing '''ls -lrt''', we can see that '''output''' is the last file to be created.

|-
| 07.37
| Let us execute a program, type dot slash '''“./output” '''

|-
| 07.43
|And Press '''Enter.'''

|-
| 07.46
| Here the output is displayed as '''“Talk to a teacher”.'''

|-
| 07.50
| Now let us see the common errors which we can come across

|-
| 07.54
| switch back to a editor.

|-
| 07.57
| Suppose here we miss the '''{'''.
|-
| 08.01
|Now save the file.

|-
| 08.04
| Let us execute.Come back to a terminal

|-
| 08.08
| Now compile and run the program using the command we used before.

|-
| 08.15
| we see that there is an error at line no.7 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 08.22
| That Expected curly bracket at the end of input.

|-
| 08.28
|Now Come back to a text editor .

|-
| 08.31
| As i said before the closing curly bracket marks the end of the function main

|-
| 08.36
| Hence re-insert the bracket here. now Save the file.

|-
| 08.41
| Let us execute it

|-
| 08.44
| You can recall the previously entered commands by using up arrow key

|-
| 08.49
| That is what I did now. Yes it is working.

|-
|08.56
| I will show you another common error

|-
| 08.59
| Let us switch back to our text editor.

|-
| 09.02
| Now, suppose here we missed '''std.'''Let us save the file

|-
| 09.08
| Come back to our terminal . Let us compile .

|-
| 09.13
| We see that there is an errors at line no 3 and line no 6 in our '''talk.cpp''' file

|-
| 09.21
| That expected identifier before '''semicolon''' and '''cout''' was not declared in this scope.

|-
|09.30
| As '''cout''' is the standard '''C++ library function'''

|-
| 09.33
| and the entire '''C++ library function''' is defined under '''std namespace '''

|-
| 09.39
| Hence it is giving an error.

|-
| 09.42
| Let us now fix the error

|-
| 09.44
| Come back to our Text editor type '''std''' at line no-3.

|-
| 09.50
| Let us Save it.

|-
| 09.52
| Let us compile it again.Yes it is working. Now let us go back to our slide.

|-
| 10.02
| As an assignment,

|-
| 10.03
| Write a program to print your name and city

|-
| 10.07
| We used '''single line comment''' in this tutorial

|-
| 10.10
| Now just try to give a '''multiline comment'''

|-
| 10.14
|This brings us to the end of these tutorial .

|-
| 10.17
| Watch the video available at the link shown http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 10.20
| It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 10.22
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
|10.26
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 10.28
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 10.31
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 10.35
| For more details, please write to contact @spoken-tutorial.org

|-
|10.43
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 10.47
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 10.53
| More information on this Mission is available at: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 10.58
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay signing off

|-
| 11.01
| Thank you for watching

|}

PHP-and-MySQL/C2/Functions-Advanced/English-timed

2013-08-07T06:22:38Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|0:03
|Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on Advanced Function. Here, I'll show you how to create a little calculator program.
|-
|0:11
|We will deal with a function that allows you to input a value. Then gain a value out of this, after a mathematical operation
|-
|0:20
|So, we'll create a function in the same way that we've done before. I'll call this 'calc'
|-
|0:27
|And I'm going to create my first block . Here , I'll type 'number1', 'number2' and an 'operator'
|-
|0:35
|Now this will be a numerical value. This will be an integer or decimal, depending on the user-input. This will also be the same and this will be the string value of either 'add' 'subtract' 'multiply' or 'divide'
|-
|0:52
|Now inside our function we need to start creating our code. I'm going to create a switch statement inside.
|-
|01:00
|I'll say switch and put the switch condition or rather the input of the switch is 'op'
|-
|1:09
|I'll create a block for this and I'll say case = plus then carry out this.
|-
|1:18
|I'll make a new variable called 'total' which will be equal to 'num1' which is input here plus 'num2'
|-
|1:32
|I'll break that with a semicolon. Now there's probability a much easier way to do this by combining the switch statement with a function.
|-
|1:44
|So you will be able to use all different kinds of things inside other statements and inside functions.
|-
|1:52
|So I have created a case for 'plus'. So when this equals to 'plus' supplied by the user, we have 'num1' added to 'num2'.
|-
|2:03
|Now we need to go down and create another 'case', which is 'minus'. I'll type total = 'num1' - 'num2'
|-
|2:17
| We will scroll down. Make sure you break that.
|-
|2:21
|We'll now copy this code down.
|-
|2:24
|And here we'll say 'multiply' and we'll say 'divide' and make sure you change the sign here.
|-
|2:34
|Now if you don't understand what is going on please feel free to contact us via e-mail. I hope every confusion will be resolved in that way.
|-
|2:45
|In the default we're going to echo out 'unknown operator'. OK?
|-
|2:51
|Let me just run through this. Then we will start to call the function.
|-
|2:56
|I have got a function called calculator or calc for short, which takes a number as input, then a second number and then an operator which could be either 'plus' 'minus' 'multiply' or 'divide'.
|-
|3:12
| As you have probably seen in my mathematical operator - sorry in my arithmetic operator tutorial.
|-
|3:20
|Now we have a switch statement inside, which takes this 'op' into account. It takes what has been entered. Now if it equals to a 'plus', remember that it switches over to this statement. It is easier to write and much more efficient.
|-
|3:42
|If it equals to a 'plus' then we will create a new variable called 'total'.
|-
|3:48
|That's going to be equal to the first number which was entered and added to the second number which was entered.
|-
|3:56
|Here we will say if it's a 'minus', then the variable 'total' - okay remember, the variable 'total' will only be set once for each case either plus or minus - so this total variable going to be number 1 - number 2 and the same for multiply and divide as well.
|-
|4:21
|Now this would do absolutely nothing. Refresh this. Now, if we enter this page, there is nothing, because we haven't called our function.
|-
|4:33
|Now to call our function, as you know, we will just say calc and put our values in.
|-
|4:40
|Let's us just give it two numbers say 10 and 10 and a 'plus' . Okay, so that will be 20. Now watch what happens if I refresh this. Nothing. Now why?
|-
|4:55
|The reason is that we haven't echoed this out. We've just set it as a variable.
|-
|5:01
|So what we would ideally do is we will echo what has been out put from calc. Now, at the moment this won't do anything if we do a refresh
|-
|5:11
|We have got nothing, because, there is no return output. So, in each case what we should say is 'return total'.
|-
|5:24
|What this does is - If you think of the function as a variable it sets the function's value as the total.
|-
|5:32
|As long as you say return whatever you say here the function will equal that.
|-
|5:39
|So we are going to say return total and we are going to copy that and paste it down for each case.
|-
|5:47
|Okay so obviously we don't need to do that for unknown operator. This is because, there is no operator to be found here.
|-
|5:58
|And we can refresh that.
|-
|6:00
|We still don't have anything. Guess why?
|-
|6:04
|The reason this is not working is because I've echoed this inside a function. That's a mistake.
|-
|6:10
|You can see the bracket of a function that starts here and ends here
|-
|6:15
|I'll place this underneath here, where it should be and then refresh it. It's 20 okay, we can see the 10 + 10 is 20 through our function
|-
|6:37
|So let's pick some different values, say, 13 and 7 and divide. Let's see what we get.
|-
|6:46
|Okay, we have got a quiet long decimal number. So you can see that this is quite good function that we have made. We have got our first number, our second number and an operator.
|-
|7:00
|And through a switch statement it detects which one and performs the relevant operation to it.
|-
|7:06
|An unknown operator error will be given if it can't be determined.
|-
|7:11
|So, for example let's take 'a' which is not a valid operator. As soon as we refresh it's going to unknown operator. This brings us to the end of the tutorial on advanced functions. We saw that we can input a value and then returned a value echoing out using a return command.
|-
|7:31
|This is Sidharth dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project. Thanks for watching.
|-

KTurtle/C3/Common-Errors-in-KTurtle/English-timed

2013-08-01T05:27:40Z

Sneha:

{|border =1
!Visual Cue
!Narration
|-
|| 00:01
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Common Errors''' in '''KTurtle.'''
|-
|| 00:07
||In this tutorial, we will learn about
|-
|| 00:10
|| '''Syntax errors'''

|-
|| 00:12
|| '''Runtime errors''' and

|-
|| 00:14
|| '''Logical errors'''
|-
|| 00:17
||To record this tutorial I am using,

|-
||00:20
|'''Ubuntu''' '''Linux''' OS version 12.04.

|-
|| 00:25
|'''KTurtle''' version. 0.8.1 beta.
|-
|| 00:31
||We assume that you have basic working knowledge of '''KTurtle'''

|-
|| 00:36
|If not, for relevant tutorials, please visit our website.

'''http://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|-
|| 00:42
||Let's first define, What is an error ?

|-
|| 00:46
|'''Error''' is a mistake in a program that produces an '''incorrect''' or '''unexpected''' result.
|-
||00:55
||First I will explain about '''"Types of errors".'''
|-
|| 01:00
|| '''Syntax error''' is a '''violation of grammatical rules''', of a '''programming language'''.

|-
|| 01:09
|'''Compilation''' fails when a program has '''syntax errors'''.

|-
|| 01:15
|'''Syntax errors''' are easy to find and fix.

|-
|| 01:22
|For Example:

|-
|| 01:23
|| '''Unmatched parentheses''', '''square ''' and '''curly braces'''.

|-
|| 01:29
|| Use of ''' variable''' that has not been '''declared'''.

|-
|| 01:34
|| Missing '''quotes''' in '''strings.'''
|-
|| 01:38
||Let's open a new '''KTurtle''' Application.

|-
|| 01:42
|Click on '''Dash home'''. In the Search bar, type '''KTurtle.'''

|-
|| 01:48
|Click on the '''KTurtle''' icon.
|-
||01:51
||Let's begin the tutorial with some types of''' syntax errors'''.
|-
||01:58
||I already have a program in a text editor.
|-
|| 02:02
||To explain the '''error''' in the program, I will comment part of the code.
|-
|| 02:09
||Here, I will comment the line

|-
|| 02:11
||'''$a=ask within double quotes "enter any number and click Ok"'''
|-
||02:19
||I will use '''hash(#)''' sign to comment the line.
|-
|| 02:23
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''Kturtle's''' Editor.

|-
|| 02:31
|Pause the tutorial here and type the program into your '''KTurtle''' editor

|-
|| 02:37
|Resume the tutorial after typing the program.
|-
|| 02:42
||Let's click on '''Run''' button to run the program

|-
|| 02:47
|'''Complier''' shows the following error,

|-
|| 02:50
|''' variable "$a" was used without first being assigned to a value.'''
|-
|| 02:57
||Here the error is in line number 4.

|-
||03:02
||This is a '''syntax error'''. It occured, as the variable 'a' was not declared.
|-
|| 03:10
||So I will go to line number 2, remove the comment.
|-
|| 03:14
|| I will copy the program from text Editor and paste it into''' KTurtle's editor'''.
|-
|| 03:23
||Let's click on '''Run''' button to run the program

|-
|| 03:27
|Enter '''6''' for '''a''' value and click OK

|-
|| 03:31
|Program runs without errors.
|-
|| 03:35
||I will clear the current program from '''KTurtle''' editor.

|-
|| 03:38
|Type '''clear''' command and '''Run''' to clean the canvas.
|-
||03:43
|| let's next look at another error.
|-
||03:46
||I already have a program in a text editor.
|-
|| 03:50
||Here the value of "'''pi'''" is '''predefined''' in KTurtle.
|-
|| 03:54
||Let's delete the "'''$'''" sign in the program.
|-
|| 03:58
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into ''' Kturtle's Editor'''

|-
|| 04:05
|Pause the tutorial here and type the program into your '''KTurtle editor'''

|-
|| 04:11
|Resume the tutorial after typing the program.
|-
|| 04:16
||Let's Click on '''Run''' button to run the program.

|-
|| 04:19
|'''Complier''' shows the following error,

|-
|| 04:22
|'''you cannot put “=” here'''
|-
|| 04:26
||This error is in line number 2.
|-
|| 04:30
||This is a '''syntax error''' it occured, as there is no '''container of variable.'''
|-
|| 04:37
||Let's go back to the program replace the $ sign.
|-
|| 04:41
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''KTurtle's''' Editor
|-
||04:49
||let's click on '''Run''' button to run the program.

|-
|| 04:53
|Enter '''45''' for angle value and click '''OK'''

|-
|| 04:57
|Program runs without errors.
|-
|| 05:00
||Let's remove one of the quotes of the string.
|-
||05:05
|| I will Copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''KTurtle's ''' Editor
|-
|| 05:12
||Click on '''Run''' button to run the program

|-
|| 05:15
|'''Complier''' shows the following error,

|-
|| 05:18
|'''Text string was not properly closed, expected a double quote “ ” to close the string.'''
|-
|| 05:25
||Here the error is in line number 2.
|-
||05:29
|| I will go back to line number 2 and replace the quotes.
|-
|| 05:34
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into''' Kturtle's''' Editor
|-
|| 05:41
||Click on '''Run''' button to run the program

|-
|| 05:44
||Enter '''45''' for angle value and click OK.

|-
|| 05:49
|Program runs without errors.

|-
|| 05:52
|This way you can find the line at which error has occured, and also correct it.
|-
||05:59
||Let's now learn about runtime errors.
|-
|| 06:04
||'''Run-time error''' occurs during the '''execution''' of a program.

|-
|| 06:10
|It may '''crash''' the program when you run it.

|-
|| 06:15
|'''Runtime errors''' are commonly due to wrong input from the user.

|-
|| 06:23
|'''Compiler''' cannnot find these '''errors'''.

|-
|| 06:27
|For example:
|-
|| 06:29
|Trying to divide by a '''variable''' that contains no value.

|-
|| 06:3
| Run a loop without a '''terminating condition''' or '''increment value'''.
|-
||06:43
||I will clear the current program from the editor.

|-
|| 06:47
|Type '''clear''' command and '''Run''' to clean the canvas.
|-
|| 06:52
||I already have a program in a text editor.

|-
|| 06:56
|This program '''divides''' two numbers.

|-
|| 07:00
|'a' is''' dividend''' and 'r' is '''divisor'''.
|-
||07:04
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''KTurtle's''' Editor.

|-
|| 07:11
|Pause the tutorial and type the program into your '''KTurtle''' editor

|-
|| 07:16
|Resume the tutorial after typing the program.
|-
|| 07:20
||Let us click on '''Run''' button to run the program.

|-
|| 07:24
|let's enter '''5''' for 'a' and click OK

|-
|| 07:29
|enter '''0''' for 'r' and click OK

|-
|| 07:33
|Here we get a ''' runtime error''' ,

|-
|| 07:36
|“'''you tried to divide by zero'''”
|-
|| 07:39
||This error is in line number 4.
|-
|| 07:43
||This error occurs as we cannot '''divide''' a number with''' zero'''.
|-
|| 07:49
||Let us run again.

|-
|| 07:51
|Enter '''5''' for '''a''' and click OK

|-
|| 07:54
|enter '''2''' for 'r' and click OK

|-
|| 07:58
|Program without errors.
|-
|| 08:01
||I will clear the current program from '''KTurtle''' editor.

|-
|| 08:05
|Type '''clear''' command and '''Run''' to clean the canvas.
|-
||08:10
||Next we will learn about ''' logical errors'''.
|-
|| 08:14
||'''Logical error''' is a mistake in a program's '''source code''' that results in '''incorrect''' or '''unexpected''' behavior.

|-
|| 08:26
|For example,

|-
|| 08:28
|'''Assigning''' a value to the wrong variable.

|-
|| 08:32
|'''Multiplying''' two numbers instead of '''adding'''.
|-
||08:36
||I already have a program in a text editor.
|-
|| 08:39
||I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''Kturtle's''' Editor

|-
|| 08:47
|Pause the tutorial here and type the program into your '''KTurtle''' editor

|-
|| 08:52
|Resume the tutorial after typing the program.
|-
|| 08:57
||Now click on the '''Run''' button to run the program.

|-
|| 09:01
||A dialog box pops-up, let's click OK.

|-
|| 09:05
||Loop goes into an '''infinite loop'''.
|-
|| 09:08
||We see that '''“while”''' loop prints numbers from 31 and is still printing.

|-
|| 09:15
||This is a '''logical error'''.

|-
|| 09:18
||In the “while” condition x is greater than 20,

|-
|| 09:23
||but the '''variable''' x is always greater than 20

|-
|| 09:28
||So, the loop never '''terminates.'''
|-
|| 09:31
||I will click on '''Abort''' button to abort the process.
|-
|| 09:36
||Let's change $x=$x+1 to $x=$x-1.
|-
||09:44
|| I will copy the program from text editor and paste it into '''KTurtle's''' editor.
|-
|| 09:51
||Let's click on '''Run''' button to run the program.

|-
|| 09:55
||A dialog box pop-up. Let us click OK.

|-
|| 09:59
||Loop '''terminates''' after printing the values from''' 29 to 20.'''
|-
||10:05
||With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
|| 10:10
||Let us summarise.
|-
|| 10:12
||In this tutorial we have learnt, errors and types of errors such as

|-
|| 10:18
| Use of '''variable''' that has not been declared.

|-
|| 10:23
|Missing '''quotes''' in strings.

|-
|| 10:27
|''' Runtime errors''' and

|-
|| 10:30
|| '''Logical errors'''
|-
|| 10:3
||As an assignment I would like you to find errors in the given programs

|-
||10:46
||Watch the video available at this URl: http://spoken-tutorial.org/What is a Spoken Tutorial
|-
|| 10:50
|It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project
|-
|| 10:54
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it
|-
||10:59
||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team :

|-
|| 11:01
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials
|-
|| 11:05
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test
|-
|| 11:09
|For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org
|-
|| 11: 17
||Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
|| 11:23
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
||11:31
||More information on this Mission is available at this link http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro ]

|-
||11:37
||This is Madhuri Ganpathi from IIT Bombay.Signing off
|-
||11:41
||Thank you for joining

KTurtle/C3/Common-Errors-in-KTurtle/English-timed

2013-08-01T05:26:15Z

Sneha:

Java/C2/Relational-Operations/English-timed

2013-07-29T11:34:00Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Relational Operators in Java'''.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial, we will learn about the

|-
| 00:09
| '''the boolean data type'''
|-
| 00:10
| '''Relational operators '''and
|-
| 00:12
| how to '''compare data '''using '''Relational operators.'''

|-
| 00:17
| For this tutorial we are using

'''Ubuntu 11.10''',

'''JDK 1.6''' and

'''Eclipse 3.7'''

|-
| 00:26
| To follow this tutorial, you must have knowledge of '''data types '''in''' Java'''

|-
| 00:31
| If not, for relevant tutorials, please visit our website as shown.

|-
| 00:39
| Relational operators are used to check for conditions.

|-
| 00:43

| Their output is a variable of boolean data type

|-
| 00:48
| A boolean data type is of size 1 bit

|-
| 00:51
| It stores only two values.

|-
| 00:54
| '''True '''or '''False. '''

|-
| 00:56
| '''True''' is the output when the condition is true.

|-
| 00:59
| '''False''' is the output if the condition is not true.

|-
| 01:06
| Here is a list of the Relational operators available.

|-
| 01:10
| * greater than
|-
| 01:12
| * less than
|-
| 01:13
| * equal to
|-
| 00:14
| * greater than or equal to
|-
| 01:15
| * less than or equal to
|-
| 01:17
| * not equal to

|-
| 01:19
| We shall look into each of them in detail.

|-
|01:22
| Switch to Eclipse.

|-
|01:27
| Here we have the '''Eclipse IDE '''and the skeleton required for the rest of the code.

|-
| 01:33
| I have created a class '''BooleanDemo''' and added the '''Main''' method.

|-
| 01:38
| Now let us add some expressions.

|-
| 01:41
| Type '''boolean b ; '''

|-
| 01:47
| The keyword '''boolean''' declares the data type of the variable '''b''' as '''boolean.'''

|-
| 01:53
| We shall store the result of our condition in b.

|-
| 01:5
| We shall define a variable weight and check for a condition using that variable.

|-
| 02:05
| '''int weight '''''equal to '''''45;'''

|-
| 02:13
| We shall check if the value in weight is greater than '''40.'''

|-
| 02:18
| '''b '''''equal to '''''weight '''''greater than '''''40;'''

|-
| 02:28
| This statement says check if the value of variable is greater than 40 and store the result in b;

|-
| 02:37
| Now Let us print the value of b.

|-
| 02:41
| '''System '''''dot '''''out '''''dot '''''println(b);'''

|-
| 02:49
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''.

|-
| 02:59
| As we can see, the output is '''True'''.

|-
| 03:02
| Let us see what happens if the value is less than 40.

|-
| 03:07
| Change weight to 30.

|-
| 03:12
| Save and run

|-
| 03:20
| We can see that the output is False as expected.

|-
| 03:24
| This way, the''''' '''greater than'' symbol is used to check if one value is ''greater than'' the other.

|-
| 03:30
| Similarly, ''less than'' symbol is used to check if one value is'' less than ''the other.

|-
| 03:37
| let us change the''greater than'' to ''less than symbol.''

|-
| 03:43
| So We are checking if the value of '''weight''' is less than '''40'''.

|-
| 03:48
| '''Save''' '''Run'''

|-
| 03:56
| As we can see, the output is '''True '''as expected.

|-
| 04:01
| Let us change the value of weight to 45 and see the output.

|-
| 04:09
| Save and Run.

|-
| 04:16
| We see that we get a False because the condition,

|-
| 04:21
| '''weight''''' less than '''''40''' is not true.

|-
| 04:25
| Now let us see how to check if a value is equal to another.

|-
| 04:31
| To do that, we use '''two equal to symbols.'''

|-
| 04:35
| change ''less than ''symbol'' ''to ''double equal to.''

|-
| 04:41
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''

|-
| 04:48
| As we can see, the output is '''False '''because the value of weight is not equal to 40'''.'''

|-
| 04:55
| Now let us change the weight to 40 and see the output.

|-
| 05:01
| Save and Run.

|-
| 05:08
| As we can see, the output is True

|-
| 05:12
| This way, Double equal to is used for checking equality.

|-
| 05:16
| Please be careful because, often people use a '''single equal to''' symbol for checking equality.

|-
| 05:22
| And this gives unnecessary errors.

|-
| 05:26
| Next we'll see how to check for '''less than or equal to.'''

|-
| 05:30
| To do that, we will use a '''less than''' symbol followed by an '''equal to''' symbol.

|-
| 05:35
| change the double equal to to less than equal to.

|-
| 05:42
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''.

|-
| 05:50
| the output is '''True''' as expected.

|-
| 05:53
| Now let us change the value of weight to see if the '''less than''' check is performed.

|-
| 05:59
| Change '''40''' to '''30.'''

|-
| 06:04
| '''Save''' and '''Run.'''

|-
| 06:14
| We see, that although the weight is not equal to 40 we get the output as '''True''' because it is less than 40.

|-
| 06:22
| Let us see what happens if the value of weight is greater than 40.

|-
| 06:274
| Let say 50. Save and Run.

|-
| 06:39
|As we can see, the output is False because the value of weight is not equal to 40.

|-
| 06:44
| And it also not less than 40.

|-
| 06:48
| Similarly we use a greater than symbol followed by an equal to symbol for checking '''greater than''' or''' equal to'''.

|-
| 06:55
| Let us try it.

|-
| 06:57
| Change ''less than equal to'' to ''greater than equal to''

|-
| 07:04
| Save and Run.

|-
| 07:10
| As we can see, the output is '''true '''because '''weight''' is greater than '''40'''

|-
| 07: 16
| Let us change weight to a value less than 40. Lets say 30.

|-
| 07:25
| Save and Run.

|-
| 07:32
| We get a false because the value of weight is not greater than 40 and also not equal to 40.

|-
| 07:39
| Next, we’ll see how to check for '''not equal to'''

|-
| 07:46
| It is done by using an '''exclamation mark''' followed by an '''equal to''' symbol.

|-
| 07:53
| Change ''greater than'' to ''exclamation ''

|-
| 07:59
| So this statement says check if the value of '''weight''' is not equal to '''40''' and store the result in '''b'''

|-
| 08:08
| '''Save''' and '''Run'''

|-
| 08:16
| As we can see, the output is '''true''' because the values of weight is not equal to 40.

|-
| 08:23
| Let us change the weight to 40 and see the output.

|-
| 08:28
| Change 30to 40.

|-
| 08:31
| Save. Run.

|-
| 08:38
| We get a '''false''' because the condition weight not equal to 40 is false.

|-
| 08:45
| The not equal to condition can be thought of as opposite of equal to condition.

|-
| 08:50
| This is how we use the various relational operators to compare data in Java.

|-
| 08:58
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 09:01
| In this tutorial we have learnt, about the boolean data type

|-
| 09:06
| The relational operators and

|-
| 09:08
| how to use '''relational operators''' to '''compare''' two values

|-
| 09:13
| As an assignment for this tutorial, find out if the two expressions shown are equivalent?

|-
| 09:23
| To know more about the '''Spoken Tutorial''' project,

|-
| 09:23
| * Watch the video available at[http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial ]

|-
| 09:28
| * It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 09:31
| * If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 09:36
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team,

|-
| 09:38
| Conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials'''.

|-
| 09:40
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test. For more details, please write to '''contact AT spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org.'''

|-
| 09: 50
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is a part of the '''Talk to a Teacher''' project.

|-
| 09:54
| It is supported by the '''National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India. '''

|-
| 10:00
| More information on this Mission is available at '''spoken HYPHEN tutorial DOT org SLASH NMEICT HYPHEN Intro'''

|-
| 10:05
| This tutorial has been contributed by '''TalentSprint'''. Thanks for joining.

|}

PHP-and-MySQL/C2/XAMPP-in-Windows/English-timed

2013-07-29T10:13:31Z

Sneha:

{|Border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|0:01
|Hello and welcome to PHP Academy.
|-
|0:04
|I’m Alex and in this first basic tutorial, I’m going to take you through installing your webserver, installing PHP which comes with the package we’re going to use and also mysql, which also comes with this package and they are going to be use it.
|-
|0:22
|We’re going to use something called XAMPP. You can also call it "ZAMP" as that's how it’s supposed to be pronounced – however, I’ll just refer to it as XAMPP.
|-
|0:34
|What you need to do is - to get your server up and running with your PHP installation and your mysql database, you’ll need to visit this website here.
|-
|0:46
|Go to "apachefriends.org" or just google for "XAMPP".
|-
|0:52
|It’s spelled like this here: X-A-M and double P.
|-
|00:58
|And, I’ll just show you how to install it for Window, how to get everything up and running for Windows installation.
|-
|01:06
|If you need any other help on, say Linux or any other Operating System, just let me know and I’ll be happy to make a tutorial.
|-
|01:15
|So, we’ve come to the website and we need to choose this Installer here.
|-
|01:19
|That will bring up this page and eventually you’ll end up with a file downloaded it like this one, with a version number.
|-
|01:29
|First choose the Installer for that.
|-
|01:32
|To install just double-click and run and choose your language.
|-
|01:37
|You make get this message – I’m using Windows Vista, so it’s says that "Windows Vista Account is deactivated on your system".
|-
|01:46
|This isn’t necessary for what we’re using. So ignore that if you do get that.
|-
|01:52
|And you can just go ahead with your installation here.
|-
|01:56
|Make sure you choose your own local drive with a folder to keep things simple. Don’t bother putting it in Program Files.
|-
|02:04
|These options really are up to you. I'll check the "Create a XAMPP desktop option". But I’ll not choose this one.
|-
|02:16
|Now what you need to do is to choose to "Install Apache as a service" and "Install MySQL as a service".
|-
|02:24
|This will add it as a Systems Service and it will run every time you run your computer.
|-
|02:31
|You’re welcome to keep these unchecked; I keep them checked for easy use.
|-
|02:36
|And this is just going to install now. Now what I’ll do is leave that at that, I’ll pause the video and return when everything is installed.
|-
|02:47
|Then I will take you through the rest of the setting up of your PHP installation.
|-
|02:53
|Please note that before we install this, if I have a blank browser up here, and I try to acess localhost...
|-
|03:00
|This is the local webserver's host.
|-
|03:05
|Usually you have a web address like "google dot com" but we are addressing this as "localhost".
|-
|03:12
|You can see that we get a "Failed to connect" error message here.
|-
|3:17
|But when we have installed Xampp and we choose this localhost option again, we will, in fact, connect straight to our server.
|-
|3:26
|Xampp makes easy for us to install Apache, which is http webserver and it will install php module on top of that and then install mysql database on the server.
|-
|3:40
|So when we come back to this after we have installed, running our localhost should work.
|-
|3:46
|And I'll also show you how to put files into your localhost directory.
|-
|3:52
|Its not called localhost but this is how we address our root server on our webserver, a root folder, sorry, on our webserver.
|-
|4:01
|So when that's finished installing, I will come back to the video and we can go ahead.
|-
|4:06
|Okay, so we have finished installing and we have a few messages that just came up.
|-
|4:11
|Just go ahead and click "Finish".
|-
|4:14
|You can see here that what we are checking for necessary ports.
|-
|4:23
|This means that it is checking port 80 and I think mysql....
|-
|4:27
|However, as long as you have no errors here, then you are absolutely fine.
|-
|4:32
|You can see you're being set up with Apache 2.2 here.
|-
|4:36
|And it looks as if the service is starting and also the mysql service is starting.
|-
|4:42
|And we get a message... saying that our installation is finished.
|-
|4:46
|Now we can start the XAMP control panel. You click "Yes" and we can bring that over here.
|-
|4:52
|You can see that we've got our Apache server running and our Mysql server running.
|-
|4:58
|The reason you don't see PHP here is because PHP is part of our webserver and so part of Apache. Its installed as a separate module and not run as a service. Its more of a module addition to our webserver.
|-
|5:14
|So, lets go and load our page back over here.
|-
|5:17
|And you can see that by pressing Enter on "localhost" again, we've connected to "XAMPP", as you'll expect.
|-
|5:25
|We can have a look inside a particular directory in our webserver as we usually would.
|-
|5:30
|For now just go ahead and click English.
|-
|5:33
|And you can see that you have "XAMPP" set-up here.
|-
|5:37
|Ok, now I'm going to open my "C" drive here and you can see it inside here.
|-
|5:42
|And I'll click on "XAMPP" which is the installation directory we have installed.
|-
|5:49
|We've got a few files here but the main one to focus is "htdocs". This is where you will put your files that are to be run by your webserver and processed in php.
|-
|6:02
|So if you double-click on this, you can see that we've got a variety of files here.
|-
|6:07
|And this "index.html" is the file that you can see here. This is "index.php" for now, which is here.
|-
|6:15
|And index dot anything in this file that's automatically started up.
|-
|6:20
|You can change this but just leave it as that for now.
|-
|6:25
|And.... I've got a folder here called "phpacademy".
|-
|6:29
|What I'll do is create a new text document.... in fact, I will do this in my context editor as its a lot easier.
|-
|6:38
|Lets get rid of this. Okay so I'll create a new file.
|-
|6:44
|I'll save that and that's saved to.... my "htdocs" folder here and I'll just save it as "phpinfo" and dot php.
|-
|6:53
|And inside here I'll type some php code.
|-
|6:59
|And this will be "php underscore info" and you need 2 brackets then you need a line terminator.
|-
|7:06
|If you don't understand what this means, you don't need to learn it. Its not a standard thing that you need to know for everyday use.
|-
|7:14
|This is just giving us some information of our PHP server or our webserver php installation.
|-
|7:20
|So we can come back to this and here we'll just address this, so you need "localhost".
|-
|7:26
|And you don't need to type "htdocs" or anything like that.
|-
|7:29
|All we need is "localhost" and we need to type in.... lets see....... what do we call our file - "phpinfo dot php". Press Enter.
|-
|7:42
|We don't need the underscore. So take away that and you need to refresh.
|-
|7:50
|You can see that we've got our php information file here with lots of data.
|-
|7:55
|So what is happening here is we are running a php script inside our htdocs file.
|-
|8:01
|So if I were to say address "favicon dot ico", you can see that we are getting that.
|-
|8:10
|Any files that you put inside "htdocs" are processed by your webserver through php.
|-
|8:18
|Any files that you write in the tutorials I have up here, just put them in "htdocs" folder in "c : \ xampp and htdocs" and anything in there will be processed.
|-
|8:34
|And you can address it either through localhost or 127.0.0.1. Pressing Enter you can see that nothing has changed. This is the same. This is just your local webserver.

|-
|8:50
|We have installed "XAMPP", which is an easy way, short-cut way of installing your "Apache" service and your "mysql" service which is your database service you will use later on and also the "php module" for "Apache" which lets you process php files; obviously, that's very useful.
|-
|9:10
|We've downloaded and installed "XAMPP" and I've shown you how to create a file and run this through your webserver.
|-
|9:16
|So hopefully this will be of use for you to start with the tutorials. If you have any problems feel free to contact me.
|-
|9:23
|Please subscribe and I'll see you in the tutorials to come. Thanks for watching!
|-
|9:26
|This is Joshua Mathew dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial project. (Script contributed by Bhavini Pant and Nancy Varkey).

LibreOffice-Suite-Draw/C2/Introduction/English-timed

2013-07-29T07:27:53Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| Time
|| Narration

|-
||00.01
||Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on Introduction to LibreOffice Draw.

|-
||00.06
||In this tutorial, we will learn about LibreOffice Draw and LibreOffice Draw Workspace.

|-
||00.13
||And the context menu.

|-
||00.15
||We will also learn how to: Create, save, close and open a Draw file, Enable toolbars, Set up the Draw page,

|-
||00.25
||And insert basic shapes.

|-
||00.28
||If you do not have LibreOffice Suite installed, Draw can be installed by using Synaptic Package Manager.

|-
||00.35
||For more information on Synaptic Package Manager, please refer to the Ubuntu Linux Tutorials on this website.

|-
||00.43
||And download LibreOffice Suite by following the instructions on this website.

|-
||00.48
||Detailed instruction are available in the first tutorial of Libre office suit.

|-
||00.54
||Remember, when installing, use the 'Complete' option to install 'Draw '.

|-
||00.59
||LibreOffice Draw is a vector-based graphics software.

|-
||01.03
||It allows you to create a wide range of vector graphics.

|-
||01.08
||There are two major types of graphics – vector-based graphics and bitmaps.

|-
||01.13
||Vector graphics are created and edited using LibreOffice Draw.

|-
||01.18
||The other is bitmap or the raster image.

|-
||01.21
||Popular bitmap formats are BMP, JPG, JPEG and PNG.

|-
||01.30
||Let us understand the difference between the two types, by comparing the image formats.

|-
||01.35
||The picture on the left is a vector graphic.

|-
||01.38
||The one on the right is a bitmap.

|-
||01.41
||Notice what happens when the pictures are enlarged.

|-
||01.45
||The vector graphic is clear; the bitmap image becomes blurred.

|-
||01.51
||Vector-based graphics software stores images using lines and curves as mathematical formulae.

|-
||01.58
||Therefore, when the images are resized, the picture quality is unaffected.

|-
||02.04
||A bitmap uses pixels or a series of very small dots of colors in a grid or a square.

|-
||02.11
||Can you see the small squares as we enlarge the picture?

|-
||02.15
||These are the grids.

|-
||02.17
||The small dots make up the color in each grid.

|-
||02.20
||You may have noticed one other difference - bitmaps are rectangular in shape.

|-
||02.26
||Vector graphics, however, can be in any shape.

|-
||02.30
||Now that we know about vector graphics, let us learn how to create them using Draw.

|-
||02.36
||Here we are using Ubuntu Linux version 10.04 as our operating system and LibreOffice Suite version 3.3.4.

|-
||02.46
||To open a new Draw file, click on the Applications option at the top left corner of the screen.

|-
||02.54
||And then click on Office and then on LibreOffice.

|-
||02.59
||A dialog box opens up with various LibreOffice components.

|-
||03.03
||Click on Drawing .

|-
||03.05
||This will open an empty Draw file.

|-
||03.09
||Let’s name our Draw file and save it.

|-
||03.12
||Click on File in the Main menu and choose the “Save as” option.

|-
||03.18
||The “Save as” dialog box is displayed.

|-
||03.21
||Let us type the name “WaterCycle” in the field File Name.

|-
||03.26
||Its a good practice to assign a name that is relevant to the drawing.

|-
||03.31
||The default file type for Draw files is the dot odg format (.odg).

|-
||03.37
||Using the Browse folders field, let us save this file on the Desktop.

|-
||03.42
||Click on Save.

|-
||03.44
||The file is saved as “WaterCycle”.

|-
||03.47
||The Draw file with the file name and the extension is displayed in the Title bar.

|-
||03.53
||We will learn how to create a picture of the water cycle as shown in this slide.

|-
||03.59
||We shall complete this picture in stages.

|-
||04.02
||Each basic level tutorial will demonstrate how you can create different elements of this picture.

|-
||04.09
||At the end of the basic level of Draw tutorials, you will also be able to create a similar diagram by yourself.

|-
||04.17
||First let us familiarize ourselves with the Draw workspace or the Draw window.

|-
||04.23
||The Main menu lists all the options that we can use in Draw.

|-
||04.27
||The Pages panel on the left displays all the pages in the Draw file.

|-
||04.32
||The space where we create graphics is called a Page.

|-
||04.37
||There are three layers in each page.

|-
||04.39
||They are the Layout, Controls and Dimensions Lines.

|-
||04.44
||The Layout layer is displayed by default.

|-
||04.47
||This is where we create most of our graphics.

|-
||04.51
||We will work only with the Layout Layer.

|-
|| 04.54
||Let us now explore the various toolbars available in LibreOffice Draw.

|-
||04.59
||To view the toolbars available in Draw, go to the Main menu and click on View and then on Toolbars.

|-
||05.07
||You will see a list of all the available tools.

|-
||05.11
||There is a check mark to the left of certain toolbars.

|-
||05.15
||This means the toolbar is enabled and is visible in the Draw window.

|-
||05.20
||The option “Standard” has a check.

|-
||05.23
||You can see the Standard toolbar on the window.

|-
||05.27
||Let us now uncheck the “Standard” toolbar by clicking on it.

|-
||05.32
||You see the Standard toolbar is no longer visible.

|-
||05.36
||Let’s make it visible again.

|-
||05.39
||Similarly, you can enable and disable the other toolbars, too.

|-
||05.44
||Before we draw the basic shapes for the water cycle diagram, let us set the page to Landscape view.

|-
||05.51
||To do this, right-click on the page and choose the Page option.

|-
||05.56
||Various sub-options are displayed.

|-
||05.59
||Click Page Setup option.

|-
||06.02
||The Page Setup dialog box is displayed.

|-
||06.06
||Under Page Format, we can see the Format field.

|-
||06.10
||Here we will choose A4 as this is the most common paper size used for printing.

|-
||06.17
||When you select the format, the Width and Height fields are automatically filled with the default values.

|-
||06.25
||Under the Orientation option, let us select Landscape.

|-
||06.29
||To the right of the Paper format fields, you will see a tiny preview of the Draw page.

|-
||06.36
||Click on OK.

|-
||06.38
||Let us begin by drawing the sun.

|-
||06.41
||On the drawing toolbar, click on the small black triangle next to “Basic Shapes”.

|-
||06.47
||Click on Circle.

|-
||06.49
||Now bring the cursor to the page >> Hold the left mouse button and Drag.

|-
||06.56
||A circle is drawn on the page.

|-
||06.59
||Now, let us draw a cloud next to the sun.

|-
||07.03
||To do this, go to the drawing toolbar and select the “Symbol Shapes”.

|-
||07.08
||Click on the small black triangle next to” Symbol Shapes” and select the “Cloud”.

|-
||07.14
||On the draw page, place the cursor next to the sun.

|-
||07.18
||Hold the left mouse button and drag.

|-
||07.21
||You have drawn a cloud!

|-
||07.23
||Next let us draw a mountain.

|-
||07.25
||We shall select “Basic shapes” again and click on “Isosceles triangle”.

|-
||07.30
||We shall insert a triangle in the Draw page, as we did before.

|-
||07.35
||Now, we have inserted three shapes.

|-
|| 07.38
||Remember to save your file every time you make a change.

|-
||07.42
||Press the CTRL+S keys together to do this.

|-
||07.48
||You can also set a time interval to save the changes automatically.

|-
||07.53
||To do this: Go to the Main menu and select “Tools”.

|-
||07.57
||Under “Tools”, click on “Options”.

|-
||08.00
||The “Options” dialog box appears.

|-
||08.03
||Click on the plus sign next to “Load/Save”next on Click “General” >> From the check boxes on the right >>

|-
||08.11
||Check the box” Save Auto recovery information every “and type “2”.

|-
||08.17
||This means that the file will automatically be saved once every two minutes.

|-
||08.22
||Click OK.

|-
||08.24
||Let us now close this file by clicking on” File” >> “Close”.

|-
||08.29
||To open an existing Draw file, click on the “File” menu in the menu bar at the top and then click on the “Open” option.

|-
||08.38
||A dialog box appears on the screen.

|-
||08.41
||Here find the folder where you saved your document.

|-
||08.46
||Select the file you want to open and click “Open”.

|-
||08.51
||Here is an assignment for you.

|-
||08.53
||Create a new draw file and save it as “MyWaterCycle”.

|-
||08.57
||Set the page orientation to Portrait.

|-
||09.00
||Insert a cloud, a star and a circle.

|-
||09.04
||Now change the page orientation to Landscape.

|-
||09.07
||See how the placements of the figures change.

|-
||09.11
||This brings us to the end of this tutorial on Introduction to LibreOffice Draw.

|-
|| 09.16
|| In this tutorial, we learnt about

|-
|| 09.19
||LbreOffice Draw,

|-
|| 09.21
||The LibreOffice Draw Workspace and

|-
|| 09.23
||And the context menu.

|-
|| 09.25
||We also learnt to:

|-
|| 09.27
||Create, save, close and open a Draw file

|-
||09.31
||Enable toolbars

|-
||09.33
||Set up the Draw page and

|-
||09.35
||Insert basic shapes

|-
||09.38
||Watch the video available at the following link

|-
||09.42
||It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
||09.45
||If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
||09.49
||The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
||09.52
||Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
||09.55
||Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
||09.59
||For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
||10.05
||Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
||10.09
||It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
||10.17
||More information on this Mission is available at http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro

|-
||10.28
||This tutorial has been contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. Thanks for joining

Digital-Divide/D0/How-to-buy-the-train-ticket/English-timed

2013-07-26T11:18:47Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 || ''Time'' || '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''online train booking''' |- |00:05 |My name is Kannan Moudgalya. |- |00:08 |In this tut…'

{| border=1
|| ''Time''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|00:01
|Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''online train booking'''
|-
|00:05
|My name is Kannan Moudgalya.
|-
|00:08
|In this tutorial we will learn '''How to choose a ticket at irctc'''.
|-
|00:13
|To select the sector to travel . To select the train and the class of travel.
|-
|00:19
|To enter user information and to decide E-ticket or I-ticket.
|-
|00:24
| I will also demonstrate the first time use of a debit card and how to use this to purchase the ticket online.
|-
|00:32
|What is needed to buy a ticket , Any one of the following for payment;
|-
|00:36
|Your bank account with an ATM card
|-
|00:39
|Your bank account with online transaction capability,
|-
|00:43
|Your credit card and of course the computer with internet connection
|-
|00:48
|The method i will choose is the following ;
|-
|00:50
|I have an ICICI ATM card it is also a visa debit card .
|-
|00:56
| So let us buy a ticket now.
|-
|00:59
|The username i will type kannan underscore Mou, Password i login here.
|-
|01:12
|Suppose i want to go from Mumbai . So the moment i type 4 characters it suggest so i want to choose mumbai central '''SURA '''let me type 4 characters and wait for it.
|-
|01:26
|So actually i want to go to Surat.
|-
|01:28
|Notice the station code BCT is for Bombay Central and ST is for Surat.
|-
|01:35
|In the future i can type BCT and ST directly for e.g we delete this and type BCT leave this as it is.
|-
|01:47
|Date let me choose 23rd December , Let me choose the remaining as they are E-ticket and general.
|-
|01:55
| I will talk about E-ticket or I-ticket and what are the option;
|-
|01:59
|What are the differnces i will explain later;
|-
|02:02
|Let me find the place, Train name slide to the right and see that .
|-
|02:08
|I have got lots of train. Let me make the font size likely smaller.
|-
|02:11
| So that we can see all of them,
|-
|02:15
| Suppose i want to go by this train number'''12935'''.
|-
|02:19
| So let me check if i have tickets available under second sitting to '''s''''
|-
|02:24
|Let me scrolldown a little bit it immiediately says that it is wait listed.
|-
|02:29
|It doesn't matter even if it is Wait listed. I want to book it.
|-
|02:34
| So let me click this i get the message '''The From station that i have selected does not exist on the route choose one of these'''.
|-
|02:44
| So lets suppose that i want to choose ''' Bandra Terminus'''. Let me go and book it
|-
|02:57
|My name Kannan Moudgalya, Age-53, Male, Berth preference – suppose i choose Window seat.
|-
|03:12
|So it gives us button senior citizen and i get the message ''' That passengers age should be 60 years or more i say okay.
|-
|03:22
| And if i am female senior citizen then it says that passengers age should be 58 years or more.
|-
|03:31
|So for female it is 58 and for men it is 60 to be considered as senior citizens.
|-
|03:39
|For a senor citizen their are discount . So let me go back to male, '''window seat'''.
|-
|03;45
| Let me not worry about all this i just have to enter this image'''E37745A'''.
|-
|03:58
|LEt me press '''go''' . It gives the details ok and says the total amount is 99.
|-
|04:11
|Now i have to make payment , LEt me click this I can have any of this parts ,
|-
|04:22
| I can have a credit card i can use the net banking facilities, I can use debit card ,cash card and so on.
|-
|04:29
| In order to make it accessible to most people , i am going to demonstrate the use of debit card .
|-
|04:38
| I need to choose one of these, unfortunately the card that i have namely ICICI bank card is not here.
|-
|04:46
| But it says that for any other card not listed here if it happens to be '''visa or master debit card'''.
|-
|04:53
| Click here. So let me click here and i get the the message that '''the following banks visa / master debit cards can be used to make online transaction as on date'''.
|-
|05:09
| So ICICI bank is listed. SO let me close this , so let me choose one of these.
|-
|05:16
| i will choose this '''visa master''', So card type is '''Visa'''.
|-
|05:23
| I am not going to show the number of the ATM card that i have.

|-
|05:27
| You have to Enter the '''16 digit number''' that comes on your debit card and then '''credit card expiry date''' and then''' CVV number'''.
|-
|05:39
| Which is the three digit number last three digits at the back of your card.
|-
|05:44
| Next is your '''signature''' , After entering this information i have to press the '''buy''' button.
|-
|05:52
| Let me do that now. I get the following messsage from ICICI bank.
|-
|05:57
| I need to enter the''' validity date , Date Of Birth and then my ATM pin number'''.
|-
|06:04
| To register this card for online transaction.
|-
|06:09
| LEt me make it bigger so that you can see what this is.
|-
|06:14
| I will enter all this but i want to show you , the moment i do that i get the message given here.
|-
|06:26
| I am entering a 6 digit number now, I have to choose it properly it should be easy for me to remember and not so easy for others.
|-
|06:36
| I have to type it twice. This is to ensure that i created the password correctly .This will prevent typing mistakes.
|-
|06:45
| Remember you have to create this password only once. from now on you will use this password with your debit card to confirm it let me ''' submit''' .
|-
|07:00
| I will get the message ''' Comgratulations!the ticket has been booked.'''
|-
|07:06
| Note that all the information about the ticket are also given including the PNR number.
|-
|07:13
| Which we will have to follow up to see whether our wait listed ticket is confirmed before we begin the journey.
|-
|07:21
| We are now looking at the automated email sent by IRCTC the ticket details are here.
|-
|07:29
| We can take a print out if you wish let us go back to the slides.
|-
|07:36
| I have come back to the slides what to do next?
|-
|07:39
| You can take a print out of the ticket .
|-
|07:42
| Wait listed ticket has to get confirmed before you travel.
|-
|07:47
| The print out taken while wait listed is good enough.
|-
|07:51
| You don't have to print it again.
|-
|07:53
| If the ticket is already confirmed their are no difficulties.
|-
|07:58
| How general is the procedure that i have shown in this tutorial.
|-
|08:03
| There could be minor variations in different ATM cards.
|-
|08:07
| The method is similar for '''credit card''',''' online bank transaction''' is similar.
|-
|08:14
| But the overall procedure is identical in all the methods .
|-
|08:20
| To enter card on account information
|-
|08:23
| To enter the pasword some need a temporary code.sent to your mobile phone.
|-
|08:31
| The next question is should one buy '''E-ticket or I-ticket'''.
|-
|08:36
| First we will begin with E-ticket one can buy this at the last minute also.
|-
|08:41
| One needs a printer or a smart phone however no worry about losing it.
|-
|08:48
| If you lose it, we can always another print out.
|-
|08:51
| You need''' identity proof''' at the time of travel however,
|-
|08:55
|In case of I-Ticket it will be sent by a''' courier''' of course you have to pay for this about Rs-50.
|-
|09:03
| You should have 2-3 days for postal delivery The delivery is not available for all towns and villages.
|-
|09:11
| The cancellation can be done at ticket counters only.
|-
|09:15
| OF course you don't need an''' identity proof''' if you travel with an I-ticket.
|-
|09:21
| What is an identity proof ?
|-
|09:22
| Any government issued card with photo it could be an;
|-
|09:26
| Pan card
|-
|09:27
| Election card
|-
|09:28
| Driving license
|-
|09:29
| or a passport it could be any of these .
|-
|09:33
| I have now opened a website. That explains it, one of these with your photograph has to be carry.
|-
|09:41
| Let us go back to the slides, There are concessional rates available.
|-
|09:46
| The list inside is given here. let us visit this site now.
|-
|09:55
| I have return to the slides, Senior citizens gets about40% discount.
|-
|10:01
| Who is a senior citizen?Men it is''' 60 years'' and above for women it is '''58 years''' and above.
|-
|10:09
| One needs the proof at travel time for any concession.
|-
|10:15
| What to carry during travel ,if you book an E-ticket any one proof of your ticket and '''E-copy in your smart phone''' or a print out of the i-ticket and an''' identity card '''or take the i-ticket.
|-
|10:32
| In case of I-Ticket as mentioned earlier, no identity proof is required.
|-
|10:37
| I have the following usefull tips for you .
|-
|10:40
| Please book in advance. book even if the chance of travel is small.
|-
|10:46
|You can always cancel the tickets you will lose some money if you cancel however
|-
|10:51
|this may be better than not having a ticket at all
|-
|10:55
|You cannot buy a ticket in the last minute .
|-
|10:58
|Book when the IRCTC websie is fast typically mid afternoon or late night may be fast.
|-
|11:07
|Avoid 8 to 10AM if you can.
|-
|11:11
|In the next tutorial we will discuss how to manage the tickets booked through IRCTC.
|-
|11:18
|How to view pass booking.
|-
|11:21
|How to check the PNR status.
|-
|11:23
| AndHow to cancel the ticket..
|-
|11:25
|I will now talk about the spoken tutorial project.
|-
|11:28
|Watch the video available at http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial
|-
|11:35
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
|-
|11:38
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
|11:43
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
|-
|11:45
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials
|-
|11:48
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test
|-
|11:51
|For more details, contact, sptutmail@gmail.com

|-
|11:56
|Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project
|-
|12:00
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India
|-
|12:05
|More information on this Mission is available at: http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro

|-
|12:14
|We have come to the end of this tutorial
|-
|12:16
| Thanks for joining. This is kannan moudgalya signing off . Goodbye

Advanced-C++/C2/Polymorphism/English-timed

2013-07-25T07:05:14Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| border=1 || ''Time''' || '''Narration'' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Polymorphism '''in''' C++'''. |- | 00:07 | In this tutorial we will learn, …'

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Polymorphism '''in''' C++'''.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial we will learn,

|-
| 00:10
| '''Polymorphism.'''

|-
| 00:11
| '''Virtual members.'''

|-
| 00:13
| We will do this through an example.

|-
| 00:16
| To record this tutorial, I am using '''Ubuntu OS '''version 11.10 '''gcc ''' '''g++ compiler '''v. 4.6.1

|-
| 00:27
| Let us start with the introduction to '''polymorphism.'''

|-
| 00:31
| '''Polymorphism '''is the ability to take different forms.

|-
|00:36
| It is the mechanism to use a '''function with same name''' in different ways.

|-
| 00:42
| Let us see virtual functions.

|-
| 00:45
| '''Virtual''' function is the member function of a class.

|-
| 00:49
| It can be overriden in its '''derived class.'''

|-
| 00:53
| It is declared with '''virtual keyword'''.

|-
| 00:57
| '''Virtual function''' call is resolved at '''run-time.'''

|-
| 01:01
| Now let us see an example on '''virtual functions.'''

|-
| 01:06
| I have already written the code.

|-
| 01:08
| Let us go through it.

|-
| 01:10
| Note that our filename is '''virtual.cpp'''

|-
| 01:15
| In this program:

|-
| 01:16
| We will calculate the area of a rectangle, parallelogram and traingle.

|-
| 01:22
| This is our header file as '''iostream.'''

|-
| 01:25
| Here we are using''' std namespace.'''

|-
| 01:29
| Then we have a '''class parallelogram'''

|-
| 01:33
| This is the '''base class.'''

|-
| 01:35
| '''In this '''we have declared''' integer variables as width, height '''and''' ar.'''

|-
| 01:42
| These are declared protected.

|-
| 01:45
| '''Then we have function set_values''' declared as '''public.'''

|-
| 01:50
| Here we have passed two '''arguments '''as''' a '''and''' b.'''

|-
| 01:55
| Then we access the protected members using the public members.

|-
| 02:00
| '''This is our virtual function area.'''

|-
| 02:04
| Here we calculate the area of parallelogram.

|-
| 02:07
| Then we have class '''Rectangle''' as '''derived class.'''

|-
| 02:12
| It inherits the properties of base class parallelogram.

|-
| 02:17
| Here we override the function area.

|-
| 02:21
| Then we calculate the area of the rectangle.

|-
| 02:23
| And print the value.

|-
| 02:25
| Here we have another derived class as triangle.

|-
| 02:29
| This also inherits properties of the base class parallelogram.

|-
| 02:35
| Here again we override the function area.

|-
| 02:39
| Then we calculate the area of the triangle.

|-
| 02:41
| And print the value.

|-
| 02:43
| This is our''' main function.'''

|-
| 02:46
| Here we create an''' object '''of''' class parallelogram as p.'''

|-
| 02:52
| '''We can see here pointer parallel.'''

|-
| 02:56
| '''This''' is the '''pointer''' of '''class''' '''parallelogram.'''

|-
| 03:00
| This is called as''' Base pointer.'''

|-
| 03:03
| '''Pointer of base class can point to the object of the derived class.'''

|-
| 03:08
| Here we create objects of class''' Rectangle and Triangle.'''

|-
| 03:14
| Here, '''Parallel is assigned to the address of p.'''

|-
| 03:18
| Then we pass''' arguments '''as''' 3 '''and''' 2.'''

|-
| 03:23
| Then we call''' function area.'''

|-
| 03:26
| Here, '''Parallel is assigned to the address of rect'''

|-
| 03:30
| '''rect is the object of class Rectangle.'''

|-
| 03:33
| Again we pass '''arguments '''as''' 4 '''and''' 5.'''

|-
| 03:37
| And we call the''' function area.'''

|-
| 03:40
| '''And at last we assign Parallel is assigned to the address of Triangle '''

|-
| 03:45
| '''trgl.'''

|-
| 03:47
| '''This is the object of class Triangle.'''

|-
| 03:51
| Here we pass '''arguments '''as''' 6 '''and''' 5.'''

|-
| 03:54
| And call''' function area.'''

|-
| 03:56
| This is our return statement

|-
| 03:59
| Now let us execute the program

|-
| 04:02
| open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt and T '''keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 04:09
| To compile type:

|-
| 04:10
| '''g++ virtual.cpp -o vir''' '''Press Enter'''

|-
| 04:20
| Type: '''./vir ''' '''Press Enter'''

|-
| 04:24
| We can see that, The output is displayed as:

|-
| 04:27
| '''Area of parallelogram is 6 '''

|-
| 04:29
| '''Area of rectangle is 20 '''

|-
| 04:31
| and '''Area of triangle is 15'''

|-
| 04:34
| Come back to our slides.

|-
| 04:36
| Let us summarize.

|-
| 04:37
| In this tutorial, we learnt

|-
| 04:39
| Polymorphism.

|-
| 04:41
| Virtual functione.g. Virtualint area

|-
| 04:45
| As an assignment

|-
| 04:46
| Calculate the perimeter of rectangle, square and triangle.

|-
| 04:50
| Create perimeter as a virtual function.

|-
| 04:54
| Watch the video available at the link shown below

|-
| 04:57
| It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 05:00
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 05:04
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 05:06
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 05:09
| Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 05:14
| For more details, please write to, contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 05:21
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 05:25
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of Indiaabout:startpage

|-
| 05:32
| More information on this Mission is available at: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro]

|-
| 05:37
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay signing off

Thank You for joining.

|}

Java/C2/Using-this-keyword/English-timed

2013-07-23T11:23:35Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''using this keyword''' in '''java'''.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial we will learn

|-
| 00:09
|About use of '''this''' keyword

|-
| 00:11
| To use '''this''' keyword with '''fields'''

|-
| 00:14
| To use '''this '''keyword for chaining of '''constructors'''.

|-
| 00:17
| Here we are using

* Ubuntu version 11.10
* jdk 1.6
* Eclipse 3.7.0

|-
| 00:28
| To follow this tutorial you must know

|-
| 00:30
| how to create a ''' constructor''' in '''java''' using '''eclipse'''.

|-
| 00:34
| If not, for relevant tutorials please visit our website which is as shown,

('''http'''://'''www.spoken'''-'''tutorial.org''')

|-
| 00:40
|Now we will see the use of this '''key word'''

|-
| 00:44
| Within a '''constructor''', '''this''' is a reference to the current '''object'''.

|-
| 00:48
| We can refer any member of the current '''object''' within a''' constructor''' using '''this'''.

|-
| 00:55
|Now we will see the use of '''this''' keyword with '''fields'''.

|-
| 01:00
| '''this '''keyword helps us to avoid name conflicts.

|-
| 01:07
| We can see such an example here.

|-
| 01:10
| For that let us open '''Eclipse'''.

|-
| 01:17
| Open the '''Student class''' we had created in the earlier tutorial.

|-
| 01:23
| Comment the '''default constructor ''' comment the '''constructor''' with 1 parameter.

|-
| 01:40
| Also comment the code for creating the first two '''objects'''.

|-
| 02:03
| Now, notice the '''parameterized constructor.'''

|-
| 02:11
| '''the_roll_number''' and '''the_name '''are the arguments passed to the constructor.

|-
| 02:20
| '''roll_number''' and '''name '''are the instance variables.

|-
| 02:26
| Now, let me change the arguments to '''roll_number''' and '''name''' itself.

|-
| 02:39
| So inside the '''constructor''' we have:

|-
| 02:42
| '''roll_number '''equal to''' roll_number''' and '''name '''equal to''' name.'''

|-
| 02:55
|Now '''Save '''and '''run '''the file.So press'''Ctrl ,S'''and '''Ctrl, F11'''

|-
| 03:04
| We get the output as follows:

|-
| 03:07
| I am a Parameterized Constructor
''' 0
null'''

|-
| 03:12
| Now come back to the code.

|-
| 03:17
| We see 2 warnings in the code.
|-
| 03:20
| Hover your mouse over the warning symbol.

|-
| 03:23
|We can see '''The assignment to the variable roll_number has no effect.'''

|-
| 03:29
| And '''The assignment to the variable name has no effect.'''

|-
| 03:33
| This is because in the '''constructor roll_number and name''' are '''local variables'''.

|-
| 03:40
| '''Local variables''' are '''variables''' that are accessible within the '''method''' or '''block'''.

|-
| 03:47
| Here, '''roll_number''' and '''name''' will be initialized to '''11''' and '''Raju'''.

|-
| 03:54
| Because we have passed the values '''11''' and '''Raju'''the constructor.

|-
| 04:01
| But once they come out of the '''constructor''', it is not accessible.

|-
| 04:06
| Then the only '''roll_number''' and '''name''' we know are the '''instance variables'''.

|-
| 04:13
| They have been initialized to '''0 '''and '''null '''already once the '''object''' is created.

|-
| 04:18
| So we got the output as '''0 '''and '''null'''.

|-
| 04:21
| Now, let us make a small change inside the constructor.

|-
| 04:29
| So type '''this '''''dot '''''roll_number equal to roll_number'''.

|-
| 04:37
| And''' this '''''dot '''''name equal to name'''.

|-
| 04:44
| Now '''save '''and '''run''' the file. So press '''ctrl, S''' And '''Ctrl, F11''' keys

|-
| 04:51
| We get the output as

|-
| 04:53
| I am Parameterized Constructor
'''11 and
Raju'''

|-
| 04:58
| This is because '''this '''''dot '''''roll_number '''and '''this '''''dot '''''name''' refers to the '''instance variables''' '''roll_number''' and '''name.'''

|-
| 05:12
|And here '''roll_number '''and '''name '''are the arguments passed in the method.

|-
| 05:20
| To avoid confliction between '''local''' and '''instance''' variables we use '''this '''keyword.

|-
| 05:29
| Now we will see the use of '''this keywords''' for chaining of constructor.

|-
| 05:34
| We can use '''this '''keyword inside a '''constructor''' to call another one.

|-
| 05:39
| The '''constructors''' must be in the same '''class.'''

|-
| 05:43
| This is called '''explicit constructor invocation'''.
|-
| 05:46

| So let us come back to the''' Student '''class which we created.

|-
| 05:54
|Now Remove the comments.

|-
| 06:28
| Now comment the part to assign the '''instance variables to their values in the first two constructors.'''

|-
| 06:52
|Then Comment the part which creates the''' '''second and third '''objects.'''

|-
| 07:08
| Now let us first come to the constructor with no parameters.

|-
| 07:16
| After curly brackets type '''this''' within brackets '''11''' and ''semicolon''.

|-
| 07:28
| Inside the second '''constructor''' type '''this''' within brackets '''11''' ''comma'' within double quotes '''Raju''' ''semicolon''.

|-
| 07:42
| Now '''Save''' and '''Run''' the file. So press '''Ctrl,S''' and '''Ctrl , F11'''.

|-
| 07:49
| We get the output as

|-
| 07:51
| '''I am a Parameterized Constructor'''

|-
| 07:54
| '''I am a constructor with a single parameter'''

|-
| 07:57
| '''I am Default Constructor'''

'''11''' and

'''Raju'''

|-
| 08:02
| Now, I will explain the output.

|-
| 08:08
| When the object is created, the respective constructor gets called.

|-
| 08:13
| The '''constructor''' here is the '''no argument constructor'''.

|-
| 08:20
| The control comes to the first line in the '''constructor'''.

|-
| 08:24
| It encounters the '''this '''''within brackets '''''11''' statement.

|-
| 08:26
| Hence it calls the constructor that accepts single integer argument.

|-
| 08:36
| Then the control comes to '''this '''''within brackets''''' 11 '''''comma '''''Raju.'''

|-
| 08:44
| Hence it calls the constructor that accepts 1 '''integer''' and 1 '''String''' argument.

|-
| 08:53
| So this '''constructor''' is executed and we get the output as '''I am Parameterized Constructor'''.

|-
| 09:02
|Now the instance variables will be initialized to '''11''' and '''Raju.'''As we have passed.

|-
| 09:11
| Now, the control goes back to the calling '''constructor'''.

|-
| 09:16
| So the second''' constructor ''' gets executed.

|-
| 09:19
| We get the output as''' I am constructor with a single parameter.'''

|-
| 09:25
| Then, the control goes to the first constructor and executes it.

|-
| 09:30
| So we get output as''' I am a default constructor.'''

|-
| 09:37
| Then '''studentDetail method''' is executed.

|-
| 09:42
| So, we get '''11 '''and '''Raju'''.

|-
| 09:45
| Now, let us make a small change.

|-
| 09:47
| Make the '''this''' statement the last one in the constructor.

|-
| 10:01
| We get a compiler error.

|-
| 10:03
| Hover the mouse over the error symbol.

|-
| 10:06
| We get the error as:

|-
| 10:07
| '''Constructor''' call must be the first statement in the '''constructor'''.

|-
| 10:12
| So we must make it the first line of the '''constructor.'''

|-
| 10:16
| So make it the first line of the '''constructor.'''

|-
| 10:27
| Now we can see that the error has gone.

|-
| 10:31
| So in this tutorial, we learnt

|-
| 10:35
| To use''' this''' keyword with''' fields.'''

|-
| 10:38
| To use''' this''' keyword for chaining '''constructors'''

|-
| 10:41
| How '''this '''keyword should be used within a''' constructor.'''

|-
| 10:45
| For self assessment, in the '''Employee class''' created earlier:

|-
| 10:49
| Create a '''constructor''' with two parameters

|-
| 10:52
| Use''' this '''keyword to initialize the''' instance variables .'''

|-
| 10:57
| Also create a '''constructor''' with 1 and no parameters.

|-
| 11:01
| Try chaining the '''constructors '''using '''this''' as explained in the tutorial.

|-
| 11:07
| To know more about the Spoken Tutorial Project

|-
| 11:09
| Watch the video available at the following link:[http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial http://spoken-][http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial]

|-
| 11:12
| It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 11:16
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 11:19
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 11:23
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:26
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 11:30
| For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 11:36
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:40
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 11:46
| More information on this Mission is available at

* [http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro]

|-
| 11:55
| Thus We have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 11:58
| This is Arya Ratish signing off. Thanks for joining.

Java/C2/Using-this-keyword/English-timed

2013-07-23T11:21:24Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 || ''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''using this keyword''' in '''java'''. |- | 00:07 | In this tutorial we will lea…'

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''using this keyword''' in '''java'''.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial we will learn

|-
| 00:09
|About use of '''this''' keyword

|-
| 00:11
| To use '''this''' keyword with '''fields'''

|-
| 00:14
| To use '''this '''keyword for chaining of '''constructors'''.

|-
| 00:17
| Here we are using

* Ubuntu version 11.10
* jdk 1.6
* Eclipse 3.7.0

|-
| 00:28
| To follow this tutorial you must know

|-
| 00:30
| how to create a ''' constructor''' in '''java''' using '''eclipse'''.

|-
|
| You must also know how to create a '''parameterized constructor''' in '''java'''.

|-
| 00:34
| If not, for relevant tutorials please visit our website which is as shown,

('''http'''://'''www.spoken'''-'''tutorial.org''')

|-
| 00:40
|Now we will see the use of this '''key word'''

|-
| 00:44
| Within a '''constructor''', '''this''' is a reference to the current '''object'''.

|-
| 00:48
| We can refer any member of the current '''object''' within a''' constructor''' using '''this'''.

|-
| 00:55
|Now we will see the use of '''this''' keyword with '''fields'''.

|-
| 01:00
| '''this '''keyword helps us to avoid name conflicts.

|-
| 01:07
| We can see such an example here.

|-
| 01:10
| For that let us open '''Eclipse'''.

|-
| 01:17
| Open the '''Student class''' we had created in the earlier tutorial.

|-
| 01:23
| Comment the '''default constructor ''' comment the '''constructor''' with 1 parameter.

|-
| 01:40
| Also comment the code for creating the first two '''objects'''.

|-
| 02:03
| Now, notice the '''parameterized constructor.'''

|-
| 02:11
| '''the_roll_number''' and '''the_name '''are the arguments passed to the constructor.

|-
| 02:20
| '''roll_number''' and '''name '''are the instance variables.

|-
| 02:26
| Now, let me change the arguments to '''roll_number''' and '''name''' itself.

|-
| 02:39
| So inside the '''constructor''' we have:

|-
| 02:42
| '''roll_number '''equal to''' roll_number''' and '''name '''equal to''' name.'''

|-
| 02:55
|Now '''Save '''and '''run '''the file.So press'''Ctrl ,S'''and '''Ctrl, F11'''

|-
| 03:04
| We get the output as follows:

|-
| 03:07
| I am a Parameterized Constructor
''' 0
null'''

|-
| 03:12
| Now come back to the code.

|-
| 03:17
| We see 2 warnings in the code.
|-
| 03:20
| Hover your mouse over the warning symbol.

|-
| 03:23
|We can see '''The assignment to the variable roll_number has no effect.'''

|-
| 03:29
| And '''The assignment to the variable name has no effect.'''

|-
| 03:33
| This is because in the '''constructor roll_number and name''' are '''local variables'''.

|-
| 03:40
| '''Local variables''' are '''variables''' that are accessible within the '''method''' or '''block'''.

|-
| 03:47
| Here, '''roll_number''' and '''name''' will be initialized to '''11''' and '''Raju'''.

|-
| 03:54
| Because we have passed the values '''11''' and '''Raju'''the constructor.

|-
| 04:01
| But once they come out of the '''constructor''', it is not accessible.

|-
| 04:06
| Then the only '''roll_number''' and '''name''' we know are the '''instance variables'''.

|-
| 04:13
| They have been initialized to '''0 '''and '''null '''already once the '''object''' is created.

|-
| 04:18
| So we got the output as '''0 '''and '''null'''.

|-
| 04:21
| Now, let us make a small change inside the constructor.

|-
| 04:29
| So type '''this '''''dot '''''roll_number equal to roll_number'''.

|-
| 04:37
| And''' this '''''dot '''''name equal to name'''.

|-
| 04:44
| Now '''save '''and '''run''' the file. So press '''ctrl, S''' And '''Ctrl, F11''' keys

|-
| 04:51
| We get the output as

|-
| 04:53
| I am Parameterized Constructor
'''11 and
Raju'''

|-
| 04:58
| This is because '''this '''''dot '''''roll_number '''and '''this '''''dot '''''name''' refers to the '''instance variables''' '''roll_number''' and '''name.'''

|-
| 05:12
|And here '''roll_number '''and '''name '''are the arguments passed in the method.

|-
| 05:20
| To avoid confliction between '''local''' and '''instance''' variables we use '''this '''keyword.

|-
| 05:29
| Now we will see the use of '''this keywords''' for chaining of constructor.

|-
| 05:34
| We can use '''this '''keyword inside a '''constructor''' to call another one.

|-
| 05:39
| The '''constructors''' must be in the same '''class.'''

|-
| 05:43
| This is called '''explicit constructor invocation'''.
|-
| 05:46

| So let us come back to the''' Student '''class which we created.

|-
| 05:54
|Now Remove the comments.

|-
| 06:28
| Now comment the part to assign the '''instance variables to their values in the first two constructors.'''

|-
| 06:52
|Then Comment the part which creates the''' '''second and third '''objects.'''

|-
| 07:08
| Now let us first come to the constructor with no parameters.

|-
| 07:16
| After curly brackets type '''this''' within brackets '''11''' and ''semicolon''.

|-
| 07:28
| Inside the second '''constructor''' type '''this''' within brackets '''11''' ''comma'' within double quotes '''Raju''' ''semicolon''.

|-
| 07:42
| Now '''Save''' and '''Run''' the file. So press '''Ctrl,S''' and '''Ctrl , F11'''.

|-
| 07:49
| We get the output as

|-
| 07:51
| '''I am a Parameterized Constructor'''

|-
| 07:54
| '''I am a constructor with a single parameter'''

|-
| 07:57
| '''I am Default Constructor'''

'''11''' and

'''Raju'''

|-
| 08:02
| Now, I will explain the output.

|-
| 08:08
| When the object is created, the respective constructor gets called.

|-
| 08:13
| The '''constructor''' here is the '''no argument constructor'''.

|-
| 08:20
| The control comes to the first line in the '''constructor'''.

|-
| 08:24
| It encounters the '''this '''''within brackets '''''11''' statement.

|-
| 08:26
| Hence it calls the constructor that accepts single integer argument.

|-
| 08:36
| Then the control comes to '''this '''''within brackets''''' 11 '''''comma '''''Raju.'''

|-
| 08:44
| Hence it calls the constructor that accepts 1 '''integer''' and 1 '''String''' argument.

|-
| 08:53
| So this '''constructor''' is executed and we get the output as '''I am Parameterized Constructor'''.

|-
| 09:02
|Now the instance variables will be initialized to '''11''' and '''Raju.'''As we have passed.

|-
| 09:11
| Now, the control goes back to the calling '''constructor'''.

|-
| 09:16
| So the second''' constructor ''' gets executed.

|-
| 09:19
| We get the output as''' I am constructor with a single parameter.'''

|-
| 09:25
| Then, the control goes to the first constructor and executes it.

|-
| 09:30
| So we get output as''' I am a default constructor.'''

|-
| 09:37
| Then '''studentDetail method''' is executed.

|-
| 09:42
| So, we get '''11 '''and '''Raju'''.

|-
| 09:45
| Now, let us make a small change.

|-
| 09:47
| Make the '''this''' statement the last one in the constructor.

|-
| 10:01
| We get a compiler error.

|-
| 10:03
| Hover the mouse over the error symbol.

|-
| 10:06
| We get the error as:

|-
| 10:07
| '''Constructor''' call must be the first statement in the '''constructor'''.

|-
| 10:12
| So we must make it the first line of the '''constructor.'''

|-
| 10:16
| So make it the first line of the '''constructor.'''

|-
| 10:27
| Now we can see that the error has gone.

|-
| 10:31
| So in this tutorial, we learnt

|-
| 10:35
| To use''' this''' keyword with''' fields.'''

|-
| 10:38
| To use''' this''' keyword for chaining '''constructors'''

|-
| 10:41
| How '''this '''keyword should be used within a''' constructor.'''

|-
| 10:45
| For self assessment, in the '''Employee class''' created earlier:

|-
| 10:49
| Create a '''constructor''' with two parameters

|-
| 10:52
| Use''' this '''keyword to initialize the''' instance variables .'''

|-
| 10:57
| Also create a '''constructor''' with 1 and no parameters.

|-
| 11:01
| Try chaining the '''constructors '''using '''this''' as explained in the tutorial.

|-
| 11:07
| To know more about the Spoken Tutorial Project

|-
| 11:09
| Watch the video available at the following link:[http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial http://spoken-][http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial]

|-
| 11:12
| It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 11:16
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 11:19
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 11:23
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 11:26
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 11:30
| For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 11:36
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11:40
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 11:46
| More information on this Mission is available at

* [http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro]

|-
| 11:55
| Thus We have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 11:58
| This is Arya Ratish signing off. Thanks for joining.

Java/C2/Non-static-block/English-timed

2013-07-23T10:16:51Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| border=1 || ''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Non-static block '''in '''java'''. |- | 00:06 | In this tutorial we will learn…'

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Non-static block '''in '''java'''.

|-
| 00:06
| In this tutorial we will learn

|-
| 00:08
| About '''non-static''' '''block'''

|-
| 00:10
| When a '''non-static block '''executed?

|-
| 00:13
| Simple example of '''non-static block'''

|-
| 00:16
|And Why we need '''constructors'''?

|-
| 00:18
| Here we are using

* Ubuntu version 11.10
* Java Development Environment jdk 1.6
*And Eclipse IDE 3.7.0

|-
| 00:26
|To follow this tutorial you must know

|-
| 00:29
|How to create a '''constructor''' in '''Java''' using '''Eclipse'''

|-
| 00:33
| If not, for relevant tutorials please visit our website which is as shown,

('''http'''://'''www.spoken'''-'''tutorial.org''')

|-
| 00:38
| Now we will see what a '''non-static block''' is.

|-
| 00:42
| Any code written between two curly brackets is a '''non-static block'''.

|-
|00:46
| We can see the syntax here.

|-
| 00:51
| When is a '''non-static block''' executed ?

|-
| 00:54
|A '''non-static block''' is executedfor each object that is created.

|-
| 00:59
| It executes before the '''constructor''''s execution.

|-
| 01:04
| It can initialize''' instance member variables '''of the class.

|-
| 01:08
| Any other execution like calculation could also be given in the block.

|-
| 01:14
| Now, let us switch to '''Eclipse''' and try to use a '''non-static block.'''

|-
| 01:23
| I have already opened a class named '''NonStaticTest''' in '''Eclipse.'''

|-
| 01:28
| I also have a created a '''class '''named '''A''' .

|-
| 01:33
| Now inside '''class''' '''A ''', I will first create a variable of type '''int'''.

|-
| 01:38
| So type '''int''' a semicolon, then press ''Enter''

|-
| 01:46
| Within curly brackets type '''System''' ''dot '''''out''' ''dot'' '''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''Non static''' '''block of an instance of Class A '''''semicolon''.

|-
| 02:12
| Then type '''System '''''dot'' '''out''' ''dot '''''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''The value of a''' is ''plus '''''a '''''semicolon''.

|-
| 02:32
| Now we will declare a '''constructor'''.

|-
| 02:36
| So type '''public A''' ''opening and closing brackets'', open the ''curly brackets'' press '''Enter'''.

|-
| 02:51
| Then type '''System''' ''dot '''''out '''''dot'' '''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''Constructing object of type A''' semicolon.

|-
| 03:11
| Then type '''System''' ''dot'' '''out '''''dot '''''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''The value of a '''is ''plus'' '''a '''''semicolon''.

|-
| 03:35
| Now save this file.
|-
| 03:44
| Inside '''class NonStaticTest''' in''' Eclipse '''let us create an '''object '''of the '''class A'''.

|-
| 03:53
| So type '''A''' ''space '''''a1''' ''equal to''''' new''' ''space'' '''A''' opening and closing brackets semicolon

|-
| 04:08
| Next line we will create one more object of class '''A'''.

|-
| 04:12
|So type '''A''''' space'' '''a2''' ''equal to'' '''new '''''space'' '''A''' opening and closing brackets semicolon.

|-
| 04:25
|Now Save and run the file. So press '''Ctrl &S''' and '''Ctrl &F11 '''keys

|-
| 04:32
| We get the output as follows:

|-
| 04:35
| As we can see when the first''' object '''is created, the '''non-static block''' is executed.

|-
| 04:45
| '''non-static block''' of an''' instance of class A ''' and the''' instance variable A '''is initialized to '''0'''.

|-
| 04:53
| Only after that the '''constructor''' is executed. Constructing object of type A

|-
| 05:02
| And here the''' instance variable''' is again initialized to '''0'''.

|-
| 05:07
| Then again when the second '''object''' is created, the '''non-static block''' is executed.

|-
| 05:16
| This process is repeated.

|-
| 05:20
| We can have multiple '''non-static blocks''' in a '''class'''.

|-
| 05:25
| In this case they execute in the sequence in which they appear in the '''class.'''

|-
| 05:30
| We can try that now.

|-
| 05:34
| Include one more block after the first one in class A.

|-
| 05:43
| So again type inside curly brackets.

|-
| 05:47
| '''System''' ''dot '''''out''' ''dot'' '''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''Second''' '''Non static''' '''block of an instance of Class A '''''semicolon''.

|-
| 06:08
| Then type '''System '''''dot'' '''out''' ''dot '''''println''' within brackets and double quotes '''The value of a''' is ''plus '''''a '''''semicolon''.

|-
| 06:30
| Now save this file ,press''' Ctrl & S key ''' simultaneously then press ''' Ctrl & F11 ''' to run the program.

|-
| 06:44
| We get the output as follows.

|-
| 06:48
| we see that after the first block is executed, the second is executed.

|-
| 06:58
| Only then the '''constructor''' is executed.

|-
| 07:07
| Now you might feel why do we need '''constructors.'''

|-
| 07:10
| The answer is we don't need the '''default constructor'''.

|-
| 07:15
| But the '''non-static block''' cannot be '''parameterized'''.

|-
| 07:18
| You cannot have''' objects''' taking values from out side.

|-
| 07:22
| So '''non-static block '''is not a substitute for '''constructor.'''

|-
| 07:27
| So let us summarizes

|-
| 07:29
| In this tutorial we learnt :

|-
| 07:32
| About '''non-static block''' and how to use this block.

|-
| 07:35
| For self assessment,

|-
| 07:36
| create a '''class '''named '''B.'''
|-
| 07:39
| Create a '''non-static block''' and a '''constructor''' as shown in the tutorial.

|-
| 07:44
| Create an '''object''' of '''class B''' in the '''class NonStaticTest '''already created'''.'''

|-
| 07:49
| Check the output.

|-
| 07:51
| To know more about the Spoken Tutorial Project
|-
| 07:53
| Watch the video available at [http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial http://spoken-][http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial]
|-
| 07:56
| It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 08:00
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 08:03
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 08:06
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 08:08
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 08:12
| For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 08:18

| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 08:22
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 08:28
| More information on this Mission is available at

* [http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro]

|-
| 08:37
|Thus we have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 08:40
| This is Arya Ratish from IIT BOmbay signing off. Thanks for joining.

|}

Digital-Divide/D0/How-to-apply-for-a-PAN-Card/English-timed

2013-07-17T11:03:29Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| '''Time''''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''How to apply for a PAN card. '''

|-
| 00:08
| In this tutorial we will learn the process of-

|-
| 00:12
| Applying for a '''PAN''' Card
|-
| 00:15
| Documents for proof of identity
|-
| 00:19
| And Tracking the status of the application

|-
| 00:23
| The '''Pan card '''application form is called '''Form 49A.'''

|-
| 00:29
| This form can be downloaded from the link given below http://www.utiitsl.com/forms/Forms 49A.pdf

|-
| 00:37
| Once you have downloaded the form, take a print-out of the same.

|-
| 00:44
| Next step is to fill the form.

|-
|00:47
| The form is to be filled legibly in '''BLOCK LETTERS''' in English only.

|-
| 00:53
| It is preferable to use a pen with black ink''' '''to fill the form.

|-
| 00:59
| In each box, fill only one character i.e (alphabet /number / punctuation sign).

|-
| 01:08
| A blank box must be left after each word.

|-
| 01:13
| ''''Individual'''' applicants need two recent colour photographs with a white background.

|-
| 01:20
| These photos have to pasted on the form in the spaces provided.

|-
| 01:26
| The size of the photo should be 3.5cm x 2.5cm

|-
| 01:35
| The photos should not be stapled or clipped to the form.

|-
| 01:40
| The photo on the left, should have a signature/thumb impression across it.

|-
| 01:47
| For the right side photo, the signature/thumb impression should be below it.

|-
| 01:54
| Thumb impressions should be attested by a Notary Public or an authorized officer with official seal and stamp.

|-
| 02:04
| Now, start filling the form.

|-
| 02:06
| First of all, fill the '''Assessing officer''' details.

|-
| 02:11
| '''Assessing officer''' details can be found on these webpages -

* [http://www.utiitsl.com/utitsl/site/aoDetails.jsp www.utiitsl.com/utitsl/site/aoDetails.jsp] or
* [http://www.tin-nsdl.com/pan/pan-aocode.php www.tin-nsdl.com/pan/pan-aocode.php]

|-
| 02:26
| In the item 1 section, you have to fill in your personal details.

|-
| 02:31
| Here, select your title, like Shri, Smt etc.

|-
| 02:38
| Write your surname, first name and middle name, in full-form.

|-
| 02:44
| These are to be filled without any initials.

|-
| 02:48
| Your name should not be prefixed with any title like M/s, Dr., Kumari, etc

|-
| 02:57
| For '''Non-Individuals''', what if the name is longer than the space provided?

|-
| 03:03
| In that case, it can be continued in the space provided for First and Middle Name.

|-
| 03:10
| In case of a Company, the name shouldn't contain any abbreviations.

|-
| 03:16
| E.g. 'Private Limited' should be written in full.

|-
| 03:21
| Variations like Pvt Ltd, Private Ltd, P, P. Ltd etc are not allowed.

|-
| 03:31
| In case of sole proprietorship, the PAN should be applied for in the proprietor's own name.

|-
| 03:39
| In item 2, '''Individual''' applicants can use abbreviation in their names.

|-
| 03:46
| This will be printed on the PAN card.

|-
| 03:49
| Note that the last name must be written in its full-form.

|-
| 03:54
| The next section asks for other names that one is or was known by.

|-
| 04:02
| It must be filled if the applicant selects "yes", following the instructions applicable for item 1.

|-
| 04:10
| Item 4, the '''Gender '''field, should be filled only by '''Individual '''applicants.

|-
| 04:18
| The item 5 section asks for date of birth.

|-
| 04:23
| The dates expected from different categories of applicants are specified in the form.

|-
| 04:29
| E.g. A Company should provide its Date-of-Incorporation.

|-
| 04:35
| Next, '''Individual '''applicants should fill in their father's name.

|-
| 04:40
| Instructions in item 1 with respect to name, apply here.

|-
| 04:46
| Note that married women should also give their father's and not husband's name.

|-
| 04:53
| Item 7 asks for your address.

|-
| 04:57
| Residential address should be filled only by '''Individuals''', '''HUF, AOP, BOI''' or '''AJP'''.

|-
| 05:07
| Individuals should give Office Address here, if they have a source of income e.g business or profession.

|-
| 05:16
| In case of a Firm, LLP, Company, Local Authority or a Trust, complete office address is mandatory.

|-
| 05:26
| | The address given by all the applicants should include these details -

|-
| 05:32
| i.e Town/City/District,
|-
| 05:37
| State/Union Territory, and
|-
| 05:40
| PINCODE

|-
| 05:41
| Foreign addresses must contain Country Name along with its ZIP Code.

|-
| 05:47
| For item 8, i.e. '''Address for Communication'''-

|-
| 05:51
| '''Individuals/HUFs/AOP/BOI/AJP''' may tick on either ''''Residence'''' or ''''Office'''' address.
|-
| 06:01
| Other applicants should write their ''''Office'''' address

|-
|06:05
| All communication will be sent to the address written here.

|-
| 06:11
| | '''Telephone Number and Email ID details''' are to be filled in item 9.

|-
|06:16
| Telephone details should include '''Country code '''(ISD code) and '''Area/STD code '''

|-
| 06:25
| E.g. Details of a Delhi telephone 23557505 number should be filled as
|-
|06:34
| 9 1 the Country code
|-
| 06:36
| * 1 1 the STD Code

|-
| 06:39
| The numbers and e-mail id are necessary to
|-
| 06:43
| contact applicants in case of any discrepancy in the application
|-
| 06:49
|send the PAN card via e-mail
|-
| 06:52
| SMS the status updates

|-
|06:56
|In item 10, select the category status that is applicable.

|-
| 07:02
| In case of '''Limited Liability Partnership''', the '''PAN''' will be given a '''Firm''' status.

|-
| 07:09
| Item 11 asks for the registration number of companies, issued by the Registrar of Companies.

|-
| 07:18
| Other applicants may mention registration number issued by State or Central Government Authority.

|-
| 07: 27
| Item 12 -

|-
| 07:28
|Citizens of India, must enter their '''AADHAAR''' number, if allotted.

|-
| 07:34
| It should be supported by a copy of the '''AADHAAR''' letter/card.

|-
| 07:39
| In item 13, applicants must indicate their source of income using a business/profession code

|-
| 07:48
| These codes are available on page 3 of the form.

|-
| 07:52
| E.g. Medical Profession and Business's code is 01
|-
| 07:58
| Engineering is 02

|-
| 08:01
| Item 14 asks for personal details of representative assessees.

|-
| 08:08
|Only those specified in '''Section 160''' of the '''Income-tax Act, 1961''' can act as representative assessees.

|-
| 08:18
| Some of them are-

|-
| 08:20
|an agent of the non-resident,
|-
| 08:23
|guardian or manager of a minor,lunatic or idiot, Court of Wards etc.

|-
| 08:32
|Representative assessees are mandatory for applicants who are minors, mentally retarded, deceased, idiot or a lunatic.

|-
| 08:43
| Personal details of the Representative Assessee have to be filled here.

|-
| 08:49
| Item 15, is about documents to be submitted for Pan Card application.

|-
| 08:55
| Attaching proof of identity and proof of address with a PAN application is mandatory.

|-
| 09:04
|These documents should be in the name of applicant.

|-
| 09:09
|Representative assessees must also attach these documents

|-
| 09:15
| List of documents that serve as proof of identity and address are given on page 4 of the Pan application form.

|-
| 09:26
|Applicants must furnish any one document from the options listed in the form.

|-
| 09:33
| E.g.-Proof of identity for '''Individual''' applicants and '''HUF''' are-

|-
| 09:39
| School leaving certificate
|-
| 09:42
| Ration Card
|-
| 09:43
| Driver's license etc.

|-
| 09:46
| Documents for proof of address are -

|-
| 09:50
| Electricity bill
|-
| 09:52
| Telephone Bill
|-
| 09:53
| Passport etc.

|-
| 09:57
| Now we will discuss some general information regarding the application-

|-
| 10:03
|The fee for processing PAN application is Rs.96.00 ( 85.00 + 12.36% service tax).

|-
| 10:15
|Payment can be made by-

* Demand Draft
* Cheque

|-
| 10:20
| For addresses outside India, the processing fee is Rs. 962.00

|-
| 10:27
|i.e[ (Application fee 85.00 + Dispatch Charges 771.00) + 12.36% service tax].

|-
| 10:40
|For foreign addresses, payment can be made only by way of Demand Draft payable at Mumbai.

|-
| 10:48
| The box at the end of the form, asks for the applicant's signature or thumb-print.

|-
| 10:55
|Representative Assessee's signature or thumb print should be given for minors, the deceased, lunatics and the mentally retarded.

|-
| 11:06
| Applications without signature or thumb-print will be rejected.

|-
| 11:12
| Applicants will receive an acknowledgement on acceptance of this form.

|-
| 11:18
|This will contain the Unique Identification number.

|-
| 11:23
|This number can be used for tracking the status of the application.

|-
| 11:29
| You can track its status using the Income-tax Department website or these

[http://www.incometaxindia.gov.in/ www.incometaxindia.gov.in] OR these websites

[https://tin.tin.nsdl.com/tan/StatusTrack.html tin.tin.nsdl.com/tan/StatusTrack.html]

[http://www.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do w][http://www.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do ww.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do]

|-
| 11:38
| On this website, the "'''Status Track '''" search will perform this task.

|-
| 11:43
|This search will need either your

|-
| 11:45
| # acknowledgement number, or
|-
| 11:47
| # details like name and date of birth

|-
| 11:52
| | One can also get PAN status details via SMS.

|-
| 11:57
|>SMS- NSDLPAN<space>15-digit Acknowledgement No. and send to 57575

|-
| 12:10
| The postal addresses are as shown.

|-
| 12:17
| Hope this information was helpful.

|-
| 12:20
|Now let us summarize. In this tutorial, we have learnt -

|-
| 12:25
|- Procedure to apply for PAN Card
|-
| 12:28
| Documents for proof of identity and
|-
| 12:32
|- Tracking the Status of PAN

|-
| 12:35
| Watch the video available at the following link http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial

|-
| 12:39
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 12:43
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 12:49
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
|12:51
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 12:55
|Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 13 :01
| For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 13:09
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 13:13
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government

of India

|-
| 13:21
|More information on this Mission is available at http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 13:31
| We have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 13:35
|This is Arthi signing off from IIT Bombay

Thanks for joining

|}

Digital-Divide/D0/How-to-apply-for-a-PAN-Card/English-timed

2013-07-17T11:02:30Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| style="border-spacing:0;" | <center>'''Visual Cue'''</center> | <center>'''Narration'''</center> |- | 00:01 | Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''How to apply for a PA…'

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| <center>'''Visual Cue'''</center>
| <center>'''Narration'''</center>

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''How to apply for a PAN card. '''

|-
| 00:08
| In this tutorial we will learn the process of-

|-
| 00:12
| Applying for a '''PAN''' Card
|-
| 00:15
| Documents for proof of identity
|-
| 00:19
| And Tracking the status of the application

|-
| 00:23
| The '''Pan card '''application form is called '''Form 49A.'''

|-
| 00:29
| This form can be downloaded from the link given below http://www.utiitsl.com/forms/Forms 49A.pdf

|-
| 00:37
| Once you have downloaded the form, take a print-out of the same.

|-
| 00:44
| Next step is to fill the form.

|-
|00:47
| The form is to be filled legibly in '''BLOCK LETTERS''' in English only.

|-
| 00:53
| It is preferable to use a pen with black ink''' '''to fill the form.

|-
| 00:59
| In each box, fill only one character i.e (alphabet /number / punctuation sign).

|-
| 01:08
| A blank box must be left after each word.

|-
| 01:13
| ''''Individual'''' applicants need two recent colour photographs with a white background.

|-
| 01:20
| These photos have to pasted on the form in the spaces provided.

|-
| 01:26
| The size of the photo should be 3.5cm x 2.5cm

|-
| 01:35
| The photos should not be stapled or clipped to the form.

|-
| 01:40
| The photo on the left, should have a signature/thumb impression across it.

|-
| 01:47
| For the right side photo, the signature/thumb impression should be below it.

|-
| 01:54
| Thumb impressions should be attested by a Notary Public or an authorized officer with official seal and stamp.

|-
| 02:04
| Now, start filling the form.

|-
| 02:06
| First of all, fill the '''Assessing officer''' details.

|-
| 02:11
| '''Assessing officer''' details can be found on these webpages -

* [http://www.utiitsl.com/utitsl/site/aoDetails.jsp www.utiitsl.com/utitsl/site/aoDetails.jsp] or
* [http://www.tin-nsdl.com/pan/pan-aocode.php www.tin-nsdl.com/pan/pan-aocode.php]

|-
| 02:26
| In the item 1 section, you have to fill in your personal details.

|-
| 02:31
| Here, select your title, like Shri, Smt etc.

|-
| 02:38
| Write your surname, first name and middle name, in full-form.

|-
| 02:44
| These are to be filled without any initials.

|-
| 02:48
| Your name should not be prefixed with any title like M/s, Dr., Kumari, etc

|-
| 02:57
| For '''Non-Individuals''', what if the name is longer than the space provided?

|-
| 03:03
| In that case, it can be continued in the space provided for First and Middle Name.

|-
| 03:10
| In case of a Company, the name shouldn't contain any abbreviations.

|-
| 03:16
| E.g. 'Private Limited' should be written in full.

|-
| 03:21
| Variations like Pvt Ltd, Private Ltd, P, P. Ltd etc are not allowed.

|-
| 03:31
| In case of sole proprietorship, the PAN should be applied for in the proprietor's own name.

|-
| 03:39
| In item 2, '''Individual''' applicants can use abbreviation in their names.

|-
| 03:46
| This will be printed on the PAN card.

|-
| 03:49
| Note that the last name must be written in its full-form.

|-
| 03:54
| The next section asks for other names that one is or was known by.

|-
| 04:02
| It must be filled if the applicant selects "yes", following the instructions applicable for item 1.

|-
| 04:10
| Item 4, the '''Gender '''field, should be filled only by '''Individual '''applicants.

|-
| 04:18
| The item 5 section asks for date of birth.

|-
| 04:23
| The dates expected from different categories of applicants are specified in the form.

|-
| 04:29
| E.g. A Company should provide its Date-of-Incorporation.

|-
| 04:35
| Next, '''Individual '''applicants should fill in their father's name.

|-
| 04:40
| Instructions in item 1 with respect to name, apply here.

|-
| 04:46
| Note that married women should also give their father's and not husband's name.

|-
| 04:53
| Item 7 asks for your address.

|-
| 04:57
| Residential address should be filled only by '''Individuals''', '''HUF, AOP, BOI''' or '''AJP'''.

|-
| 05:07
| Individuals should give Office Address here, if they have a source of income e.g business or profession.

|-
| 05:16
| In case of a Firm, LLP, Company, Local Authority or a Trust, complete office address is mandatory.

|-
| 05:26
| | The address given by all the applicants should include these details -

|-
| 05:32
| i.e Town/City/District,
|-
| 05:37
| State/Union Territory, and
|-
| 05:40
| PINCODE

|-
| 05:41
| Foreign addresses must contain Country Name along with its ZIP Code.

|-
| 05:47
| For item 8, i.e. '''Address for Communication'''-

|-
| 05:51
| '''Individuals/HUFs/AOP/BOI/AJP''' may tick on either ''''Residence'''' or ''''Office'''' address.
|-
| 06:01
| Other applicants should write their ''''Office'''' address

|-
|06:05
| All communication will be sent to the address written here.

|-
| 06:11
| | '''Telephone Number and Email ID details''' are to be filled in item 9.

|-
|06:16
| Telephone details should include '''Country code '''(ISD code) and '''Area/STD code '''

|-
| 06:25
| E.g. Details of a Delhi telephone 23557505 number should be filled as
|-
|06:34
| 9 1 the Country code
|-
| 06:36
| * 1 1 the STD Code

|-
| 06:39
| The numbers and e-mail id are necessary to
|-
| 06:43
| contact applicants in case of any discrepancy in the application
|-
| 06:49
|send the PAN card via e-mail
|-
| 06:52
| SMS the status updates

|-
|06:56
|In item 10, select the category status that is applicable.

|-
| 07:02
| In case of '''Limited Liability Partnership''', the '''PAN''' will be given a '''Firm''' status.

|-
| 07:09
| Item 11 asks for the registration number of companies, issued by the Registrar of Companies.

|-
| 07:18
| Other applicants may mention registration number issued by State or Central Government Authority.

|-
| 07: 27
| Item 12 -

|-
| 07:28
|Citizens of India, must enter their '''AADHAAR''' number, if allotted.

|-
| 07:34
| It should be supported by a copy of the '''AADHAAR''' letter/card.

|-
| 07:39
| In item 13, applicants must indicate their source of income using a business/profession code

|-
| 07:48
| These codes are available on page 3 of the form.

|-
| 07:52
| E.g. Medical Profession and Business's code is 01
|-
| 07:58
| Engineering is 02

|-
| 08:01
| Item 14 asks for personal details of representative assessees.

|-
| 08:08
|Only those specified in '''Section 160''' of the '''Income-tax Act, 1961''' can act as representative assessees.

|-
| 08:18
| Some of them are-

|-
| 08:20
|an agent of the non-resident,
|-
| 08:23
|guardian or manager of a minor,lunatic or idiot, Court of Wards etc.

|-
| 08:32
|Representative assessees are mandatory for applicants who are minors, mentally retarded, deceased, idiot or a lunatic.

|-
| 08:43
| Personal details of the Representative Assessee have to be filled here.

|-
| 08:49
| Item 15, is about documents to be submitted for Pan Card application.

|-
| 08:55
| Attaching proof of identity and proof of address with a PAN application is mandatory.

|-
| 09:04
|These documents should be in the name of applicant.

|-
| 09:09
|Representative assessees must also attach these documents

|-
| 09:15
| List of documents that serve as proof of identity and address are given on page 4 of the Pan application form.

|-
| 09:26
|Applicants must furnish any one document from the options listed in the form.

|-
| 09:33
| E.g.-Proof of identity for '''Individual''' applicants and '''HUF''' are-

|-
| 09:39
| School leaving certificate
|-
| 09:42
| Ration Card
|-
| 09:43
| Driver's license etc.

|-
| 09:46
| Documents for proof of address are -

|-
| 09:50
| Electricity bill
|-
| 09:52
| Telephone Bill
|-
| 09:53
| Passport etc.

|-
| 09:57
| Now we will discuss some general information regarding the application-

|-
| 10:03
|The fee for processing PAN application is Rs.96.00 ( 85.00 + 12.36% service tax).

|-
| 10:15
|Payment can be made by-

* Demand Draft
* Cheque

|-
| 10:20
| For addresses outside India, the processing fee is Rs. 962.00

|-
| 10:27
|i.e[ (Application fee 85.00 + Dispatch Charges 771.00) + 12.36% service tax].

|-
| 10:40
|For foreign addresses, payment can be made only by way of Demand Draft payable at Mumbai.

|-
| 10:48
| The box at the end of the form, asks for the applicant's signature or thumb-print.

|-
| 10:55
|Representative Assessee's signature or thumb print should be given for minors, the deceased, lunatics and the mentally retarded.

|-
| 11:06
| Applications without signature or thumb-print will be rejected.

|-
| 11:12
| Applicants will receive an acknowledgement on acceptance of this form.

|-
| 11:18
|This will contain the Unique Identification number.

|-
| 11:23
|This number can be used for tracking the status of the application.

|-
| 11:29
| You can track its status using the Income-tax Department website or these

[http://www.incometaxindia.gov.in/ www.incometaxindia.gov.in] OR these websites

[https://tin.tin.nsdl.com/tan/StatusTrack.html tin.tin.nsdl.com/tan/StatusTrack.html]

[http://www.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do w][http://www.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do ww.myutiitsl.com/PANONLINE/panTracker.do]

|-
| 11:38
| On this website, the "'''Status Track '''" search will perform this task.

|-
| 11:43
|This search will need either your

|-
| 11:45
| # acknowledgement number, or
|-
| 11:47
| # details like name and date of birth

|-
| 11:52
| | One can also get PAN status details via SMS.

|-
| 11:57
|>SMS- NSDLPAN<space>15-digit Acknowledgement No. and send to 57575

|-
| 12:10
| The postal addresses are as shown.

|-
| 12:17
| Hope this information was helpful.

|-
| 12:20
|Now let us summarize. In this tutorial, we have learnt -

|-
| 12:25
|- Procedure to apply for PAN Card
|-
| 12:28
| Documents for proof of identity and
|-
| 12:32
|- Tracking the Status of PAN

|-
| 12:35
| Watch the video available at the following link http://spoken-tutorial.org/What_is_a_Spoken_Tutorial

|-
| 12:39
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 12:43
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 12:49
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
|12:51
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 12:55
|Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
| 13 :01
| For more details, please write to contact@spoken-tutorial.org

|-
| 13:09
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 13:13
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government

of India

|-
| 13:21
|More information on this Mission is available at http://spoken-tutorial.org/NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 13:31
| We have come to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 13:35
|This is Arthi signing off from IIT Bombay

Thanks for joining

|}

C-and-C++/C3/String-Library-Functions/English-timed

2013-07-16T11:49:05Z

Sneha: Created page with ' {| border=1 || ''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on String Library Functions in C |- | 00:07 | In this tutorial, we will learn, |- | …'

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on String Library Functions in C

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial, we will learn,

|-
| 00:10
| String Library Functions

|-
| 00:12
| We will do this with the help of some examples

|-
| 00:15
| To record this tutorial, I am using

|-
| 00:18
| Ubuntu Operating System version 11.10,

|-
| 00:23
| gcc Compiler Version 4.6.1

|-
| 00:27
| Let us start with an introduction to string library functions.

|-
| 00:31
| These are the group of functions implementing operations on strings.

|-
| 00:37
| Various operations such as copying, concatenation, searching etc are supported.

|-
| 00:45
|Let us see some of the string library functions

|-
| 00:49
| Here we have the '''strncpy''' function

|-
| 00:52
| The syntax for this is strncpy(char str1, char str2, int n )

|-
| 01:02
| It copies first n characters of '''string str2''' into '''string str1'''.

|-
| 01:10
| eg. char strncpy(char hello, char world, 2);

|-
| 01:17
| The output will be ;'''Wollo'''

|-
| 01:21
| Here we have''' Wo '''fromt the string 2 and rest of the characters from string 1

|-
| 01:29
| Now we will see strcmp function, the syntax for this is strncmp (char str1, char str2 and int n)

|-
| 01:43
| It will compare first n characters of string 2 with string 1

|-
| 01:49
| eg. int strncmp(char ice, char icecream, int 2);

|-
| 01:56
| The output will be 0

|-
| 01:58
| Now we will see how to use the string library functions.

|-
| 02:03
| I am going to show you some of the commonly used string functions.

|-
| 02:08
| I have already typed the program on the editor,

|-
| 02:11
| i will open it

|-
| 02:12
| Here we have the string length function

|-
| 02:15
| Note that our filename is strlen.c.

|-
| 02:20
| In this we will find the length of the string

|-
| 02:24
| These are the header files as '''stdio.h and string.h '''
|-
| 02:29
| This is our main function

|-
| 02:32
| Here we have a character variable ''''arr'''',

|-
| 02:36
| It stores a value ''''Ashwini''''

|-
| 02:39
| Then we have an integer variable '''len1 '''

|-
| 02:43
| here we will find the lenght of the string using''' strlen''' funtion

|-
| 02:49
|the result will be stored in '''len1'''

|-
| 02:53
| Then we print the string and the length of the string.

|-
| 02:57
|And this is our return statement

|-
| 02:59
|Now let us execute the program

|-
| 03:02
|Open the terminal window by pressing

|-
| 03:04
|'''Ctrl, Alt''' and '''T''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard

|-
| 03:10
| To compile

|-
| 03:11
|Type: "gcc" space "strlen.c" space “-o” space “str1”.

|-
| 03:19
|Press Enter

|-
| 03:20
| type: '''./str1'''

|-
| 03:23
|Press Enter

|-
| 03:24
| The output is displayed as

|-
| 03:26
|'''string = Ashwini, Length = 7'''

|-
| 03:30
|You can count here. 1,2,3,4,5,6, and 7

|-
| 03:38
| Let us see another string function

|-
| 03:41
|Here we have the string copy fuction

|-
| 03:43
| Note that our filename is '''strcpy.c'''.

|-
| 03:49
| In this we will copy the source string into the target string

|-
| 03:54
|Here we have Ice in the source string, it will be copied to the target string .

|-
| 04:00
| This is our '''strcpy ''' function

|-
| 04:03
| Here we print the source string and the target string

|-
| 04:07
| Let us execute and see

|-
| 04:09
|Come back to our terminal

|-
| 04:11
| | To compile type

|-
| 04:12
|'''gcc''' space '''strcpy.c '''space '''-o '''space '''str2'''

|-
| 04:19
|Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 04:21
|Type '''./str2 '''

|-
| 04:23
|Press''' Enter'''

|-
| 04:25
| The output is displayed as

|-
| 04:27
|source string = Ice

|-
| 04:30
|target string = Ice

|-
| 04:32
| Now let us see another string function

|-
| 04:35
| Now we will see the string compare function

|-
| 04:38
|Note that our filename is '''strcmp.c'''

|-
| 04:43
|In this we will comapre two strings

|-
| 04:47
|Here we have character variables as '''str1''' and '''str2 '''
'
|-
| 04:53
| '''str 1''' stores the value as ''''Ice'''' and ''' str2 '''stores the value as ''''Cream'.'''

|-
| 04:59
|Here we have interger variables as''' i '''and''' j'''

|-
| 05:04
|In this we will compare the string using the''' strcmp''' function

|-
|05: 09
|Here we compare str1 ie: 'Ice' with 'Hello'

|-
| 05:14
|The result is stored in '''i'''

|-
| 05:17
|In this we will compare string 2 ie: 'Cream' with 'Cream'

|-
| 05:23
|The result is stored in ''' j'''

|-
| 05:25
|Then we print both the results

|-
| 05:28
|and this is our return statement

|-
| 05:31
| Let us execute the program.

|-
| 05:33
|Come back to our terminal.

|-
| 05:35
| To compile type

|-
| 05:37
|'''gcc''' space '''strcmp.c '''space '''-o''' space '''str3 '''

|-
| 05:46
|Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 05:48
|Type '''./str3'''

|-
| 05:51
|The outpur is displayed as 1,0

|-
| 05:55
| Come back to our program

|-
| 05:57
|Here we get 1

|-
| 055:59
|and here we get as 0

|-
| 06:02
|Let us move back to our slides

|-
| 06:04
|Let us summarize,

|-
| 06:06
| In this tutorial we learned,

|-
| 06:08
|String library functions

|-
| 06:09
| strlen()

|-
| 06:11
| strcpy()

|-
| 06:13
| strcmp()
|-
| 06:15
| strncpy()

|-
| 06:17
| and strncmp()

|-
| 06:20
| As an assignemnt,

|-
| 06:21
|Write a C Program to concatenate String best and String bus.

|-
| 06:25
|Hint: strcat(char str1, char str2);

|-
| 06:33
|Also explore the other functions in string library.

|-
| 06:37
| Watch the video available at the link shown below http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 06:40
|It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 06:43
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
| 06:47
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 06:49
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 06:52
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 06:56
|For more details, please write to contact [at] spoken hyphen tutorial dot org

|-
| 07:04
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 07:08
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 07:16
|More information on this Mission is available at: http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 07:21
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay.

|-
| 07:24
|Thank you for joining.

|}

C-and-C++/C2/First-C-Program/English-timed

2013-07-16T10:05:09Z

Sneha:

{| border = 1

|'''Time'''

|'''Narration'''

|-
| 00.02
| | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on First C program.

|-
| 00.06
| In this tutorial, we will learn

|-
| 00.08
| How to write a simple C program

|-
| 00.11
| How to compile it

|-
| 00.13
| How to execute it

|-
| 00.14
|We will also explain some common errors and their solutions.

|-
|00.19
| | To record this tutorial, I am using

|-
| 00.21
|Ubuntu operating system version 11.10 and gcc Compiler version 4.6.1 on Ubuntu

|-
| 00.31
| To practice this tutorial,

|-
| 00.33
|You should be familiar with Ubuntu Operating System and an Editor

|-
| 00.39
|Some editors are '''vim''' and '''gedit'''

|-
| 00.42
|I will use gedit in this tutorial

|-
| 00.46
|For relevant tutorials please visit our website: [http://spoken-tutorial.org/ http://spoken-tutorial.org]

|-
|00.51
| Let me tell you how to write a C program through an example

|-
| 00.56
|Open the terminal window by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt and T '''keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 01.07
| Now let's open the text editor. So, at the prompt, type

|-
| 01.12
|'''“gedit”''' space '''“talk”''' dot '''“c”''' space “&”'''

|-
| 01.20
|'''We use ampersand (&) to free up the prompt '''

|-
| 01.25
| Please note that all the '''C''' files will have extension dot '''“c”'''

|-
|01.31
| Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 01.33
| the text editor has opened

|-
| 01.37
| Let us start to write a program

|-
| 01.39
| Type double slash '''“//”''' space

|-
| 01.42
|'''“My first C program”.'''

|-
|01.48
| Here, double slash is used to comment the line

|-
| 01.52
|Comments are used to understand the flow of program

|-
| 01.56
|It is useful for documentation

|-
| 01.58
|It gives us information about the program

|-
| 02.01
|The double slash is called as single line comment.

|-
| 02.07
| Now press '''Enter'''

|-
|02.09
|Type hash '''“#include”''' space opening bracket , closing bracket'''

|-
| 02.17
| It is always a good practice to complete the brackets first, and then start writing inside it

|-
| 02.24
| Now Inside the bracket, type'''“stdio”''' dot”.” “'''h” '''

|-
| 02.30
| '''stdio.h''' is a '''header file'''

|-
| 02.33
|A '''program''' must contain this header file when it uses standard '''input/output functions'''.Now press Enter

|-
| 02.43
| type '''“int” '''space''' “main” '''opening bracket,
closing bracket '''“()”. '''

|-
| 02.50
| | ' '''main''' is a special '''function'''
|-
| 02.52
|It denotes that the execution of the program begins from this line

|-
| 02.58
|The opening bracket and closing bracket is called as parenthesis.

|-
| 03.04
| Parenthesis followed by '''main''' is to tell the user that '''main''' is a '''function'''

|-
| 03.11
| Here the '''int''' '''main function''' takes no '''arguments'''

|-
| 03.15
|It returns a value of type '''integer'''.

|-
| 03.19
| We will learn about '''data types''' in another tutorial.

|-
| 03.23
| Now Let us switch to the slides to know more about '''main function'''. Let us go to the next slide.

|-
| 03.30
| Every '''program'''should have one main function

|-
| 03.33
|There should NOT be more than one main function

|-
| 03.37
|Otherwise the compiler cannot locate the beginning of the program

|-
| 03.41
|The empty pair of parentheses indicates that main has no '''arguments'''

|-
| 03.46
|The concept of arguments will be discussed in detail in the upcoming tutorials.

|-
| 03.52
| Now let us come back to our program. Press Enter.

|-
| 03.58
| Type opening curly brace '''“{”'''

|-
| 04.00
|The opening curly bracket marks the beginning of the '''function''' '''main'''.

|-
| 04.05
|Then Type closing curly bracket '''“}”'''

|-
| 04.08
|The closing curly bracket indicates the end of the '''function''' '''main'''.

|-
| 04.13
| Now Inside the bracket

|-
| 04.14
|press '''Enter''' twice, move the cursor one line up

|-
| 04.20
| Indentation makes the code easier to read

|-
| 04.23
|It also helps to locate errors faster

|-
| 04.26
|So let us give three space here

|-
| 04.29
| And Type''' “printf” ''' opening bracket closing bracket '''“()” '''

|-
| 04.34
|'''printf '''is a standard C function to print the output on the terminal

|-
| 04.39
| Here inside the brackets, within double quotes,

|-
| 04.44
|Anything within the double quotes in the printf statement will be printed on the terminal.

|-
| 04.50
|Type'''“Talk To a Teacher '''backslash '''n”'''

|-
| 05.00
|Backslash n '''“\n” '''signifies newline

|-
| 05.03
|As a result, after execution of the '''printf '''function, the cursor moves to the new line

|-
| 05.11
| Every '''C''' statement must end with a '''semicolon “;”'''

|-
| 05.15
|Hence, type it at the end of this line.

|-
| 05.19
|'''Semicolon''' acts as a statement terminator.

|-
|05.24
|Now press '''Enter''' give three space here

|-
|05.28
| And type '''“return”''' space''' “0”''' and a '''semicolon''' '''“;”'''

|-
| 05.34
| This statement returns the integer zero

|-
| 05.38
|An integer has to be returned for this function because the function type is '''int'''

|-
| 05.45
|The '''return''' statement marks the end of executable statements

|-
| 05.51
|We will learn more about the returned values in another tutorial.

|-
| 05.56
| Now click on"'''Save'''" button to save the file

|-
| 06.00
|It is a good habit to save files frequently

|-
| 06.03
|This will protect you from sudden power failures

|-
| 06.06
|It will also be useful in case the applications were to crash.

|-
| 06.10
| Let us now compile the program come back to a terminal.

|-
| 06.15
|Type '''“gcc”''' space '''“talk.c”''' space hyphen “-'''o”''' space '''“myoutput”'''

|-
| 06.24
| '''gcc''' is the compiler

|-
| 06.27
|'''talk.c''' is our filename .
|-
| 06.30
|'''-o''' '''myoutput''' says that the executable should go to the file '''myoutput'''

|-
| 06.37
| Now Press''' Enter. '''

|-
| 06.39
|We see that the program is compiled

|-
| 06.42
|By typing '''ls -lrt''', we can see that '''myoutput''' is the last file to be created

|-
| 06.54
|To execute the program, type dot slash '''“./myoutput” ''' press '''Enter.'''

|-
|07.01
| Here the output is displayed as '''“Talk To a Teacher”.'''

|-
| 07.06
| As I said before, return is the last statement to be executed

|-
| 07.10
|Thus after the return statement nothing will be executed. Let us try it out.

|-
|07.15
| come back to our program.

|-
| 07.17
| After the '''return''' statement, let us include one more '''printf''' statement give space here type printf("Welcome \n") at the end type a semicolon.

|-
| 07.35
| Now click on save.

|-
| 07.37
|Let us compile and execute come back to our terminal.

|-
|07.41
| you can recall the previously entered commands by using '''up arrow'''key.

|-
| 07.46
|That is what I did now

|-
| 07.51
|We see that the second statements '''welcome''' is not executed

|-
| 07.58
| Now come back to our program

|-
| 08.00
|Let us write the 'Welcome' statement above the return statement

|-
| 08.07
| Click on Save.

|-
| 08.09
|Let us compile and execute

|-
| 08.15
|We see that the second '''printf''' statement ''welcome'' has also has been executed

|-
| 08.23
| Now let us see the common errors which we can come across. Come back to our program.

|-
| 08.29
| Suppose here I will the miss the dot in '''“stdio.h”''' Click on save.

|-
| 08.36
| Let us compile and execute .

|-
| 08.41
|We see that

|-
| 08.42
|There is a fatal error at line no.2 in our '''talk.c''' file.

|-
| 08.48
|The compiler cannot find a '''header file''' with the name '''“stdioh”'''hence it is giving an error no such file or directory.

|-
| 08.59
|And the compilation is terminated.
|-
| 09.03
|Let us now fix the error come back to a program Reinsert the dot '''“.”'''click on save

|-
| 09.11
| Let us compile and execute.Yes It is working.

|-
| 09.19
| I will show you another common error

|-
|09.22
|Let us switch back to the program.

|-
| 09.26
| Now, suppose here i will miss the '''semicolon''' at the end of the line

|-
| 09.31
| Click on '''Save'''.Let us compile and execute

|-
| 09.41
| We see that there is an error at line no.6 in our talk.c file. That expected ''semicolon'' before printf.
|-
| 09.51
|Come back to our program. As i said before semicolon acts as a statement terminator

|-
| 09.59
|So it will search for it at the end of the line.5 and at the beginning of the line.6.

|-
| 10.07
| This is line 6

|-
| 10.09
| This is the last place where you can put the '''semicolon'''

|-
| 10.13
|Recall that the compiler also give the error message on line 6.

|-
| 10.18
| Let us try what happens if we put the semicolon here.

|-
| 10.24
| Click on '''Save''' .

|-
| 10.26
|Let us Compile and execute.Yes it is working

|-
| 10.33
|Now come back to our program. Let us type the ''semicolon'' here at the end of this line.

|-
| 10.41
| As it is a conventional practice to type the ''semicolon'' at the end of the line. Now click on save.

|-
| 10.49
| Let us Compile and execute. .Yes it is working.

|-
| 10.49
|Now let us go back to our slides.

|-
|10.57
| As an Assignment

|-
| 10.59
|Write a program to print "Welcome to the World of C"

|-
| 11.03
|See what happens if '''“\n”''' is not included in the '''printf''' statement.

|-
| 11.09
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial

|-
| 11.12
| Watch the video available at the link shown below, http://spokentutorial.org/What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 11.15
|It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 11.18
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
| 11.22
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team

|-
| 11.24
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 11.28
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
| 11.32
|For more details, please write to contact [at] spoken hyphen tutorial dot org

|-
|11.38
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project

|-
| 11.42
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India

|-
| 11.48
|More information on this Mission is available at the link shown below: http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro

|-
| 11.51
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay. Thank you for joining.

|}

Spoken-Tutorial-Technology/C2/Dubbing-a-spoken-tutorial-using-Movie-Maker/English-timed

2013-07-16T09:24:21Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 !Time !Narration |- |00:04 |Hello friends. On behalf of CDEEP, IIT Bombay, I welcome you to this Spoken Tutorial. |- |00:11 |This tutorial will explain how to dub a…'

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:04
|Hello friends. On behalf of CDEEP, IIT Bombay, I welcome you to this Spoken Tutorial.

|-
|00:11
|This tutorial will explain how to dub a spoken tutorial or a movie clip from one language into another through a step-by-step process.

|-
|00:20
|All you need is a headset with an audio input or a stand-alone microphone and speakers which can be attached to your computer.

|-
|00:30
|Windows Movie Maker, a component of Microsoft Windows, is an editing software that is available for all the latest Windows versions – Me, XP or Vista.

|-
|00:43
|If you do not have it on your computer, you can download it free of cost from the site www.microsoft.com/downloads.

|-
|00:56
|Double-click on the Windows Movie Maker, icon to run it. This will open an empty Movie project on your screen.

On the left hand side, you will see the Movie Tasks Panel.

|-
|01:11
|There are several options in this panel.

The first option is Capture Video. Under this option, you will see the Import Video sub-option. Click on it.

|-
|01:24
|This will open the Import Video dialog box. Go to the location where the file-to-be-dubbed.wmv is present.

I will choose the file and click on Import.

|-
|01:38
|The video is being imported into Windows Movie Maker.

The video will now be displayed in the Collections Panel. If the video is large, then Windows Movie Maker will automatically split the video into clips.

|-
|01:54
|Select all of them by pressing CTRL+A. Now, right-click on the clips and choose ADD TO TIMELINE option.

The video clips will be added to the Timeline here.

|-
|02:07
|Click on the PLUS button next to Video. You will be able to view the Audio Timeline now.

Select a clip by clicking on it. Now right-click and choose the SELECT ALL option.

|-
|02:22
|All the audio clips will be selected. Now go to the Main Menu. Choose Clip, Audio and Mute.

The video is now without audio. Click on the MINUS button next to Video.

|-
|02:41
|Notice the frame head which indicates the current position on the timeline.

By default, the frame head is at the start of the timeline.

|-
|02:51
|Next click on Tools in the Main Menu and choose Narrate Timeline sub-option.

This will take you to the Narrate Timeline screen. First of all, you have to select the Input Level for the narration.

|-
|03:10
|When choosing the input level, select a level towards the upper portion of the meter without entering the red-colored area, which is marked by the second line from the top.

|-
|03:23
|If the capturing level is set too low, the captured audio may not be heard.

Conversely, if the capturing level is set too high, the captured audio may be too loud and distorted.

|-
|03:38
|Now click on the Start Narration button to begin capturing the audio narration to your computer.

Speak normally into the microphone. Let me do a small demo for you.

|-
|03:51
|I’ll set the input level to this mark and move the frame-head to this position because this is from where the narration in the original video begins. Now I will click on Start Narration.

|-
|04:06
|“Doston, CDEEP, IIT Bombay ki taraf se, main iss tutorial mein aap ka swagat karti hoon.

Yeh tutorial CamStudio ki abhyas karne mein aap ki madad karegi.”

|-
|04:18
|I will stop capturing the narration by clicking on the Stop Narration button.

Please note that one can stop the narration at any time.

|-
|04:28
|Movie Maker will ask you to save the narration as an audio file on your computer.

A dialog box will open wherein you will be prompted to specify the filename and the path that you want the recorded audio clip to be saved in.

|-
|04:44
|I will choose this folder and give this name. Click on Save.

|-
|04:53
|Once you have saved the audio file, you will find that the recorded audio appears in the Audio timeline.

You can move the audio clip to any location by clicking on it and sliding it on the timeline.

|-
|05:09
|Now is a good time to talk about saving the entire work as a project.

Saving a project will allow you to continue dubbing from where you left. Press CTRL + S.

|-
|05:21
|When you do it the first time, you will be prompted for a file name.

Let me save this project as this filename - Dubbed_into_Hindi.

|-
|05:32
| Click on Save. All future CTRL + S will automatically save into this project file.

|-
|05:40
|You can exit from Movie Maker after saving into the project file and resume dubbing at any future convenient time.

|-
|05:48
|Just click on File > Open Project and choose the project you want to open.

|-
|05:55
|Ensure that the frame head is positioned at the point from where you want to continue and start dubbing once again as you did before.

|-
|06:03
|Remember to save the project often during the dubbing.

|-
|06:08
|Once the narration for the entire spoken tutorial is complete, you should create a movie.

To do that, go to the Movie Tasks Panel.

|-
|06:18
|Go to Finish Movie. Choose the first option - Save to my computer. Click on it.

This will open the Save Movie Wizard dialog box.

|-
|06:29
|Enter the file name for your dubbed movie and specify the path.

I will give this filename and choose this path.

|-
|06:36
|“Hindi_Dub_file.” Click on the Next button. Here you can choose the output file quality.

|-
|06:46
|Let me explain this in detail.

Choosing “Best quality for playback on my computer” will give a high quality video but with a large file size.

|-
|06:55
|Choosing “Best fit to file size” will give a lower quality video but with a smaller file size.

|-
|07:04
|Choosing “Other settings” will display all the saving options available in which the resultant video can be saved.

|-
|07:12
|So depending on how you are going to view or where you are going to upload the video, you will have to choose the appropriate quality option.

|-
|07:20
|I’m going to choose Best fit for file size and 30MB.

The view dimensions will be 640*480 pixels and the frame rate will be 30fps.

|-
|07:35
|As the file to be dubbed is also of this dimension and as I want the dubbed movie to have the same dimensions, I will choose this option.

|-
|07:45
|If this is not a requirement, you may choose a number smaller than 30MB for eg- 25 MB.

Notice that the view dimensions have become smaller.

|-
|07:58
|I will go back and change this to 30 MB and click on NEXT.

The movie will be saved on your computer.

|-
|08:16
|Click on Finish. And Exit Windows Movie Maker.

|-
|08:24
|So, you see, by following this procedure, you will be able to create dubbed versions of any spoken tutorial or movie clip in a few simple steps.

|-
|08:36
|Hope you find this information helpful.

|-
|08:39
|This is Nancy from CDEEP, IIT Bombay signing off.Thank you for watching.

Spoken-Tutorial-Technology/C2/Editing-a-spoken-tutorial-using-Movie-Maker/English-timed

2013-07-16T09:14:16Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 !Time !Narration |- |00.04 |Hello friends. On behalf of CDEEP, IIT Bombay, I welcome you to this Spoken Tutorial. |- |00.11 |This tutorial will explain the basics of…'

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00.04
|Hello friends. On behalf of CDEEP, IIT Bombay, I welcome you to this Spoken Tutorial.

|-
|00.11
|This tutorial will explain the basics of how to edit a video using Windows Movie Maker.

|-
|00.19
|Windows Movie Maker, a component of Microsoft Windows, is an editing software that is available for all the latest Windows versions – Me, XP or Vista

|-
|00.31
|If you do not have it on your PC, you can download it free of cost from the site www.microsoft.com/downloads.

|-
|00.42
|You will need a headset or speakers in order to listen to the audio of the movie clip.

|-
|00.47
|Double-click on the Windows Movie Maker icon to run the program.

|-
|00.52
|This will open an empty movie project on your screen.

|-
|00.57
|Right at the top you will see the Main Menu.

|-
|01.00
|It contains many options which we will see in detail as we go along.

|-
|01.05
|On the screen, you will see a Movie Tasks panel on the left hand side, a Collection panel in the middle and a Display panel on the right hand side.

|-
|01.17
|If this is your first time using Windows Movie Maker, the Collection panel will be empty.

|-
|01.23
|All the video clips, audio narrations and music files required for the project, when imported, will be displayed in the Collection panel.

|-
|01.32
|If you have used the program before, the video and audio clips that were previously imported will appear in your Collection panel.

|-
|01.42
|Select all the clips in the Collection panel by pressing CRTL+A. Right-click on any clip and choose the Delete option.

|-
|01.52
|Now that you have an empty movie project on your screen, you can import the files you require into Windows Movie Maker.

|-
|01.59
|The Movie Tasks panel has several options – the main ones being Capture Video, Edit Movie and Finish Movie.

|-
|02.09
|There is another option called the Movie Making Tips. Under Capture Video, you will see the option Import Video.

|-
|02.19
|Click on it. Alternately, you can click on File in the Main Menu and choose the Import into Collections sub-option.

|-
|02.30
|Both choices will open the Import File Dialog box. Here you can choose the video that you want to edit by specifying the path and the filename.

|-
|02.39
|I will choose this video and click on the Import button. The selected video is being imported into the Collection panel.

|-
|02.53
|If the video is too large, then Windows Movie Maker will automatically split it into smaller clips.

|-
|02.58
|Select all of them by pressing CTRL+A. Now right-click on any clip and choose Add to Timeline sub-option.

|-
|03.12
|The clips will get added to the Timeline here in the order they appear in the Collection panel.

|-
|03.17
|If you want, you can also add the clips to the Timeline one by one, by dragging the clip and dropping it on the Timeline. Let me put this back.

|-
|03.30
|Vista users kindly note that Windows Movie Maker played in Windows Vista will not split the video into smaller clips.

|-
|03.39
|It will be visible as a single clip in the collection panel. So again, right-click on the video clip and choose Add to Timeline option.

|-
|03.49
|This will add the entire video to the Timeline in a single clip.

|-
|03.54
|Notice the small blue rectangle at the top of the Timeline. This is called the frame-head.

|-
|04.00
|It shows the current position of the video on the Timeline. By default, it is at the beginning of the Timeline.

|-
|04.09
|Click on the first clip. The first frame or the beginning of the video will now be visible in the Display panel here.

|-
|04.19
|When the video is being played, it will be visible in the Display panel. You will notice that there are VCR controls at the bottom of the Display panel.

|-
|04.30
|Before I explain them, let me move the frame head here.

|-
|04.38
|The first button is to Play or Pause. When in the Play mode, the frame head moves forward.

|-
|04.46
|When in the Pause mode, the frame head remains at the current position.

|-
|04.51
|The second button is to Stop the playback.

|-
|04.55
|When clicked the playback will stop but the frame head will go to the beginning of the Timeline.

|-
|05.03
|Let me move the frame head here. The third button is to Rewind one clip at a time.

|-
|05.15
|Notice that the frame head moves backward one clip at a time.

|-
|05.21
|The sixth button is to Fast Forward one clip at a time

|-
|05.25
|Notice that the frame head moves forward one clip at a time.

|-
|05.32
|The fourth and fifth buttons are to Rewind and Fast Forward one frame at a time.

|-
|05.40
|Notice that the frame head is moving one frame at a time.

|-
|05.49
|Now this button here is called the Split button. It splits the clip into two clips at the current position - both the video and the audio clips.

|-
|06.01
|Let me demonstrate this. I will move the frame-head here and click on the Split button.

|-
|06.08
|Notice that the clip is now split into 2 clips at the current position. This is a powerful editing tool.

|-
|06.18
|Now, let me explain the layout of the Timeline.

|-
|06.22
|The Timeline is split into three categories – Video, Audio/Music, and Title Overlay. Click on the plus-button next to Video.

|-
|06.35
|This will expand the Video timeline and display the audio timeline therein. This is useful for dubbing purposes.

|-
|06.44
|I have already explained about dubbing in another tutorial. You may want to watch it.

|-
|06.51
|I will collapse the Video Timeline now by clicking on the minus button next to Video.

|-
|06.58
|Above the timeline there are several icons that could help during the editing.

|-
|07.06
|The Zoom In button stretches the Video Timeline so that each frame of the video can be edited.

|-
|07.15
|The Zoom Out button collapses the Video Timeline so that you can view the whole video on the Timeline.

|-
|07.24
|This button is the Rewind Timeline button.

|-
|07.26
|Whenever you press it, the frame head will move to the beginning of your video.

|-
|07.32
|This is the Play Timeline button. Clicking on it will play the video in the display panel.

|-
|07.40
|This Play button behaves exactly like the VCR control Play button.

|-
|07.46
|For more information on the various features of Windows Movie Maker, the Moving Making Tips option in the Movie Tasks panel can be explored.

|-
|07.57
|Now that I have explained the basic layout of the Windows Movie Maker screen, let’s come back to the Timeline and learn how to add or remove portions from a video.

|-
|08.09
|I will zoom in here. Once you have imported the video, play it from start to finish and make a note of the portions that you want to edit.

|-
|08.25
|I want to remove a few seconds of video from here.

|-
|08.30
|So I will move the frame head here and play the clip.

|-
|08.36
|I will pause the playback here because this is the beginning of the part that I want to delete.

|-
|08.42
|Now I will click on the Split button.

|-
|08.46
|Notice that the clip is now split at this position.

|-
|08.50
|I will resume the playback and again pause at the end of the part that I want to delete.

|-
|08.57
|Click on the Split button again. Notice that the clip is again split at this position.

|-
|09.04
|I’ll just move it back so you can see. Now I will select the clip by clicking on it and press the Delete on the keyboard.

|-
|09.15
|Notice that the next clip moves forward and joins the end of the previous clip.

|-
|09.22
|Movie Maker does this on its own so that there is continuity in the video.

|-
|09.27
|Always remember that whenever you delete a portion of a clip both the video as well as the audio gets deleted.

|-
|09.35
|In this way, one can delete portions from a video.

|-
|09.39
|Now I will demonstrate how to add an extra clip to an existing video.

|-
|09.44
|I have a small clip that I would like to include into my video.

|-
|09.49
|So, I will import it into the Collection panel by clicking on Import Video.

|-
|09.55
|This is the file that I want to import so I will select it and click on the Import button.

|-
|10.03
|The clip is now being imported into the Collection panel.

|-
|10.08
|The clip now appears in the Collection panel.

|-
|10.12
|I will choose the clip by clicking on it and drag it to the position that I want it to appear on the Timeline.

|-
|10.19
|I will release the mouse button and my clip is added at the current position.

|-
|10.27
|Please note that you can add a new clip at the beginning or at the end of another clip on the Timeline and not in between.

|-
|10.36
|If you want to add in between then you will have to split the clip which is on the Timeline and add the new clip there.

|-
|10.44
|In this way, one can add portions to a video. This procedure can be used to combine two or more videos.

|-
|10.52
|Another feature that I would like to demonstrate is how one can extend the length of a clip or a portion of a clip.

|-
|11.01
|This feature is particularly useful while dubbing.

|-
|11.04
|Sometimes the language in which one is dubbing may need more words to explain the same thing said in the original language of the video.

|-
|11.13
|At such times, one may need to extend the time of the video clip to synchronize with the audio.

|-
|11.21
|Select the portion of the video that you want to extend by following the procedure explained above about deleting portions.

|-
|11.29
|I will demonstrate this. I will move the frame-head here - Split the video here – Play and pause – Split the video again - Select the clipped part – Right-click and select Copy - Move the frame head to the position where I want to paste it – Right-click and select Paste.

|-
|11.56
|Alternately, you can press CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste. In this manner, I have extended the clip by the required number of seconds.

|-
|12.08
|It is always better to extend a clip to a longer duration and then cut off the portion that you do not require at the end of editing.

|-
|12.18
|Ideally choose a portion without mouse movement otherwise there will be a repetition of the mouse movement in the pasted clip as well.

|-
|12.27
|This could lead to confusion for the viewer.

|-
|12.29
|So, that is something we need to keep in mind when we copy and paste to extend the video.

|-
|12.38
|This covers the basic editing features of Windows Movie Maker.

|-
|12.43
|So, use these features of Windows Movie Maker to edit your video.

|-
|12.49
|As mentioned earlier, you may want to watch the tutorial on How to Dub a video from one language into another.

|-
|12.57
|Once you are conversant with basic editing and dubbing, you may want to watch yet another tutorial on how to add some cool video effects and transitions, titles or credits and audio or music to your video.

|-
|13.13
|Viewers may also want to refer to our site www.spoken-tutorial.org This site contains all information related to the making, editing, dubbing of spoken tutorials for all operating systems.

|-
|13.32
|Hope you find this information helpful. This is Nancy from CDEEP, IIT Bombay signing off. Good-bye and thank you for watching.

C-and-C++/C2/If-And-Else-If-statement/English-timed

2013-07-16T07:08:17Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration''

|-
| 00.02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Conditional statements in C and C++'''

|-
| 00.09
| In this tutorial we will learn,

|-
| 00.11
| how to execute a single '''statement'''.

|-
| 00.14
| How to execute group of '''statements'''.

|-
| 00.17
| We will do this through examples.

|-
| 00.20
| We will also see some common errors and their solutions.

|-
| 00.25
| To record this tutorial, I am using, '''Ubuntu Operating system''' version 11.10.

|-
| 00.32
| '''gcc''' and '''g++ Compiler''' version 4.6.1

|-
| 00.38
| Let us start with the Introduction to condition '''statements'''.

|-
| 00.43
| A '''statement''' in a program controls the flow of program execution.

|-
| 00.50
| It helps to make decision on, what code is to be executed.

|-
| 00.56
|We can check the conditions, whether true or false.

|-
| 01.01
| We can execute a single statement or a group of statements.

|-
| 01.08
| Let us understand the flow of if statements.

|-
| 01.13
| Here, if the condition is true then , '''statement1''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.20
| If the condition is false then '''statement2''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.29
| Now we will see the flow of else if '''statement''',

|-
| 01.33
| Here, if '''condition1''' is true then '''statement1''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.41
| If '''condition1''' is false then it will check for another condition that is '''condition2'''.

|-
| 01.50
| If '''condition2''' is true, then '''statement3''' will be executed.

|-
| 01.55
| And If '''condition2''' is false, then '''statement2''' will be executed

|-
| 02.03
| Now Let us move on to our program.

|-
| 02.06
| I have already typed the code on the editor.

|-
| 02.09
| So let me open it.

|-
| 02.13
| Note that our filename is '''ifstmt.c'''

|-
| 02.19
| In this program we will calculate the sum of two numbers and will check a few conditions.

|-
| 02.27
| Let me explain the code now.

|-
| 02.31
| This is our '''header file.'''

|-
| 02.34
| This is our '''main function.'''

|-
| 02.38
| Here we have declared three integer '''variables''' '''a, b and sum.'''

|-
| 02.48
| Here we are asking for user input.

|-
| 02.51
| User will enter the values of a and b.

|-
| 02.53
| The values will be stored in '''variable a''' and '''variable b.'''

|-
| 03.03
| 'scanf()''' reads data from the '''console.'''

|-
| 03.06
| It then stores the result in the given '''variable.'''

|-
| 03.10
| The''' format specifier '''in the''' scanf() '''helps to know the type of data.

|-
| 03.15
| Like here we have %d it denotes that we are dealing with integer data type.

|-
| 03.25
| Here we add the values of''' a''' and '''b.'''

|-
| 03.27
| We will store the result in '''sum.'''

|-
| 03.33
| Then we print the result.

|-
| 03.38
| This is our '''if statement.'''

|-
| 03.40
|Here, we check the condition whether '''sum''' is greater than 20.

|-
| 03.44
|If the condition is true, then we print '''Sum''' is greater than 20.

|-
| 03.51
| Now let me comment out these lines.

|-
|04.00
|This is our return statement.

|-
| 04.03
| Now click on '''Save'''

|-
| 04.05
|First we will see the execution of if statement.

|-
| 04.10
| Please open the terminal window by pressing,'''Ctrl, Alt and T''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
|04.27
| To compile type, '''gcc ifstmt.c -o if'''and press enter

|-
| 04.38
| To execute type, '''./if''' press enter

|-
| 04.44
| it is displayed as,

|-
| 04.45
|Enter the value of a and b.

|-
| 04.50
|I will give the values as 10 and 12.

|-
| 04.58
|The output is displayed as Sum of a and b is 22. Sum is greater than 20.

|-
| 05.07
| Now come back to our program.

|-
| 05.10
| We will check another condition.

|-
| 05.14
|Let me remove the comment from here.

|-
| 05.20
|I will give the comment here.

|-
| 05.25
|Now click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 05.31
| This is our else-if statement.

|-
| 05.34
|Here, we check another condition whether '''Sum''' is greater than 10

|-
| 05.38
|If the condition is true. Then we print '''Sum''' is greater than 10 and less than 20.

|-
| 05.51
| Now come back to our terminal.

|-
| 05.53
|Let us compile as before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 06.00
| It is displayed as,

|-
| 06.01
|Enter the value of a and b.
|-
| 06.03
| I will give the values as 10 and 2.

|-
| 06.10
|The output is displayed as: Sum of a and b is 12.

|-
| 06.14
|Sum is greater than 10 and less than 20.

|-
| 06.18
|Let me clear the prompt. Now come back to our program.

|-
| 06.25
| I will remove the comment from here and here.Now click on save,

|-
| 06.39
| If both the conditions are false, then we print Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 06.48
|This is our else statement.

|-
| 06.52
| Now let us execute and see. come back to our terminal.

|-
| 06.56
|Let us compile as before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 07.02
| | Here it is displayed as,

|-
| 07.04
|Enter the value of a and b.

|-
| 07.06
|I will give the values as 3 and 5.

|-
| 07.12
| the output as, sum of a and b is 8.

|-
| 07.16
|Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 07.22
| Now we will see the common errors which we can come across.

|-
| 07.26
|Come back to our program.

|-
| 07.30
| Suppose, here at the end of if statement I will type a semicolon.

|-
| 07.36
|Let see what will happen.Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 07.39
| Let us execute. Come back to our terminal.

|-
| 07.42
|Let us compile as before.

|-
| 07.45
| We see an error: else without a previous if

|-
| 07.52
| Come back to our program.It is an syntax error.

|-
| 07.59
|If statement will never terminate with a semicolon.

|-
| 08.03
|And the else if statement will never work without an if.

|-
| 08.09
| Let us fix the error. Delete the ; here

|-
| 08.15
| Now Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 08.17
| Let us execute. Come back to the terminal.

|-
| 08.22
| Let us compile aa before. Let us execute as before.

|-
| 08.28
|Enter the value of a and b

|-
| 08.30
|I will give the value as 3 and 6.

|-
| 08.36
|The output is displayed as

|-
| 08.38
|Sum of a and b is 9. Sum is less than 10.

|-
| 08.47
| | NOW LET US SEE HOW TO EXECUTE THE SAME PROGRAM IN C++.

|-
| 08.52
|Come back to our program.

|-
| 08.54
| I will change a few things here.

|-
| 09.01
| Press '''Shift, Ctrl and S''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.'''

|-
| 08.11
|Now save the file with an extension .'''cpp''' and''' '''click''' '''on''' Save'''

|-
| 08.20
| We will change the header file as, '''iostream'''

|-
| 08.26
| Let us include the '''using '''statement here.

|-
| 08.30
| Now click on the search for and replace text option .
|-
| 08.36
|let us replace '''printf '''statement with '''cout''' '''statement.'''

|-
| 08.40
|Click on '''Replace all''' and click on '''Close'''

|-
| 08.46
| Now delete the closing brackets here.

|-
| 08.50
|Replace the '''scanf''' statement with the cin statement.

|-
| 08.55
|Type '''cin >>'''

|-
| 09.00
|As we use '''cin >> function''' to read a line in C++.

|-
| 09.06
| Now delete the '''format specifiers'''.

|-
| 09.09
|Delete the comma and &

|-
| 09.12
|Delete the comma here and type two closing angle brackets.

|-
| 09.17
|Again delete the & and the closing brackets Now Click on Save

|-
| 0925
| Here delete the closing bracket and the comma.

|-
| 09.32
|Now delete the \n and format specifier

|-
| 09.37
| Now Type two opening brackets

|-
| 09.42
|Again type two opening brackets ''' “\n”.'''

|-
| 09.49
|Here also we will delete the closing bracket.

|-
| 09.54
|Now again delete the closing bracket here and here.

|-
| 09.59
|Now Click on '''Save'''

|-
| 10.03
| Let us execute.

|-
| 10.04
|| Come back to the terminal.let me clear the prompt.

|-
| 10.10
|To compile type g++ ifstmt.cpp -o if1

|-
| 10.21
|Here we have if1 because we don't want to overwrite the output parameter for the file ifstmt.c

|-
| 10.31
|Now Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 10.33
|To execute type ./if1 Press '''Enter'''

|-
| 10.39
|Enter the value of a and b. I will give the values as 20 and 10.

|-
| 10.48
|The output is displayed as, Sum of a and b is 30.

|-
| 10.53
|Sum is greater than 20.

|-
| 10.57
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

|-
| 10.59
| Now come back to our slides.
|-
| 11.03
| Let us summarize.

|-
| 11.04
|In this tutorial we learned, if statement eg. if(condition)

{…........

}

|-
| 11.12
|else if statement eg. else if(condition)

{….........

}

|-
| 11.18
| As an assignment,

|-
| 11.19
|Write a program to check '''a''' is greater than '''b''' or less than '''b.'''

|-
| 11.24
|'''Hint: ''' use if statement.

|-
| 11.28
|Write another program to check which value is greater '''a,''' '''b''' or '''c.'''

|-
| 11.34
|'''Hint:''' use else-if statement.

|-
| 11.39
| Watch the video available at the link shown below. http://spoken-tutorial.org /What\_is\_a\_Spoken\_Tutorial

|-
| 11.41
|It summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

|-
| 11.44
|If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it.

|-
|11.49
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team,

|-
| 11.51
|Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials.

|-
| 11.54
|Gives certificates to those who pass an online test.

|-
| 11.58
|For more details, please write to, contact [at] spoken hyphen tutorial dot org.

|-
| 12.05
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project.

|-
| 12.09
|It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India.

|-
| 12.16
|More information on this Mission is available at the link shown below. (http://spoken-tutorial.org\NMEICT-Intro)

|-
| 12.21
| This is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay

Thank You for joining

|}

C-and-C++/C3/Working-With-2D-Arrays/English-timed

2013-07-15T11:52:35Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on '''2dimensional Arrays''' in '''C''' and '''C++.'''

|-
|00:08
| In this tutorial we will learn,

|-
| 00:11
| What is a 2dimensional '''array.'''

|-
| 00:13
| We will do this through an example.

|-
| 00:16
| To record this tutorial, I am using

|-
|00:19
| '''Ubuntu Operating System''' version 11.10,

|-
| 00:23
| '''gcc''' and '''g++''' '''Compiler''' version 4.6.1 on Ubuntu

|-
| 00:30
| Let us start with the introduction to '''2 dimensional Array'''

|-
| 00:34
| '''2-D arrays are stored in a row column matrix.'''

|-
| 00:38
| '''The left index indicates the row.'''

|-
| 00:42
| '''The right index indicates the column.''' '

|-
| 00:45
|'''Starting index of a matrix or array in C and C++ is always 0.'''

|-
| 00:52
| Here we see a '''2 dimensional array'''

|-
| 00:55
| In a row column matrix. Starting index is'''0'''

|-
| 01:01
| Now let us see how to declare a 2dimensional '''array'''

|-
| 01:05
| The Syntax for this is:
|-
| 01:07
| ''' data-type arr_name[row] [col]; '''

|-
| 01:13
| eg.''' Here we have declare a 2 dimensional array num[2][3]; '''

|-
| 01:22
|Now let us see an example
|-
| 01:24
| I have already typed the program
|-
| 01:26
|Let me open it.

|-
| 01:28
| Note that our file name is '''2d-array.c'''

|-
| 01:34
|In this program we will calculate, the sum of the elements of the 2dimensional arrays.

|-
| 01:41
| Let me explain the code now.
|-
| 01:44
| | This is our '''header file.'''

|-
| 01:47
| This is our '''main function'''.

|-
| 01:49
| Here, we have declared variable '''i''' and '''j'''.

|-
| 01:53
|Then we have declared num1 with 3rows and 4columns

|-
| 01:59
| And num2 again with 3rows and 4columns

|-
| 02:04
| ''' num1''' and '''num2''' are 2dimensional arrays
|-
| 02:08
| Here we take elements of the matrix '''num1''' as input from the user.

|-
| 02:14
| The elements are stored row-wise.

|-
| 02:17
| We have considered''' i''' for rows and ''' j '''for columns.

|-
| 02:23
| This for loop will check the condition that '''i''' runs from 0 to 2.

|-
| 02:28
| This for loop will check the condition that''' j''' runs from 0 to 3.

|-
| 02:34
|Similarly, here we take elements of the matrix '''num2''' as input from the user.

|-
| 02:41
| Here we display the matrix '''num1'''

|-
| 02:44
| Here''' %3d''' is used to align the matrix on the terminal.
|-
| 02:50
| Now here we display the matrix '''num2 '''

|-
| 02:53
| Then we add the '''num1''' matrix and the '''num2 '''matrix

|-
| 02:57
| And display the result

|-
| 03:00
| This is our return statement.

|-
| 03:02
| Now, click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 03:05
| Let us execute the program.

|-
| 03:08
| Please open the terminal window by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt''' and '''T''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 03:15
| To compile type,

|-
| 03:17
| '''gcc 2d-array.c -o arr''' and press '''enter'''

|-
| 03:29
| To execute type, ./ arr now press '''enter'''.

|-
| 03:34
| Here we see enter the element of''' 3 into 4 array num1'''.
|-
| 03:40
|I will enter the values now
|-
| 03:52
|Now we can see enter the element of''' 3 into 4 array num2'''

|-
| 03:58
| I will enter the values.
|-
| 04:11
|The output is displayed,

|-
| 04:13
|Here we can see the '''num1''' matrix.
|-
| 04:17
|here we can see the '''num2''' matrix.
|-
| 04:20
|And this is the sum of '''num1''' and '''num2'''
|-
| 04:24
| Now we will see how to execute the same program in C++.
|-
| 04:30
| I have already named the program. I will open it and explain.

|-
| 04:34
|This is the program for 2dimensional arrays in C++.
|-
| 04:39
|Note that our file name is ''2d-array.cpp'''. The extension is '''.cpp'''.
|-
| 04:48
| Let me explain the code now. This is our '''header file''' as '''iostream'''

|-
| 04:53
| This is our '''using''' statement.
|-
|04:56
|This is our '''main function'''

|-
|04:58
|Here we have '''cout'''function. As we use '''cout''' to print the output in C++.
|-
|05:06
| Then we have '''cin'' function, we use '''cin''' to read a line in C++

|-
|05:14
|Here we use '''\t''' it means horizontal tab that is equivalent to 4 spaces.
|-
| 05:21
| Rest of the code is similar to our '''c ''code .Now click on '''Save'''

|-
| 05:27
| Let us execute

|-
| 05:29
| Come back to our terminal

|-
| 05:31
| Let me clear the prompt.
|-
| 05:34
| To compile type, g++ 2d- array.cpp -o arr and press enter.

|-
| 05:47
| To execute type, ./arr1. Now press enter.
|-
| 05:53
| Here we see enter the element of 3 into 4 array num1.
|-
| 05:58
| I will enter the values.
|-
| 06:08
| Now we see enter the elements of 3 into 4 array num2.

|-
| 06:14
|I will give the values as
|-
| 06:24
| The output is displayed , We can see the '''num1 matrx''', '''num2 matrix'''.

|-
|06:32
| And this is the sum of num1 and num2.
|-
|06:36
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial.
|-
| 06:39
|Come back to our slides. Let us summarises

|-
| 06:43
| In this tutprial we learnt,

|-
| 06:45
| To add elements in a 2D array.

|-
| 06:49
| To print 2D array.

|-
| 06:51
| And To calculate the sum of 2D array.
|-
| 06:55
| As an assignment,

|-
| 06:56
| Write a program that takes two 2D arrays as input from the user.

|-
| 07:02
| Subtract them and find the result.

|-
| 07:05
| Watch the video available at the link shown below

|-
| 07:08
| It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 07:11
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 07:16
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
|-
| 07:18
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 07:21
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
|07:26
| For more details, please write to contact at spoken hyphen tutorial dot org

|-
| 07:33
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project
|-
| 07:37
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India
|-
| 07:44
|More information on this Mission is available at the link shown below.

|-
| 07:49
| The script is contributed by Ritwik Joshi , this is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for watching

|}

C-and-C++/C3/Working-With-2D-Arrays/English-timed

2013-07-15T11:51:34Z

Sneha: Created page with '{| border=1 || ''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on '''2dimensional Arrays''' in '''C''' and '''C++.''' |- |00:08 | In this tutorial we…'

{| border=1
|| ''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken-tutorial on '''2dimensional Arrays''' in '''C''' and '''C++.'''

|-
|00:08
| In this tutorial we will learn,

|-
| 00:11
| What is a 2dimensional '''array.'''

|-
| 00:13
| We will do this through an example.

|-
| 00:16
| To record this tutorial, I am using

|-
|00:19
| '''Ubuntu Operating System''' version 11.10,

|-
| 00:23
| '''gcc''' and '''g++''' '''Compiler''' version 4.6.1 on Ubuntu

|-
| 00:30
| Let us start with the introduction to '''2 dimensional Array'''

|-
| 00:34
| '''2-D arrays are stored in a row column matrix.'''

|-
| 00:38
| '''The left index indicates the row.'''

|-
| 00:42
| '''The right index indicates the column.''' '

|-
| 00:45
|'''Starting index of a matrix or array in C and C++ is always 0.'''

|-
| 00:52
| Here we see a '''2 dimensional array'''

|-
| 00:55
| In a row column matrix. Starting index is'''0'''

|-
| 01:01
| Now let us see how to declare a 2dimensional '''array'''

|-
| 01:05
| The Syntax for this is:
|-
| 01:07
| ''' data-type arr_name[row] [col]; '''

|-
| 01:13
| eg.''' Here we have declare a 2 dimensional array num[2][3]; '''

|-
| 01:22
|Now let us see an example
|-
| 01:24
| I have already typed the program
|-
| 01:26
|Let me open it.

|-
| 01:28
| Note that our file name is '''2d-array.c'''

|-
| 01:34
|In this program we will calculate, the sum of the elements of the 2dimensional arrays.

|-
| 01:41
| Let me explain the code now.
|-
| 01:44
| | This is our '''header file.'''

|-
| 01:47
| This is our '''main function'''.

|-
| 01:49
| Here, we have declared variable '''i''' and '''j'''.

|-
| 01:53
|Then we have declared num1 with 3rows and 4columns

|-
| 01:59
| And num2 again with 3rows and 4columns

|-
| 02:04
| ''' num1''' and '''num2''' are 2dimensional arrays
|-
| 02:08
| Here we take elements of the matrix '''num1''' as input from the user.

|-
| 02:14
| The elements are stored row-wise.

|-
| 02:17
| We have considered''' i''' for rows and ''' j '''for columns.

|-
| 02:23
| This for loop will check the condition that '''i''' runs from 0 to 2.

|-
| 02:28
| This for loop will check the condition that''' j''' runs from 0 to 3.

|-
| 02:34
|Similarly, here we take elements of the matrix '''num2''' as input from the user.

|-
| 02:41
| Here we display the matrix '''num1'''

|-
| 02:44
| Here''' %3d''' is used to align the matrix on the terminal.
|-
| 02:50
| Now here we display the matrix '''num2 '''

|-
| 02:53
| Then we add the '''num1''' matrix and the '''num2 '''matrix

|-
| 02:57
| And display the result

|-
| 03:00
| This is our return statement.

|-
| 03:02
| Now, click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 03:05
| Let us execute the program.

|-
| 03:08
| Please open the terminal window by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt''' and '''T''' keys simultaneously on your keyboard.

|-
| 03:15
| To compile type,

|-
| 03:17
| '''gcc 2d-array.c -o arr''' and press '''enter'''

|-
| 03:29
| To execute type, ./ arr now press '''enter'''.

|-
| 03:34
| Here we see enter the element of''' 3 into 4 array num1'''.
|-
| 03:40
|I will enter the values now
|-
| 03:52
|Now we can see enter the element of''' 3 into 4 array num2'''

|-
| 03:58
| I will enter the values.
|-
| 04:11
|The output is displayed,

|-
| 04:13
|Here we can see the '''num1''' matrix.
|-
| 04:17
|here we can see the '''num2''' matrix.
|-
| 04:20
|And this is the sum of '''num1''' and '''num2'''
|-
| 04:24
| Now we will see how to execute the same program in C++.
|-
| 04:30
| I have already named the program. I will open it and explain.

|-
| 04:34
|This is the program for 2dimensional arrays in C++.
|-
| 04:39
|Note that our file name is ''2d-array.cpp'''. The extension is '''.cpp'''.
|-
| 04:48
| Let me explain the code now. This is our '''header file''' as '''iostream'''

|-
| 04:53
| This is our '''using''' statement.
|-
|04:56
|This is our '''main function'''

|-
|04:58
|Here we have '''cout'''function. As we use '''cout''' to print the output in C++.
|-
|05:06
| Then we have '''cin'' function, we use '''cin''' to read a line in C++

|-
|05:14
|Here we use '''\t''' it means horizontal tab that is equivalent to 4 spaces.
|-
| 05:21
| Rest of the code is similar to our '''c ''code .Now click on '''Save'''

|-
| 05:27
| Let us execute

|-
| 05:29
| Come back to our terminal

|-
| 05:31
| Let me clear the prompt.
|-
| 05:34
| To compile type, g++ 2d- array.cpp -o arr and press enter.

|-
| 05:47
| To execute type, ./arr1. Now press enter.
|-
| 05:53
| Here we see enter the element of 3 into 4 array num1.
|-
| 05:58
| I will enter the values.
|-
| 06:08
| Now we see enter the elements of 3 into 4 array num2.

|-
| 06:14
|I will give the values as
|-
| 06:24
| The output is displayed , We can see the '''num1 matrx''', '''num2 matrix'''.

|-
|06:32
| And this is the sum of num1 and num2.
|-
|06:36
|This brings us to the end of this tutorial.
|-
| 06:39
|Come back to our slides. Let us summarises

|-
| 06:43
| In this tutprial we learnt,

|-
| 06:45
| To add elements in a 2D array.

|-
| 06:49
| To print 2D array.

|-
| 06:51
| And To calculate the sum of 2D array.
|-
| 06:55
| As an assignment,

|-
| 06:56
| Write a program that takes two 2D arrays as input from the user.

|-
| 07:02
| Subtract them and find the result.

|-
| 07:05
| Watch the video available at the link shown below

|-
| 07:08
| It summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

|-
| 07:11
| If you do not have good bandwidth, you can download and watch it

|-
| 07:16
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team
|-
| 07:18
| Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

|-
| 07:21
| Gives certificates for those who pass an online test

|-
|07:26
| For more details, please write to contact at spoken hyphen tutorial dot org

|-
| 07:33
| Spoken Tutorial Project is a part of the Talk to a Teacher project
|-
| 07:37
| It is supported by the National Mission on Education through ICT, MHRD, Government of India |-
| 07:44
|More information on this Mission is available at the link shown below.

|-
| 07:49
| The script is contributed by Ritwik Joshi , this is Ashwini Patil from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for watching

|}

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-8/English-timed

2013-07-12T10:59:03Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|0:00
|Welcome back! In our previous tutorial, we have established what we are going to change and how we are going to change it.
|-
|00:09
|We did go through that.
|-
|00:11
|So, now I will test my code.
|-
|00:13
|If we look at our database, we have a few records here.
|-
|00:17
|I am going to delete David's record here because it was from another tutorial.
|-
|00:23
|After the deletion, we have the records of Alex, Kyle, Emily and Dale
|-
|00:29
|Here I will use Kyle's record as an example and change it to a particular value.
|-
|00:34
|We will refresh our page and make sure it is updated.
|-
|00:38
|I will select "Kyle" and I will change this to "Karen" and I will click on "Change" and here everything has disappeared.
|-
|00:46
|Now we will come back into our table and click on "Browse" to refresh it.
|-
|00:50
|we will scroll down and find that nothing has changed.
|-
|00:58
|I think I made a mistake. My mistake was that it was "name" before and now I will change this to "value".
|-
|01:06
|This needs to be set to "value" instead of "name"
|-
|01:09
|"value" holds the value... of anything here that has been selected; so the value is "id".
|-
|01:15
|When we submit our form, it will come through and the value will be contained within here in "id".
|-
|01:25
|So, I found and fixed the problem and now I will go back and refresh.
|-
|01:30
|Here I will once again change "Kyle" to "Karen". By clicking on "Change" you can see that nothing has happened.
|-
|01:37
|Even when I enter my database, we can see that we have got Alex, Kyle, Emily and Dale.
|-
|01:42
|Since we had changed "Kyle" to "Karen", our id has shown visible changes.
|-
|01:47
|But when we click on "Browse" and scroll down, we can see that "Kyle" has now been replaced by "Karen".
|-
|01:54
|Hence, you can also update values using forms.
|-
|01:57
|It is very easy, as long as you have a standard knowledge of
* php software,
* how to manipulate things,
* how to check things,
* how to use if statements,
* passing variables,
* particularly the posting variables etc.
|-
|02:15
|You will be able to learn all this, as long as you learn the basic set of these tutorials.
|-
|02:20
|As if now, in this tutorial, you have learnt inserting and updating and so on so forth.
|-
|02:28
|The last thing I will show you is how to delete.
|-
|02:34
|To show you how to Delete, I will close this page and and remove this box and edit this.
|-
|02:46
|I will replace "Change" with "Delete".
|-
|02:49
|Here I will be deleting records where we have a particular name shown.
|-
|02:55
|To do this, I will add "lastname" over here.
|-
|03:01
|Let us now not resend that and let us go back to "mysql.php".
|-
|03:08
|Here we now have "Alex Garrett", "Karen Headen" which has been changed or modified from my last example.
|-
|03:17
|We will click "Karen Headen" and we will click on "Delete". This will delete the record.
|-
|03:24
|But it has not been deleted at the moment.
|-
|03:27
|Let us make sure all our records are intact first.
|-
|03:31
|As you can see here, we have all our records intact and I will choose to delete a particular record.
|-
|03:37
|Let us say delete "Emily Headen", so I will choose the record of Emily Headen to be deleted.
|-
|03:45
|Now we need to submit this to a new page called "mysql underscore delete.php".
|-
|03:52
|For this, we are going to create a new page save as mysql underscore delete.php
|-
|03:59
|We will do exactly the same as we had done before.
|-
|0 4:03
|We are going to "require" our connect so we need to connect to the database.
|-
|04:10
|Oh Sorry! Let us get that back to "require connect.php" and we will again take the variables in.
|-
|04:22
|So let us type "todelete" here and that is "equal to" again a "POST" variable here.
|-
|04:29
|We are posting this form to this page and let us change some values over here.
|-
|04:34
|Let us say "todelete".
|-
|04:37
|So we have changed our "select name" to "todelete".
|-
|04:41
|Now, if you have a look back on this form here, I will show you the code again.
|-
|04:47
|Here we can see that we have our name values and our id value here for each case of each record.
|-
|04:54
|If we refresh, the name of our form is "todelete" and we are taking that into account for each value.
|-
|05:01
|If Emily's record has been selected we will delete the record where the id is equal to 3.
|-
|05:08
|Let us go back to our code and here we have our POST variable.
|-
|05:14
|Now I am going to echo out to give you an example of how it is processed.
|-
|05:20
|We have Emily Headen here. We have 3 there which means that we can use this to delete the id 3 in the database or rather the table.
|-
|05:30
|Here, again we will create a new variable and I will call it "mysql underscore query".
|-
|05:41
|Inside here we will use a whole new set of commands.
|-
|05:45
|We will type in "DELETE FROM" and obviously we will specify our table.
|-
|05:52
|Let us type "people" and "WHERE id equals "todelete".
|-
|05:57
|The "todelete" variable which is the id of the person that we selected from this list.
|-
|06:03
|Now let us test this. Let us say Emily Headen.
|-
|06:08
|Let us check in our database if Emily Headen's record still exists.
|-
|06:13
|Let us refresh to see if the record still exists.
|-
|06:17
|When I click on "Emily Headen" and click on "Delete", nothing has happened.
|-
|06:22
|We have not echoed out but when we click on "Browse" to refresh, we can see that Emily's record has been deleted from the database.
|-
|06:30
|So in this set of tutorials, I have shown you a basic serve command like
* how to insert data
* how to read data
* how to modify
* how to delete data and
* how to incorporate into html forms.
|-
|06:43
|If I have forgotten anything, please let me know and I will add it as parts of these tutorials.
|-
|6:50
|Make sure you subscribe for updates from my channel.
|-
|06:53
|I hope you enjoyed these tutorials. Thanks for watching.
|-
|06:55
|This is Evan Varkey dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project. (Script contributed by Juanita Jayakar).

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-7/English-timed

2013-07-12T10:58:25Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:01
|In this part of the tutorial, I am going to give you a chance to create a simple program.
|-
|00:08
|This program will allow us to select a name from a list.
|-
|00:15
|Also it will allow us to update a piece of information and I am selecting the ability to update the name itself.
|-
|00:25
|I will say the "firstname" in this for example.
|-
|00:28
|Here, we can select from a list and then update that information.
|-
|00:33
|I will modify this page a little bit to get rid of some information which we do not need.
|-
|00:39
|We don't need this echoing here.
|-
|00:41
|We are also going to change our form here, so we don't need this for now.
|-
|00 :47
|Let us delete that.
|-
|00:49
|We are not going to need this either.
|-
|00:52
|We will only need the firstname and lastname. Date of birth and gender don't really matter.
|-
|00:59
|Let us delete this too.We don't need this either.... neither this.
|-
|01:04
|Ok there we are.
|-
|01:06
|This tutorial is not going to be exhaustive and is not going to be completely correct either.
|-
|01:13
|However it is going to show you how to apply your records to html select boxes.
|-
|01:23
|And also showing you how to update information based on what you selected.
|-
|01:30
|As you see here, I am going to create some data inside the '''while loop'''.
|-
|01:45
|We are going to create some html data here.
|-
|1:47
|Here I am echoing out. Let me just stop here for the time being.
|-
|01:56
|Lets go down here.
|-
|01:58
|We are going to create a select area which is a select box.
|-
|02:02
|It is a drop down box and for each of these boxes, we have an option.
|-
|02:14
|For example this could be 1 or 2.
|-
|02:17
|So lets come back here and "refresh button". Lets refresh this.
|-
|02:28
|Let us get rid of this dialogue box.
|-
|02:31
|Here we got 1 or 2. This is the piece of html here.
|-
|02:36
|Here we are going to apply this and we are going to search for our records. We are going to give a name.......... in each of these option boxes.
|-
|02:44
|I will give an option name to each record that we found.
|-
|02:48
|If you don't understand this, it means inside the code which is going to be repeated for every record, outside the loop, over here, we want to echo the first part of our html code.
|-
|03:00
|This will be "select" and the name of that is going to be "name".
|-
|03:08
|Or rather let me call it '''people name'''.
|-
|03:13
|After this, outside of our while loop, here we are going to echo out the ends tag. So let us type forward slash and select".
|-
|03:24
|The reason for not incorporating this inside our while loop is because if it is repeating, then it is going to repeat the start and the end tags and not the option part, which we need.
|-
|03:36
|Here the option part goes inside the loop.
|-
|03:39
|Let me echo out, lets say the "firstname".
|-
|03:42
|And what this does is, for every record, it is going to echo this option code
|-
|03:48
|And if you remember down here, we had "option" and "option end".
|-
|3:52
|This is being repeated over and over again.
|-
|03:57
|Now we have the "select" part here and the "select end" here.
|-
|04:01
|We need this echoed once, this echoed once and these echoed for every record in the database or in the table.
|-
|04:10
|You can verify this by refreshing.
|-
|04:13
|Oh! Where's our code gone?
|-
|04:15
|Lets go back and find where the mistake is. Actually we need to change this part here - the "if" statement.
|-
|04:25
|We are not looking for our "submit" button anymore, so we can delete that.
|-
|04:29
|So now, presuming everything is alright, we will refresh and we have a list box of all the first names of the records in our database.
|-
|04:39
|Now I want to make this look better and so I will say "surname" or "lastname" in the code.
|-
|04:47
|There you go! Refresh. This is a really easy way to use html code, is'nt it?
|-
|04:52
|Now we are going to talk about "option".
|-
|04:56
|We need to have a name for each option and the name for each one will be "id".
|-
|05:00
|If I click on refresh and come on my page source, you can see that we got 1,2,3,4, in each one here.
|-
|05:13
|This is really useful because now we can update, unique records rather than just going by the name.
|-
|05:23
|So here, I will start to create my update form.
|-
|05:28
|I will put an input box after my "select", and this is going to be "text".
|-
|05:33
|The name will be '''to change'''. This is what we are going to change by.
|-
| 05:40
|Next we will create another button or another input element called the '''submit''' button whose value will be "change".
|-
|05:53
|Here I will just change the first name for now. Just for an example.
|-
|05:58
|So here is the basis of our form.
|-
|06:00
|We have got the "name" here and what we want to change it to.
|-
|6:04
|So here I will change it from "Alex" to "Alexander" and then click on '''Change'''.
|-
|06:10
|At the moment nothing is happening.
|-
|06:12
|Now what we need to do is put this inside the form so that I can end my form.
|-
|06:17
|Over here, it is getting kind of messy but hopefully you can see whats going on.
|-
|06:23
|Let me scroll down over here. Up here we need to start our form.
|-
|06:27
|The action will be the page we are on at the moment which is "mysql dot php".
|-
|06:33
|Infact I will do it on another page.
|-
|06:36
|So rename it to "mysql update dot php".
|-
|06:40
|This will make it a bit easier for you to see and a lot easier for me to write.
|-
|06:45
|Then by refreshing that, we can see that we go to the new page which isn't found at the moment.
|-
|06:52
|I am going to create that inside here.
|-
|06:55
|We will save that straight away as "mysql underscore update dot php".
|-
|07:00
|We need to start our php tags.
|-
|07:03
|We need to require our "connect dot php" because we are connecting to our database again.
|-
|07:14
|We also need to get our value of the name that we are changing.
|-
|07:18
|So we will call our select name '''peoplename'''.
|-
|07:20
|So here we will type "peoplename" equals POST and '''peoplename'''.
|-
|07:29
|That is the name of the html element we are taking.
|-
|07:33
|This is going to be called 1,2,3.
|-
|07:37
|This is our id which is inside our database.
|-
|07:39
|"tochange" is the field in which we have ready to type our new value in.
|-
|07:47
|Here I will code a brief '''if statement''' just to say if '''peoplename''' and '''tochange'''.
|-
|07:56
|This makes sure that we have got both our values there.
|-
|08:01
|Then what we will do is type "change" equals "mysql query" and that is simply "UPDATE people", which is the name of our table here.
|-
|08:17
|"UPDATE people SET firstname equals tochange" where "firstname equals"....
|-
|08:31
|No, in fact we are not..... We are changing it by "id", isn't it?
|-
|08:39
|So we type where the "ID" is equal to the value of the"peoplename".
|-
|08:52
|Right, lets go back.
|-
|08:58
|Lets say I picked "Kyle" to change the name of "Kyle".
|-
|09:02
|The name of this is 2 so the "peoplename" is also 2.
|-
|09:06
|So we are changing this to this where the id is this.
|-
|09:11
|I will show you that in the next part of tutorial because I am running out of time.
|-
|09:15
|So I will see you there soon. This is Evan Varkey dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project. (Script contributed by Juanita Jayakar).

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-6/English-timed

2013-07-12T10:57:52Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:01
|Hello Everyone! In the previous tutorial we had selected the data and we successfully displayed the data to our page.
|-
|00:09
|Let me take you back to this page here.We can see that everything is working fine.
|-
|00:15
|We have all our data here.
|-
|00:17
|The next thing we will learn is how to specify somewhere that the user themselves can enter and specify data.
|-
|00:23
|To do this, I will delete all the codes in my page except "connect include".
|-
|00:29
|If I don't connect to my database, its not going to work.
|-
|00:33
|There is a lot of extracting and some other things to be found.
|-
|00:42
|I will retain firstname, lastname, date of birth, and gender either male or female.
|-
|00:53
|Below here, I will create a form.
|-
|00:55
|This will be an html form, so we need to start and end our tags.
|-
|01:03
|Our "action" will be "mysql dot php" and our "method" is going to be "POST".
|-
|01:13
|Here we will create a form in which the user can specify a name.
|-
|01:18
|For the name we will use our "surname".
|-
|01:22
|You can use any one of them. For example, your date of birth or gender to search.
|-
|01:28
|It is your choice.
|-
|01:30
|You could even use 2 fields to search.
|-
|01:33
|I will now show you how to use 2 fields so that you know that it is not very complicated but easy.
|-
|01:40
|Here I will type "firstname" and I will create an "input" box of type "text " and the "name" of this will be "firstname".
|-
|01:51
|We will create a break here and type "lastname".
|-
|01:55
|Next we will create another input box by copying the previous line and pasting it here.
|-
|02:03
|So this line is exactly the same but instead of "firstname", we type in "lastname".
|-
|02:11
|We will type "input" type equals "submit" and the "value" of that will be "Get data".
|-
|02:21
|Hence we have taken the "firstname" and "lastname" and the "submit" button.
|-
|02:25
|If I refresh this, we can see "Firstname" and "Lastname" has appeared.
|-
|02:29
|I will delete this for now and to do this I will check if the "submit" button has been pressed.
|-
|02:37
|To do this, I will first name the "submit" button as "submit".
|-
|02:41
|Then I will type in an "if" statement - "if dollar underscore POST submit".
|-
|02:51
|If the submit button has been pressed, start the block.
|-
|02:55
|This is the block of code to be executed and we end our block where we want this to end.
|-
|03:02
|This is after this curly bracket here because that is a part of our "while" statement here.
|-
|03:07
|We don't actually need our while statement for this. But I will still keep it for the sake of it.
|-
|03:22
|I will now type "grab POST data" and "dollar firstname".
|-
|03:29
|So this is "dollar underscore POST firstname" and then I will type "lastname".
|-
|03:35
|I will copy "firstname" and paste it here and change it to "lastname".
|-
|03:43
|So we have got our "firstname" and "lastname".
|-
|03:49
|I will type "echo" and this message "Record for firstname" . On second thoughts, let us not do this at the moment.
|-
|04:02
|I will go straight to my query here.
|-
|04:05
|If you remember, I had mentioned that you can specify what data you want in particular.
|-
|04:10
|For this, I will type "SELECT star FROM people WHERE firstname equals Alex and lastname equals Garrett".
|-
|04:29
|I had not shown this inside this piece of query where we are selecting.
|-
|4:39
|I had shown it in the update where we can update where the firstname equals "Alex" and the lastname equals "Garrett".
|-
|04:48
|Now we will select everything we want from our table here and we will say select everything where our firstname is Alex to lastname is Garrett.
|-
|04:57
|If we look at our database here, we are searching for our firstname and matching it to "Alex", searching the surname and matching it to "Garrett".
|-
|05:07
|We are selecting this whole row of data over here which is highlighted in pink at the moment and we are just selecting the whole data from here.
|-
|05:15
|From the date of birth to gender, my id to my firstname and lastname.
|-
|05:19
|So we have understood that this will select only one record at this time, therefore we don't need to order by the "id".
|-
|05:27
|But I will keep it like that anyway, since there is only one record.
|-
|05:31
|Ordering is not an issue, so we can just leave it that way.
|-
|05:35
|Ok so we are running our loop, we are selecting each part of data here and we are changing our male to "male" and female to "female".
|-
|05:43
|The echoing out our data based on this query because this data based query is specific to my first and surname.
|-
|05:52
|Then we are only going to echo out the firstname and the lastname over here that has been found, which is my first and lastname but by changing "Alex" here to "firstname" which is here.
|-
|06:04
|Now that's a repetition. This is a double variable here.
|-
|06:08
|We have the "firstname" and so here, I will name this as "firstname underscore form" and "lastname underscore form"
|-
|06:15
|We will select from where the firstname has been posted equal to this and the lastname that we posted equal to lastname form.
|-
|06:26
| So This is the data that's come from our form.
|-
|06:29
|so if I were to type "Alex Garrett" in my html form and submit it then this will equal "Alex" and this will equal "Garrett".
|-
|06:38
|Our query will return only one result because at the moment we have only one person named "Alex Garrett".
|-
|06:44
|So it will take all the data for "Alex Garrett" and check for female or male and then echo out this particular message.
|-
|06:51
|So if I come here and refresh at the moment there is nothing because no data has been specified in these form variables here.
|-
|07:01
|Let me show you. These are empty therefore we are selecting "star" from people under this condition "WHERE the name equals to nothing and the lastname equals to nothing".
|-
|07:12
|That has not returned any data at the moment because what we got in our firstname and lastname are actual peoples names.
|-
|07:24
|Anyway now I will just type in a completely random name.
|-
|07:28
|So lets say "David Green" and click get data and nothing has happened, ok?
|-
|07:36
|If we had an error message at the end over here, this is our query written over here, I could say "or die mysql error".
|-
|07:49
|I go back here and say "David Green" and click get data and oh! we don't have an error!
|-
|07:57
|Oh yes that's because the structure of the sql code correct and so we don't get any error.
|-
|08:03
|I was just testing that out.
|-
|08:05
|Now lets suppose that we do have a name that's in our database.
|-
|08:10
|Lets say "Alex Garrett" and we click "Get data".
|-
|08:13
|We are presented here with alex garrett was bron blah blah blah and is male.
|-
|08:20
|Lets type "Dale Garrett" and click "Get data" and we receive that information from the database.
|-
|08:26
|So you can see that this is very useful to incorporate forms into our data.
|-
|08:32
|I will stop here and go on to the next part where I will be talking about how to update records using this method.
|-
|08:40
|Many of you would be able to do that on your own by now but I will take you through it anyways along with a few other useful things.
|-
|0 8:48
|Ok so, see you soon. This is Evan Varkey dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project. (Script contributed by Juanita Jayakar).

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-5/English-timed

2013-07-12T10:57:20Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:01
|Welcome to mySQL part 5. To echo our data to the user and to display the results from this, we'll need to use "while" statement.
|-
|0:12
|As I mentioned, we have created a row variable and this is "=mysql_fetch_assoc".
|-
|00:21
|This is creating an associative array from our "extract" query which is here.
|-
|00:27
|So we are selecting everything in the "people" table and ordering them by "id" in ascending order.
|-
|00:33
|Inside our WHILE since we wrote row as an array and its an associative array, row[0] will be wrong because these are numeric.
|-
|00:46
|These are numeric id tags and instead of this we'll use our fieldnames, since this is associative.
|-
|00:59
|So, instead of 0 1 2 3 4, we'll be using the actual name.
|-
|01:05
|Lets create variables from this. Let me say id and then firstname equals, we are using the same structure throughout.
|-
|01:15
|So its quite easy to copy and paste this.
|-
|01:19
|Lets indent this.
|-
|01:24
|So we have 5 altogether.
|-
|01:28
|So that's five and then lets just change. This is a lazy act!
|-
|01:34
|But its just a lot quicker to do this way.
|-
|01:38
|So lastname and we have the date of birth. We also have the gender.
|-
|01:47
|We have all our data and now how do we use this?
|-
|01:51
|We need to use the "echo" command.
|-
|01:55
|There might be a loop inside the middle, at the moment. So anything we echo out will be repeated.
|-
|02:02
|Every record we have and that's right, too. We'll repeat this code.
|-
|02:07
|For example, I say text here. There are currently 4 records.
|-
|02:13
|After refreshing this page, you should see text echoed out 4 times.
|-
|02:18
|By typing out 4 times, this piece of code here represents every loop.
|-
|02:24
|Therefore we can incorporate for example, id or firstname or any other, that we have extracted from the database using our associative array.
|-
|02:36
|Now I'll write firstname lastname was born on dob for date of birth and is and I'll put gender up there.
|-
|0 2:49
|Not forgetting our linebreak. I'll refresh our page.
|-
|02:54
|Then we have our set of data structured using the variable names.
|-
|02:59
|We have given in the correct order and also it has been repeated through for every record we have.
|-
|03:08
|Okay, we have just given out the content of our table using this star, declared by this asterisk, where it collects every single data or every record.
|-
|03:22
|Now let me do this. I'll say IF gender==F then gender=female.
|-
|03:39
|The actual spelling of that and then let us say else gender=male. This is just rewriting the variable depending on the value.
|-
|03:50
|If we refresh now, we can see this has changed to '''male male''' and '''female female'''. We also have some interesting ways of displaying this data.
|-
|04:00
|At the moment I'm selecting from the people table and ordering by id and ascending order.
|-
|04:07
|I can also order by descending id. You can see that this switches this data around.
|-
|04:15
|We can also order it by firstname. This will put this in descending alphabetical order and ascending will put this in ascending alphabetical order.
|-
|04:33
|So we got ''' A D E and K'''.
|-
|04:36
|You can do the same with the surname.
|-
|04:39
|You could do the same with anything. Even Date of birth, as long as you include this over here.
|-
|04:46
|Another thing to do is, let me just take this back to id and have this as descending. We can use this limit 1 or we can say limit 2, 3 or 4.
|-
|04:58
|Now I'll limit 1 for the purpose of this.
|-
|05:00
|Now lets have 1 to let the user of the page know the last person that was inserted into this table.
|-
|05:11
|So I say "echo" here.
|-
|05:16
|echo last person to be inserted into table was and I'll leave it like that and add a linebreak.
|-
|05:27
|I'll just echo out the first and last name. Ok?
|-
|05:33
|So, here we can see that there is a lot of confusion.
|-
|05:38
|Last person to be inserted. Yes, in fact it does work!
|-
|05:43
|It is already typed in the "limit" command.
|-
|05:46
|What I've done is by limiting this by 1 in descending order of id - the id is incremental - I get 4 at the top and if we are limiting it by 1, 4 will be the only record that is selected.
|-
|06:01
|Therefore, the last person in the table, as per the last record displayed, will have its value echoed out.
|-
|06:09
|This "while" will only return 1 data value.
|-
|06:13
|Since we are returning 1 data value here, we are confused by these.
|-
|06:18
|This is one command here, so lets" * from people", "order by id decs" is another and "limit 1" is yet another.
|-
|06:27
|We don't use commas or anything. This is just how we write our code inside our query.
|-
|06:34
|Okay, just to test this , I'll insert just using the "insert" function in php myadmin and I'll insert another record.
|-
|06:45
|For example, lets type in "David Green" and our date of birth could be random.
|-
|06:55
|It doesn't really matter what we type in here. We say male.
|-
|07:00
|I came down here and submit this data.
|-
|07:02
|Click on browse and we have a new value here.
|-
|07:06
|When we come back here and refresh, that will change to "David Green".
|-
|07:10
|So this is really useful if you have a website in which your putting videos or personal pictures.
|-
|07:17
|You can just place in the last thing the user had inserted.
|-
|07:21
|Or may be the last person that has been registered on your website or anything.
|-
|07:30
|Possibility of using this is endless.
|-
|07:33
|Basically how to echo out data and how to manipulate it by just using mysql query.
|-
|07:44
|In the next part, we will allow our user to specify which data they want to show.
|-
|07:50
|We will create some html forms and to enable them to do this.
|-
|07:55
|This will let them select a name from the database or table of their choice.
|-
|08:00
|So, join me in the next part.
|-
|08:01
|Bye for now. This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-3/English-timed

2013-07-12T05:19:17Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|0:00
|Hi, welcome back. In this tutorial we will write some data into a database.
|-
|0:07
|To do this we will use our "mysql query" function.
|-
|0:12
|Now you can see here that we have our... records....
|-
|0:16
|I am redoing this tutorial because the first time I did it, it did not work.
|-
|0:22
|So first of all, I will just delete this data here.
|-
|0:29
|Well... ok... So we have a blank table, we have no data in our table whatsoever at the moment.
|-
|0:37
|we can see that there is nothing in here.
|-
|0:40
|There are just our field names here.
|-
|0:43
|To begin with, in here, lets just comment this.
|-
|0:47
|So "write some data". Then we will set up a query that will write data.
|-
|0:52
|So... "write" and we will use "mysql query" function.
|-
|0:57
|And this takes exactly 1 parameter which is our sql query.
|-
|1:02
|To do this, we will type "INSERT" to insert data.
|-
|1:06
|We are going to say "INSERT INTO".
|-
|1:09
|Now the reason I've typed this in capitals is because its sql code.
|-
|1:14
|If I type anything in uppercase it means it is sql code.
|-
|1:19
|If I type anything in lowercase it means its either a table name, database name or it is data that I'm writing to the database.
|-
|1:28
|So "INSERT INTO people" because that is our table name here.
|-
|1:33
| "INSERT INTO people" and then "VALUES" and then in brackets we will create a little area for each value.
|-
|1:42
|So we got 1,2,3,4,5.
|-
|1:46
|There are 5 fields so we need exactly 5 pieces of database written here.
|-
|1:53
|We need the id, firstname, lastname, all the way down to gender.
|-
|1:58
|These are created in or created using single quotes each separated by comas.
|-
|2:07
|The reason we don't use double quotes is because we've got these at the end or rather start and end over here.
|-
|2:15
|We don't need to insert our id here.
|-
|2:18
|Our next one is firstname - so I'll say "Alex".
|-
|2:22
|My lastname I'll say is "Garrett".
|-
|2:25
|For my date of birth I'll create a date function which equals to a variable "date"
|-
|2:31
|I'll put this in the particular structure.
|-
|2:35
|We can see from our database over here that when we go to insert a value, we can scroll down and see that our calender function has dates on it.
|-
|2:44
|So on clicking 23rd, we can see the structure this field takes.
|-
|2:50
|Its the year in long format.
|-
|2:52
|Next is the month and then the day.
|-
|2:55
|So 2009 02 23 which is 23rd of the 2nd, 2009.
|-
|03:02
|So what we can do here is we can structure our date function in capital Y m and then d using hyphen in between to get the structure we need.
|-
|03:13
|So this will be structured like that.
|-
|03:16
|This will equal to this and that will be the current date.
|-
|03:20
|Using the date and presuming that is in the structure of our date, we can insert it into our table here.
|-
|03:28
|The last one is gender and since I'm a male, I'm putting in "M" for male.
|-
|03:34
|Presuming that will work, we can run this.
|-
|03:37
|But before that, we could say "or die" at the end followed by a mysql error.
|-
|03:44
|I will skip that for now but feel free to add them if you like.
|-
|03:50
|Ok so refreshing our page.
|-
|03:53
|What you see is from the last tutorial.
|-
|03:57
|ummmm..... Lets comment this out.
|-
|03:59
|Lets ignore this.
|-
|04:01
|This will completely ignore this part of tutorial.
|-
|04:08
|Ok - so back to the code that I am currently showing and lets refresh.
|-
|04:14
| I've refreshed it twice so accordingly 2 records have been put in.
|-
|04:24
|But by going back to browse and scrolling down we can see, lets delete 1 of these, we can see the data I just specified has been put into the database.
|-
|04:35
|In fact what I have done is I have put my date of birth as the current date which I didn't mean to do.
|-
|04:43
|I don't want my date of birth as the current date because I was not born today.
|-
|04:48
|My firstname is ok. My lastname is ok. My gender is fine.
|-
|04:53
|We can see that my id is 6 at the moment and the next time we insert a record this would go up to 7 and then again to 8.
|-
|05:02
|You should know that by now.
|-
|05:03
|Next what I'll show you is how to change my date of birth because I have made a mistake.
|-
|05:09
|So first I will comment these 2 lines so we don't have to re-run this.
|-
|05:15
|And I'll create a new variable. We will just comment this as "update data".
|-
|05:20
|Current variable called "update" and that's equal to "mysql query" function.
|-
|05:26
|And inside the parameter that we are calling is "mysql query" code itself.
|-
|05:32
|And here you will type "UPDATE" and we are going to say the table name which is "people".
|-
|05:38
|Then we will say "SET" and we need to pick a particular field in which to set.
|-
|05:43
|This happens to be the "d o b" and that's equal to my actual date of birth which is 1989, the year I was born in and the month is November and the day I was born is 16th.
|-
|05:57
|By running this command what we are actually doing is we are updating everyone's date of birth in this table to this.
|-
|06:05
|That's because we've not specified where we want to update this.
|-
|06:10
|But we can do is after this we can say "WHERE id=6" because my unique id is 6.
|-
|06:18
|Lets have a look here.
|-
|06:23
|Otherwise it will update everyone else's.
|-
|06:26
|Remember I said the id is unique. Its better to say update my id.
|-
|06:32
|What I could do instead, is say, "WHERE firstname equals Alex". However this will update every record that has firstname "Alex".
|-
|06:41
|But we can also say "AND lastname equals Garrett".
|-
|06:46
|However if we will have two people in the database with the same firstname and lastname, we are still running the same risk as before.
|-
|06:54
|So its best to use our "unique" and thats the key word "unique id" which for me is 6.
|-
|07:00
|So at the moment, you can see that my date of birth is set to 2009 which is the current date.
|-
|07:06
|But by refreshing this page, nothing's happened because we are just running a command.
|-
|07:11
|Now if we click on browse to refresh and we scroll down, we can see that it has changed to what we specified and everything else has been left intact.
|-
|07:21
|So if you need to update data in your database or anything like that, you can specify what data you want to update.
|-
|07:29
|I used "dob" and that equals to the date of birth that was necessary.
|-
|07:34
|I could have updated my lastname.
|-
|07:36
|You also need to specify where you want this to be updated.
|-
|07:40
|So I said this record which is this long line here.
|-
|07:46
|These are called records and I specified "WHERE" the id was equal to 6 and that has updated my unique record.
|-
|07:56
|So that's what you have learnt - how to insert values and also how to update some values if you get it wrong like I did or if you just want to update some data which happens most of the time when your doing your databases.
|-
|08:10
|Ok - so join me in the next part to find out how to start reading from your database and display the data to the user.
|-
|08:17
|See you soon. This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-3/English-timed

2013-07-12T05:05:29Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|0:00
|Hi, welcome back. In this tutorial we will write some data into a database.
|-
|0:07
|To do this we will use our "mysql query" function.
|-
|0:12
|Now you can see here that we have our... records....
|-
|0:16
|I am redoing this tutorial because the first time I did it, it did not work.
|-
|0:22
|So first of all, I will just delete this data here.
|-
|0:29
|Well... ok... So we have a blank table, we have no data in our table whatsoever at the moment.
|-
|0:37
|we can see that there is nothing in here.
|-
|0:40
|There are just our field names here.
|-
|0:43
|To begin with, in here, lets just comment this.
|-
|0:47
|So "write some data". Then we will set up a query that will write data.
|-
|0:52
|So... "write" and we will use "mysql query" function.
|-
|0:57
|And this takes exactly 1 parameter which is our sql query.
|-
|1:02
|To do this, we will type "INSERT" to insert data.
|-
|1:06
|We are going to say "INSERT INTO".
|-
|1:09
|Now the reason I've typed this in capitals is because its sql code.
|-
|1:14
|If I type anything in uppercase it means it is sql code.
|-
|1:19
|If I type anything in lowercase it means its either a table name, database name or it is data that I'm writing to the database.
|-
|1:28
|So "INSERT INTO people" because that is our table name here.
|-
|1:33
| "INSERT INTO people" and then "VALUES" and then in brackets we will create a little area for each value.
|-
|1:42
|So we got 1,2,3,4,5.
|-
|1:46
|There are 5 fields so we need exactly 5 pieces of database written here.
|-
|1:53
|We need the id, firstname, lastname, all the way down to gender.
|-
|1:58
|These are created in or created using single quotes each separated by comas.
|-
|2:07
|The reason we don't use double quotes is because we've got these at the end or rather start and end over here.
|-
|2:15
|We don't need to insert our id here.
|-
|2:18
|Our next one is firstname - so I'll say "Alex".
|-
|2:22
|My lastname I'll say is "Garrett".
|-
|2:25
|For my date of birth I'll create a date function which equals to a variable "date"
|-
|2:31
|I'll put this in the particular structure.
|-
|2:35
|We can see from our database over here that when we go to insert a value, we can scroll down and see that our calender function has dates on it.
|-
|2:44
|So on clicking 23rd, we can see the structure this field takes.
|-
|2:50
|Its the year in long format.
|-
|2:52
|Next is the month and then the day.
|-
|2:55
|So 2009 02 23 which is 23rd of the 2nd, 2009.
|-
|03:02
|So what we can do here is we can structure our date function in capital Y m and then d using hyphen in between to get the structure we need.
|-
|03:13
|So this will be structured like that.
|-
|03:16
|This will equal to this and that will be the current date.
|-
|03:20
|Using the date and presuming that is in the structure of our date, we can insert it into our table here.
|-
|03:28
|The last one is gender and since I'm a male, I'm putting in "M" for male.
|-
|03:34
|Presuming that will work, we can run this.
|-
|03:37
|But before that, we could say "or die" at the end followed by a mysql error.
|-
|03:44
|I will skip that for now but feel free to add them if you like.
|-
|03:50
|Ok so refreshing our page.
|-
|03:53
|What you see is from the last tutorial.
|-
|03:52
|ummmm..... Lets comment this out.
|-
|03:59
|Lets ignore this.
|-
|04:01
|This will completely ignore this part of tutorial.
|-
|04:08
|Ok - so back to the code that I am currently showing and lets refresh.
|-
|04:14
| I've refreshed it twice so accordingly 2 records have been put in.
|-
|04:24
|But by going back to browse and scrolling down we can see, lets delete 1 of these, we can see the data I just specified has been put into the database.
|-
|04:35
|In fact what I have done is I have put my date of birth as the current date which I didn't mean to do.
|-
|04:43
|I don't want my date of birth as the current date because I was not born today.
|-
|04:48
|My firstname is ok. My lastname is ok. My gender is fine.
|-
|04:53
|We can see that my id is 6 at the moment and the next time we insert a record this would go up to 7 and then again to 8.
|-
|05:02
|You should know that by now.
|-
|05:03
|Next what I'll show you is how to change my date of birth because I have made a mistake.
|-
|05:09
|So first I will comment these 2 lines so we don't have to re-run this.
|-
|05:15
|And I'll create a new variable. We will just comment this as "update data".
|-
|05:20
|Current variable called "update" and that's equal to "mysql query" function.
|-
|05:26
|And inside the parameter that we are calling is "mysql query" code itself.
|-
|05:32
|And here you will type "UPDATE" and we are going to say the table name which is "people".
|-
|05:38
|Then we will say "SET" and we need to pick a particular field in which to set.
|-
|05:43
|This happens to be the "d o b" and that's equal to my actual date of birth which is 1989, the year I was born in and the month is November and the day I was born is 16th.
|-
|05:57
|By running this command what we are actually doing is we are updating everyone's date of birth in this table to this.
|-
|06:05
|That's because we've not specified where we want to update this.
|-
|06:10
|But we can do is after this we can say "WHERE id=6" because my unique id is 6.
|-
|06:18
|Lets have a look here.
|-
|06:23
|Otherwise it will update everyone else's.
|-
|06:26
|Remember I said the id is unique. Its better to say update my id.
|-
|06:32
|What I could do instead, is say, "WHERE firstname equals Alex". However this will update every record that has firstname "Alex".
|-
|06:41
|But we can also say "AND lastname equals Garrett".
|-
|06:46
|However if we will have two people in the database with the same firstname and lastname, we are still running the same risk as before.
|-
|06:54
|So its best to use our "unique" and thats the key word "unique id" which for me is 6.
|-
|07:00
|So at the moment, you can see that my date of birth is set to 2009 which is the current date.
|-
|07:06
|But by refreshing this page, nothing's happened because we are just running a command.
|-
|07:11
|Now if we click on browse to refresh and we scroll down, we can see that it has changed to what we specified and everything else has been left intact.
|-
|07:21
|So if you need to update data in your database or anything like that, you can specify what data you want to update.
|-
|07:29
|I used "dob" and that equals to the date of birth that was necessary.
|-
|07:34
|I could have updated my lastname.
|-
|07:36
|You also need to specify where you want this to be updated.
|-
|07:40
|So I said this record which is this long line here.
|-
|07:46
|These are called records and I specified "WHERE" the id was equal to 6 and that has updated my unique record.
|-
|07:56
|So that's what you have learnt - how to insert values and also how to update some values if you get it wrong like I did or if you just want to update some data which happens most of the time when your doing your databases.
|-
|08:10
|Ok - so join me in the next part to find out how to start reading from your database and display the data to the user.
|-
|08:17
|See you soon. This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-4/English-timed

2013-07-12T04:59:03Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on the fourth part of My SQL and php tutorials.
|-
|00:08
|In the last tutorial, I used "mysql_query" function to insert some values into our table.
|-
|00:21
|I made a mistake here by putting the date as current date, which isn't my date of birth.
|-
|00:26
|I was able to update here. I was also able to specify where I wanted to update.
|-
|00:32
|Using a unique ID key, I was able to specify exactly where I wanted to update.
|-
|00:40
|So we've already seen the "update" in mysql code.
|-
|00:46
|This is very useful.
|-
|00:48
|This query and code is the one that is mostly used while working with tables or if you're working with mysql in general.
|-
|00:59
|The next thing I show you is how to get data from your table and how to display it really well.
|-
|01:07
|So I will call this "update data" so that we know what that is.
|-
|01:12
|Here, we will say "extract data".
|-
|01:15
|That's a good word to use.
|-
|01:18
|Now, again we will say "extract" and we will create a variable.
|-
|01:23
|This again is "mysql query" and here is some code.
|-
|01:28
|This is slightly more complicated than using these single line queries.
|-
|01:37
|We use single line queries here, but we could have some code after this in order to display properly.
|-
|01:44
|First I will create another record in the table.
|-
|01:47
|So we don't need this "current date" function anymore.
|-
|01:51
|I need this "write" to be shown. Lets create some new value.
|-
|01:57
|I'll say "Kyle Headen" and I'll set a date of birth here. This one is month. So that is the 7th and lets say here, 24th.
|-
|02:12
|So now we got the date of birth.
|-
|02:14
|Now we've got male and then we've got "Kyle Headen" and we are again inserting this into our database.
|-
|02:23
|Lets refresh.
|-
|02:25
|Here I'll create another new value.
|-
|02:28
|I'll say "Emily Headen" and I'll just leave the date of birth as it is for now.
|-
|02:34
|This will be "Female" because I'll extract these records at one point.
|-
|02:39
|Refresh this again.
|-
|02:41
|So we've created 3 records here.
|-
|02:44
|I'll comment this "write". Backup my database.
|-
|02:48
|I'll click on browse in this specific table and you can see that I've got 3 records.
|-
|02:54
|Each one of these is called a "record of data".
|-
|02:58
|We can see this id has also automatically incremented.
|-
|03:04
|We've got the data that we specified and everything that we need.
|-
|03:08
|Ok, so we are extracting data here and I will uncomment this.
|-
|03:13
|Our mysql query is going to start with "select".
|-
|03:17
|This will be either specific records or we can use asterisk (*) to get all the data we need.
|-
|03:24
|Now I'll use an asterisk (*).
|-
|03:27
|What you could do is type "select firstname".
|-
|03:30
|But usually, when you have table, you will need most of the data and it'll take longer to do.
|-
|03:36
|Depending on the source of the table, this won't take very long.
|-
|03:40
|So you already have a couple of records or fields.
|-
|03:45
|But for now I'll say select asterisk (*), which is a star.
|-
|03:50
|We can say select star and then we say FROM.
|-
|03:54
|Again we say, the specified table which is "people".
|-
|03:57
|Here, we can say WHERE and how can you ummm...... filter for the data you want.
|-
|04:05
|So I can say "SELECT star (*) FROM people WHERE firstname= "Alex'".
|-
|04:11
|This query will return only one value because we can see that if we open up here, there is only one record with "Alex".
|-
|04:22
|We can do this by using another really useful function called "mysql numrows" and what I can do is echo this out.
|-
|04:32
|I'll say "echo mysql_num_rows". This is the reason we have given these variables here to be stored in.
|-
|04:43
|Here we can just type "extract".
|-
|04:46
|Our "extract" variable holds our query and our function here tells us how many rows are there in the query that is given out.
|-
|04:55
|Presuming that we gave firstname as "Alex", it'll show when we refresh.
|-
|05:01
|However you get 1.
|-
|05:03
|Lets change this. Lets put something that's common to two people in this database.
|-
|05:09
|That would be the "gender".
|-
|05:11
|So that'll be "Male" or "Female" . Here we can say "WHERE gender = M" and when we refresh, we get two records.
|-
|05:24
|So we can tell how many records we are getting out.
|-
|05:28
|This is really useful for saying how many people in my database are male, for example.
|-
|05:34
|And we can see how many males or females are registered to our website.
|-
|05:40
|So you can store registered information inside here.
|-
|05:44
|What we can also do is order the records.
|-
|05:47
|So I'll say "ORDER BY id" and we can choose descending that is "DESC" and we can choose ascending, which is "ASC".
|-
|05:58
|But for now I'll take this out because we haven't actually echoed out our data yet.
|-
|06:03
|We haven't displayed out our data to the users that has been selected.
|-
|06:08
|So there is no point in using that at the moment.
|-
|06:11
|Now, here I'll say select star (*) from "people" because I want to select all the data from this table here.
|-
|06:21
|So I can manipulate and show it to the user the way I want.
|-
|06:25
|I'll create something here called "numrows"; "numrows =" that.
|-
|06:30
|I'll use a "while" loop. This will use a specific function which is "mysql_fetch_assoc".
|-
|06:43
|It puts this into an associative array.
|-
|06:46
|If you don't know what an associative array is, check out "Arrays" tutorial.
|-
|06:51
|Coming back, "WHILE the row= mysql_fetch_aasoc" or associative is what I will say and this is inside the "extract" query.
|-
|07:06
|We are selecting "row" as array name and we are selecting this as an array for all the selected data.
|-
|07:15
|I'll stop here. In the next tutorial I'll show you how to echo out this data.
|-
|07:21
|I'll probably explain this a bit more in detail.
|-
|07:25
|This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-2/English-timed

2013-07-11T06:53:24Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:02
|Hi. In the first part of the tutorial we created a table inside our database "php academy" and we created our fields with all the relevant data to go with it... datatypes etc.
|-
|00:15
|Now we will insert some dummy data inside our database by doing this.
|-
|00:20
|I'll not click this "Insert" button here because by clicking this button here, we get very easy to use interface where we can type in firstname, lastname, date of birth using the calender function over here.
|-
|00:34
|You can see that just popped up.
|-
|00:36
|And we can also enter our gender here.
|-
|00:40
|As this is mysql php tutorial, I'll show you how to insert data using mysql or php.
|-
|0:49
|Now first of all we need to connect to our database.
|-
|00:52
|Under "mysql dot php" file, we will use the "include" function to include our file "connect dot php".
|-
|01:01
|Now if this is not in the same directory, you know that you can say "sub directory and then connect".
|-
|01:07
|Please specify this properly.
|-
|01:10
|If you dont want the page to execute... if you don't want the "Rest of the page" to execute here, you can use the "require" function.
|-
|01:18
|The "require" function kills the page if this isn't found from here on.
|-
|01:24
|The "include" will include it and then it will continue to echo or continue to run the rest of the page.
|-
|01:31
|If you use the "require" function, it will in fact "kill" if this cannot be included.
|-
|01:38
|So what I will say is "require connect dot php" just to say that if you can't connect to the database, the rest of this page is meaningless.
|-
|01:47
|We will get loads of rubbish upon the page.
|-
|01:51
|ok... so if "require connect dot php" and inside connect dot php we need to start our php mysql functions.
|-
|02:00
|Firstly you need to know - we will start with our variable called "connect" and this will use the function "mysql_connect".
|-
|02:08
|That's the first function you need to learn.
|-
|02:10
|Its a very very important function that enables you to connect to your database mysql.
|-
|02:15
|This takes 3 parameters.
|-
|02:19
|The first one here is the webserver itself - the address of the webserver.
|-
|02:23
|I'll use my computer at the moment with a local webserver with my local host.
|-
|02:28
|This can be written as 127.0.0.1 if you wish, as a substitute for local host.
|-
|02:36
|I prefer typing "local host" personally.
|-
|02:39
|But I'll use the standard username and password given to me.
|-
|02:43
|This is "root".
|-
|02:45
|My password doesn't exist because I don't have a password.
|-
|02:48
|We established a connection but what happens if this connection is not initialized properly.
|-
|02:54
|What we can do after this, is write "or die" and in brackets we can specify an error message for example "connection failed".
|-
|03:05
|So lets presume at the moment this connection works.
|-
|03:10
|I'll echo out a piece of code saying "connected".
|-
|03:19
|Ok now if this does connect successfully the rest of the script will run and echo out "connected" otherwise it would just give you this text and won't run the rest of the page.
|-
|03:30
|So what I will do is, I will open backup here.
|-
|03:34
|Refresh and you can see "connect dot php" and "mysql dot php" and I'll click on mysql dot php.
|-
|03:44
|The reason I'm not clicking connect is because inside mysql we require "connect dot php" anyway.
|-
|03:50
|So as long as these are both saved, we can just run mysql dot php.
|-
|03:48
|We have connected successfully.
|-
|03:59
|Now if I were to say change this to something like "I dont exist" then we get a connection error because that host name doesn't exist, .... at least on this computer.
|-
|04:11
|I can refresh and .... its taking a long time...... ok there we are.
|-
|04:17
|You can see that we have got mysql error here and we have connection failed text just here, that we specified earlier.
|-
|04:27
|Ok.. so we have got unknown mysql server host.
|-
|04:32
|If you ever get this error you know what to look out for.
|-
|04:36
|This is the host I specified and you can see what line its on and all our usual debugging message code.
|-
|04:44
|So lets presume that I...ummm.... in fact what I can do first is show you another useful thing or "die" you can also specify another function here.
|-
|04:55
|This is the second function that you should learn.
|-
|04:58
|Its "mysql error" - just put brackets like that - and when we refresh our page keeping the "I don't exist".
|-
|05:06
|We can refresh and its taking its time.....
|-
|05:09
|Ok there we are.
|-
|05:11
|What we have basically done is we echoed out the same error message that php has given us anyway.
|-
|05:19
|However if your.. ummm.... how do I say - if your error reporting is turned off for your user, this will give out what you want.
|-
|05:28
|Now we don't echo out this to the user.
|-
|05:32
|lets say we go up here and say "error reporting".
|-
|05:35
|Please see the error reporting tutorial I made, if you haven't.
|-
|05:40
|If you have...ummm.... set this to '0'.
|-
|05:43
|This will turn off all error reporting.
|-
|05:46
|So what happens is this error here will be ignored but our specific error will be given out to the user.
|-
|05:54
|Lets refresh here.... again its taking its time...so I apologize....
|-
|06:00
|There you go. We can just say that we got our specific error out there, ok?
|-
|06:06
|Presuming that we have connected successfully using this function and if not, then we have given out this error message, the next thing to do is to select our database
|-
|06:16
|To do this, we use the "mysql_select db" function.
|-
|06:22
|This takes exactly 1 parameter and that's the name of your database.
|-
|06:26
|So we click on "php myadmin" again, we can see that our database name is "phpacademy".
|-
|06:34
|So if I just type "phpacademy" this should work.
|-
|06:39
|Again we could use this or die feature.
|-
|06:42
|Using our die function we can specify a mysql_error if it doesn't exist or anything like that.
|-
|06:51
|So lets refresh this.
|-
|06:52
|In fact I'll change this back to "local host" because I'm getting back on track here and then lets refresh.
|-
|07:03
|So that's connected and if this is not found we are giving out a mysql_error.
|-
|07:12
|Lets try that - "I don't exist" and refresh and "Unknown database "idon'texist"".
|-
|07:20
|This is working well.
|-
|7:23
|Its quite useful to have these errors and then we can get users to report back if they don't exist.
|-
|07:29
|So its "phpacademy" there.
|-
|07:31
|I presume everything is ok and lets refresh.
|-
|07:34
|Change this back to "phpacademy" and save that.
|-
|07:38
|Refresh and we have been connected successfully.
|-
|07:41
|What I'll do is keep a log of this and say that I am connected successfully.
|-
|07:46
|I'll end our paragraph after this to continue with the rest of our code.
|-
|07:53
|Next thing is to write some data to our database which we will cover in our next tutorial.
|-
|08:00
|See you soon! This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-2/English-timed

2013-07-11T06:50:00Z

Sneha:

{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:02
|Hi. In the first part of the tutorial we created a table inside our database "php academy" and we created our fields with all the relevant data to go with it... datatypes etc.
|-
|00:15
|Now we will insert some dummy data inside our database by doing this.
|-
|00:20
|I'll not click this "Insert" button here because by clicking this button here, we get very easy to use interface where we can type in firstname, lastname, date of birth using the calender function over here.
|-
|00:34
|You can see that just popped up.
|-
|00:36
|And we can also enter our gender here.
|-
|00:40
|As this is mysql php tutorial, I'll show you how to insert data using mysql or php.
|-
|0:49
|Now first of all we need to connect to our database.
|-
|0:52
|Under "mysql dot php" file, we will use the "include" function to include our file "connect dot php".
|-
|1:01
|Now if this is not in the same directory, you know that you can say "sub directory and then connect".
|-
|1:07
|Please specify this properly.
|-
|1:10
|If you dont want the page to execute... if you don't want the "Rest of the page" to execute here, you can use the "require" function.
|-
|1:18
|The "require" function kills the page if this isn't found from here on.
|-
|1:24
|The "include" will include it and then it will continue to echo or continue to run the rest of the page.
|-
|1:31
|If you use the "require" function, it will in fact "kill" if this cannot be included.
|-
|1:38
|So what I will say is "require connect dot php" just to say that if you can't connect to the database, the rest of this page is meaningless.
|-
|1:47
|We will get loads of rubbish upon the page.
|-
|1:51
|ok... so if "require connect dot php" and inside connect dot php we need to start our php mysql functions.
|-
|2:00
|Firstly you need to know - we will start with our variable called "connect" and this will use the function "mysql_connect".
|-
|2:08
|That's the first function you need to learn.
|-
|2:10
|Its a very very important function that enables you to connect to your database mysql.
|-
|2:15
|This takes 3 parameters.
|-
|2:19
|The first one here is the webserver itself - the address of the webserver.
|-
|2:23
|I'll use my computer at the moment with a local webserver with my local host.
|-
|2:28
|This can be written as 127.0.0.1 if you wish, as a substitute for local host.
|-
|2:36
|I prefer typing "local host" personally.
|-
|2:39
|But I'll use the standard username and password given to me.
|-
|2:43
|This is "root".
|-
|2:45
|My password doesn't exist because I don't have a password.
|-
|2:48
|We established a connection but what happens if this connection is not initialized properly.
|-
|2:54
|What we can do after this, is write "or die" and in brackets we can specify an error message for example "connection failed".
|-
|3:05
|So lets presume at the moment this connection works.
|-
|3:10
|I'll echo out a piece of code saying "connected".
|-
|3:19
|Ok now if this does connect successfully the rest of the script will run and echo out "connected" otherwise it would just give you this text and won't run the rest of the page.
|-
|3:30
|So what I will do is, I will open backup here.
|-
|3:34
|Refresh and you can see "connect dot php" and "mysql dot php" and I'll click on mysql dot php.
|-
|3:44
|The reason I'm not clicking connect is because inside mysql we require "connect dot php" anyway.
|-
|3:50
|So as long as these are both saved, we can just run mysql dot php.
|-
|3:48
|We have connected successfully.
|-
|3:59
|Now if I were to say change this to something like "I dont exist" then we get a connection error because that host name doesn't exist, .... at least on this computer.
|-
|4:11
|I can refresh and .... its taking a long time...... ok there we are.
|-
|4:17
|You can see that we have got mysql error here and we have connection failed text just here, that we specified earlier.
|-
|4:27
|Ok.. so we have got unknown mysql server host.
|-
|4:32
|If you ever get this error you know what to look out for.
|-
|4:36
|This is the host I specified and you can see what line its on and all our usual debugging message code.
|-
|4:44
|So lets presume that I...ummm.... in fact what I can do first is show you another useful thing or "die" you can also specify another function here.
|-
|4:55
|This is the second function that you should learn.
|-
|4:58
|Its "mysql error" - just put brackets like that - and when we refresh our page keeping the "I don't exist".
|-
|5:06
|We can refresh and its taking its time.....
|-
|5:09
|Ok there we are.
|-
|5:11
|What we have basically done is we echoed out the same error message that php has given us anyway.
|-
|5:19
|However if your.. ummm.... how do I say - if your error reporting is turned off for your user, this will give out what you want.
|-
|5:28
|Now we don't echo out this to the user.
|-
|5:32
|lets say we go up here and say "error reporting".
|-
|5:35
|Please see the error reporting tutorial I made, if you haven't.
|-
|5:40
|If you have...ummm.... set this to '0'.
|-
|5:43
|This will turn off all error reporting.
|-
|5:46
|So what happens is this error here will be ignored but our specific error will be given out to the user.
|-
|5:54
|Lets refresh here.... again its taking its time...so I apologize....
|-
|6:00
|There you go. We can just say that we got our specific error out there, ok?
|-
|6:06
|Presuming that we have connected successfully using this function and if not, then we have given out this error message, the next thing to do is to select our database
|-
|6:16
|To do this, we use the "mysql_select db" function.
|-
|6:22
|This takes exactly 1 parameter and that's the name of your database.
|-
|6:26
|So we click on "php myadmin" again, we can see that our database name is "phpacademy".
|-
|6:34
|So if I just type "phpacademy" this should work.
|-
|6:39
|Again we could use this or die feature.
|-
|6:42
|Using our die function we can specify a mysql_error if it doesn't exist or anything like that.
|-
|6:51
|So lets refresh this.
|-
|6:52
|In fact I'll change this back to "local host" because I'm getting back on track here and then lets refresh.
|-
|7:03
|So that's connected and if this is not found we are giving out a mysql_error.
|-
|7:12
|Lets try that - "I don't exist" and refresh and "Unknown database "idon'texist"".
|-
|7:20
|This is working well.
|-
|7:23
|Its quite useful to have these errors and then we can get users to report back if they don't exist.
|-
|7:29
|So its "phpacademy" there.
|-
|7:31
|I presume everything is ok and lets refresh.
|-
|7:34
|Change this back to "phpacademy" and save that.
|-
|7:38
|Refresh and we have been connected successfully.
|-
|7:41
|What I'll do is keep a log of this and say that I am connected successfully.
|-
|7:46
|I'll end our paragraph after this to continue with the rest of our code.
|-
|7:53
|Next thing is to write some data to our database which we will cover in our next tutorial.
|-
|8:00
|See you soon! This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.

PHP-and-MySQL/C3/MySQL-Part-2/English-timed

2013-07-11T06:49:05Z

Sneha:

\{| border=1
!Time
!Narration
|-
|00:02
|Hi. In the first part of the tutorial we created a table inside our database "php academy" and we created our fields with all the relevant data to go with it... datatypes etc.
|-
|00:15
|Now we will insert some dummy data inside our database by doing this.
|-
|00:20
|I'll not click this "Insert" button here because by clicking this button here, we get very easy to use interface where we can type in firstname, lastname, date of birth using the calender function over here.
|-
|00:34
|You can see that just popped up.
|-
|00:36
|And we can also enter our gender here.
|-
|00:40
|As this is mysql php tutorial, I'll show you how to insert data using mysql or php.
|-
|0:49
|Now first of all we need to connect to our database.
|-
|0:52
|Under "mysql dot php" file, we will use the "include" function to include our file "connect dot php".
|-
|1:01
|Now if this is not in the same directory, you know that you can say "sub directory and then connect".
|-
|1:07
|Please specify this properly.
|-
|1:10
|If you dont want the page to execute... if you don't want the "Rest of the page" to execute here, you can use the "require" function.
|-
|1:18
|The "require" function kills the page if this isn't found from here on.
|-
|1:24
|The "include" will include it and then it will continue to echo or continue to run the rest of the page.
|-
|1:31
|If you use the "require" function, it will in fact "kill" if this cannot be included.
|-
|1:38
|So what I will say is "require connect dot php" just to say that if you can't connect to the database, the rest of this page is meaningless.
|-
|1:47
|We will get loads of rubbish upon the page.
|-
|1:51
|ok... so if "require connect dot php" and inside connect dot php we need to start our php mysql functions.
|-
|2:00
|Firstly you need to know - we will start with our variable called "connect" and this will use the function "mysql_connect".
|-
|2:08
|That's the first function you need to learn.
|-
|2:10
|Its a very very important function that enables you to connect to your database mysql.
|-
|2:15
|This takes 3 parameters.
|-
|2:19
|The first one here is the webserver itself - the address of the webserver.
|-
|2:23
|I'll use my computer at the moment with a local webserver with my local host.
|-
|2:28
|This can be written as 127.0.0.1 if you wish, as a substitute for local host.
|-
|2:36
|I prefer typing "local host" personally.
|-
|2:39
|But I'll use the standard username and password given to me.
|-
|2:43
|This is "root".
|-
|2:45
|My password doesn't exist because I don't have a password.
|-
|2:48
|We established a connection but what happens if this connection is not initialized properly.
|-
|2:54
|What we can do after this, is write "or die" and in brackets we can specify an error message for example "connection failed".
|-
|3:05
|So lets presume at the moment this connection works.
|-
|3:10
|I'll echo out a piece of code saying "connected".
|-
|3:19
|Ok now if this does connect successfully the rest of the script will run and echo out "connected" otherwise it would just give you this text and won't run the rest of the page.
|-
|3:30
|So what I will do is, I will open backup here.
|-
|3:34
|Refresh and you can see "connect dot php" and "mysql dot php" and I'll click on mysql dot php.
|-
|3:44
|The reason I'm not clicking connect is because inside mysql we require "connect dot php" anyway.
|-
|3:50
|So as long as these are both saved, we can just run mysql dot php.
|-
|3:48
|We have connected successfully.
|-
|3:59
|Now if I were to say change this to something like "I dont exist" then we get a connection error because that host name doesn't exist, .... at least on this computer.
|-
|4:11
|I can refresh and .... its taking a long time...... ok there we are.
|-
|4:17
|You can see that we have got mysql error here and we have connection failed text just here, that we specified earlier.
|-
|4:27
|Ok.. so we have got unknown mysql server host.
|-
|4:32
|If you ever get this error you know what to look out for.
|-
|4:36
|This is the host I specified and you can see what line its on and all our usual debugging message code.
|-
|4:44
|So lets presume that I...ummm.... in fact what I can do first is show you another useful thing or "die" you can also specify another function here.
|-
|4:55
|This is the second function that you should learn.
|-
|4:58
|Its "mysql error" - just put brackets like that - and when we refresh our page keeping the "I don't exist".
|-
|5:06
|We can refresh and its taking its time.....
|-
|5:09
|Ok there we are.
|-
|5:11
|What we have basically done is we echoed out the same error message that php has given us anyway.
|-
|5:19
|However if your.. ummm.... how do I say - if your error reporting is turned off for your user, this will give out what you want.
|-
|5:28
|Now we don't echo out this to the user.
|-
|5:32
|lets say we go up here and say "error reporting".
|-
|5:35
|Please see the error reporting tutorial I made, if you haven't.
|-
|5:40
|If you have...ummm.... set this to '0'.
|-
|5:43
|This will turn off all error reporting.
|-
|5:46
|So what happens is this error here will be ignored but our specific error will be given out to the user.
|-
|5:54
|Lets refresh here.... again its taking its time...so I apologize....
|-
|6:00
|There you go. We can just say that we got our specific error out there, ok?
|-
|6:06
|Presuming that we have connected successfully using this function and if not, then we have given out this error message, the next thing to do is to select our database
|-
|6:16
|To do this, we use the "mysql_select db" function.
|-
|6:22
|This takes exactly 1 parameter and that's the name of your database.
|-
|6:26
|So we click on "php myadmin" again, we can see that our database name is "phpacademy".
|-
|6:34
|So if I just type "phpacademy" this should work.
|-
|6:39
|Again we could use this or die feature.
|-
|6:42
|Using our die function we can specify a mysql_error if it doesn't exist or anything like that.
|-
|6:51
|So lets refresh this.
|-
|6:52
|In fact I'll change this back to "local host" because I'm getting back on track here and then lets refresh.
|-
|7:03
|So that's connected and if this is not found we are giving out a mysql_error.
|-
|7:12
|Lets try that - "I don't exist" and refresh and "Unknown database "idon'texist"".
|-
|7:20
|This is working well.
|-
|7:23
|Its quite useful to have these errors and then we can get users to report back if they don't exist.
|-
|7:29
|So its "phpacademy" there.
|-
|7:31
|I presume everything is ok and lets refresh.
|-
|7:34
|Change this back to "phpacademy" and save that.
|-
|7:38
|Refresh and we have been connected successfully.
|-
|7:41
|What I'll do is keep a log of this and say that I am connected successfully.
|-
|7:46
|I'll end our paragraph after this to continue with the rest of our code.
|-
|7:53
|Next thing is to write some data to our database which we will cover in our next tutorial.
|-
|8:00
|See you soon! This is Juanita Jayakar dubbing for the Spoken Tutorial Project.